diff options
Diffstat (limited to '21979-h')
| -rw-r--r-- | 21979-h/21979-h.htm | 8726 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 21979-h/images/a.jpg | bin | 0 -> 143982 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 21979-h/images/b.jpg | bin | 0 -> 149742 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 21979-h/images/c.jpg | bin | 0 -> 174203 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 21979-h/images/d.jpg | bin | 0 -> 178049 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 21979-h/images/e.jpg | bin | 0 -> 151273 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 21979-h/images/f.jpg | bin | 0 -> 150478 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 21979-h/images/g.jpg | bin | 0 -> 162833 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 21979-h/images/h.jpg | bin | 0 -> 178162 bytes |
9 files changed, 8726 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/21979-h/21979-h.htm b/21979-h/21979-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..037112f --- /dev/null +++ b/21979-h/21979-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,8726 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN" + "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd"> +<html> +<head> +<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1" /> +<title>The Project Gutenberg eBook of For Name and Fame, by G. A. Henty</title> +<style type="text/css"> +/*<![CDATA[*/ + body {background:#ffffff; + color:black; + font-family: "Times New Roman", serif; + font-size:14pt; + margin-top:70px; + margin-left:10%; + margin-right:10%; + text-align:justify} + caption { font-weight: bold; letter-spacing: 0.04em; font-family: "Arial"; + text-transform: uppercase; font-size: 18pt; } + div { text-align: center} + em {font-weight: bold} + h1 {text-align: center; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.05em} + h1.pg {text-align: center; text-transform: none; letter-spacing: 0em} + h2 {text-align: center; letter-spacing: 0.04em} + h3 {text-align: center; letter-spacing: 0.04em} + hr {height: 5px} + p {text-indent: 4% } + table {text-align: center} + td { font-family: "Arial"; text-align: left} + td.ltoc { letter-spacing: 0.04em; font-weight: bold; font-size: 18pt; + text-transform: uppercase; text-align: right; vertical-align: top } + td.rtoc { font-weight: bold; font-size: 18pt; text-align: left} + thead { font-weight: bold;} + hr.full { width: 100%; + margin-top: 0em; + margin-bottom: 0em; + border: solid black; + height: 5px; } + pre {font-size: 75%; } +/*]]>*/ +</style> +</head> +<body> +<h1 class="pg">The Project Gutenberg eBook, For Name and Fame, by G. A. Henty, +Illustrated by Gordon Browne</h1> +<pre> +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at <a href = "http://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a></pre> +<p>Title: For Name and Fame</p> +<p> Or Through Afghan Passes</p> +<p>Author: G. A. Henty</p> +<p>Release Date: June 30, 2007 [eBook #21979]</p> +<p>Language: English</p> +<p>Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1</p> +<p>***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK FOR NAME AND FAME***</p> +<p> </p> +<h3>E-text prepared by Martin Robb</h3> +<p> </p> +<hr class="full" /> +<p> </p> +<p> </p> +<p> </p> + +<h1>For Name and Fame</h1> +<h2>Or Through Afghan Passes<br /> +By G. A. Henty.</h2> +<p> </p> +<p> </p> +<hr /> +<p> </p> +<center> +<table summary="Table of Contents"> +<caption>Contents</caption> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"></td> +<td class="rtoc"><a href="#Preface">Preface</a>.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch1">Chapter 1</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">The Lost Child.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch2">Chapter 2</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">The Foundling.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch3">Chapter 3</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">Life On A Smack.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch4">Chapter 4</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">Run Down.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch5">Chapter 5</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">The Castaways.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch6">Chapter 6</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">The Attack On The Village.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch7">Chapter 7</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">The Fight With The Prahus.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch8">Chapter 8</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">The Torpedo.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch9">Chapter 9</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">The Advance Into Afghanistan.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch10">Chapter 10</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">The Peiwar-Khotal.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch11">Chapter 11</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">A Prisoner.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch12">Chapter 12</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">The Advance Up The Khyber.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch13">Chapter 13</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">The Massacre At Cabul.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch14">Chapter 14</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">The Advance Upon Cabul.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch15">Chapter 15</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">The Fighting Round Cabul.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch16">Chapter 16</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">The Fight In The Pass.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch17">Chapter 17</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">At Candahar.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch18">Chapter 18</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">On The Helmund.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch19">Chapter 19</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">The Battle Of Maiwand.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch20">Chapter 20</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">Candahar.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch21">Chapter 21</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">The Battle Of Candahar.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch22">Chapter 22</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">At Home At Last.</td> +</tr> +</table> +<br /> +<br /> +<br /> +<table summary="Illustrations"> +<caption>Illustrations<br /></caption> +<tr> +<td><a href="#PicA">Sam Dickson finds little Willie Gale.</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><a href="#PicB">Will and Hans in Search of a Shelter.</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><a href="#PicC">Captain Herbert saved.</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><a href="#PicD">William Gale in the hands of the +Afghans.</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><a href="#PicE">One of the Gunpowder Magazines had +Exploded.</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><a href="#PicF">Letters from the General.</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><a href="#PicG">Will saves Colonel Ripon.</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><a href="#PicH">Gundi carried by the Bayonet.</a></td> +</tr> +</table> +</center> +<p> </p> + +<h2><a name="Preface" id="Preface">Preface</a>.</h2> +<p>In following the hero of this story through the last Afghan war, +you will be improving your acquaintance with a country which is of +supreme importance to the British Empire and, at the same time, be +able to trace the operations by which Lord Roberts made his great +reputation as a general, and a leader of men. Afghanistan stands as +a line between the two great empires of England and Russia; and is +likely, sooner or later, to become the scene of a tremendous +struggle between these nations. Happily, at the present time the +Afghans are on our side. It is true that we have warred with, and +beaten them; but our retirement, after victory, has at least shown +them that we have no desire to take their country while, on the +other hand, they know that for those races upon whom Russia has +once laid her hand there is no escape.</p> +<p>In these pages you will see the strength and the weakness of +these wild people of the mountains; their strength lying in their +personal bravery, their determination to preserve their freedom at +all costs, and the nature of their country. Their weakness consists +in their want of organization, their tribal jealousies, and their +impatience of regular habits and of the restraint necessary to +render them good soldiers. But, when led and organized by English +officers, there are no better soldiers in the world; as is proved +by the splendid services which have been rendered by the frontier +force, which is composed almost entirely of Afghan tribesmen.</p> +<p>Their history shows that defeat has little moral effect upon +them. Crushed one day, they will rise again the next; scattered--it +would seem hopelessly--they are ready to reassemble, and renew the +conflict, at the first summons of their chiefs. Guided by British +advice, led by British officers and, it may be, paid by British +gold, Afghanistan is likely to prove an invaluable ally to us, when +the day comes that Russia believes herself strong enough to move +forward towards the goal of all her hopes and efforts, for the last +fifty years--the conquest of India.</p> +<p>G. A. Henty.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch1" id="Ch1">Chapter 1</a>: The Lost Child.</h2> +<p>"My poor pets!" a lady exclaimed, sorrowfully; "it is too bad. +They all knew me so well; and ran to meet me, when they saw me +coming; and seemed really pleased to see me, even when I had no +food to give them."</p> +<p>"Which was not often, my dear," Captain Ripon--her +husband--said. "However it is, as you say, too bad; and I will +bring the fellow to justice, if I can. There are twelve prize +fowls--worth a couple of guineas apiece, not to mention the fact of +their being pets of yours--stolen, probably by tramps; who will eat +them, and for whom the commonest barn-door chickens would have done +as well. There are marks of blood in two or three places, so they +have evidently been killed for food. The house was locked up last +night, all right; for you see they got in by breaking in a panel of +the door.</p> +<p>"Robson, run down to the village, at once, and tell the +policeman to come up here; and ask if any gypsies, or tramps, have +been seen in the neighborhood."</p> +<p>The village lay at the gate of Captain Ripon's park, and the +gardener soon returned with the policeman.</p> +<p>"I've heard say there are some gypsies camped on Netherwood +Common, four miles away," that functionary said, in answer to +Captain Ripon.</p> +<p>"Put the gray mare in the dog cart, Sam. We will drive over at +once. They will hardly expect us so soon. We will pick up another +policeman, at Netherwood. They may show fight, if we are not in +strength."</p> +<p>Five minutes later, Captain Ripon was traveling along the road +at the rate of twelve miles an hour; with Sam by his side, and the +policeman sitting behind. At Netherwood they took up another +policeman and, a few minutes later, drove up to the gypsy +encampment.</p> +<p>There was a slight stir when they were seen approaching; and +then the gypsies went on with their usual work, the women weaving +baskets from osiers, the men cutting up gorse into skewers. There +were four low tents, and a wagon stood near; a bony horse grazing +on the common.</p> +<p>"Now," Captain Ripon said, "I am a magistrate, and I daresay you +know what I have come for. My fowl house has been broken open, and +some valuable fowls stolen.</p> +<p>"Now, policeman, look about, and see if you can find any traces +of them."</p> +<p>The gypsies rose to their feet, with angry gestures.</p> +<p>"Why do you come to us?" one of the men said. "When a fowl is +stolen you always suspect us, as if there were no other thieves in +the world."</p> +<p>"There are plenty of other thieves, my friend; and we shall not +interfere with you, if we find nothing suspicious."</p> +<p>"There have been some fowls plucked, here," one of the policemen +said. "Here is a little feather--" and he showed one, of only half +an inch in length "--and there is another, on that woman's hair. +They have cleaned them up nicely enough, but it ain't easy to pick +up every feather. I'll be bound we find a fowl, in the pot."</p> +<p>Two of the gypsies leaped forward, stick in hand; but the oldest +man present said a word or two to them, in their own dialect.</p> +<p>"You may look in the pot," he said, turning to Captain Ripon, +"and maybe you will find a fowl there, with other things. We bought +'em at the market at Hunston, yesterday."</p> +<p>The policeman lifted the lid off the great pot, which was +hanging over the fire, and stirred up the contents with a +stick.</p> +<p>"There's rabbits here--two or three of them, I should say--and a +fowl, perhaps two, but they are cut up."</p> +<p>"I cannot swear to that," Captain Ripon said, examining the +portions of fowl, "though the plumpness of the breasts, and the +size, show that they are not ordinary fowls."</p> +<p>He looked round again at the tents.</p> +<p>"But I can pretty well swear to this," he said, as he stooped +and picked up a feather which lay, half concealed, between the edge +of one of the tents and the grass. "This is a breast feather of a +Spangled Dorking. These are not birds which would be sold for +eating in Hunston market, and it will be for these men to show +where they got it from."</p> +<p>A smothered oath broke from one or two of the men. The elder +signed to them to be quiet.</p> +<p>"That's not proof," he said, insolently. "You can't convict five +men, because the feather of a fowl which you cannot swear to is +found in their camp."</p> +<p>"No," Captain Ripon said, quietly. "I do not want to convict +anyone but the thief; but the proof is sufficient for taking you in +custody, and we shall find out which was the guilty man, +afterwards.</p> +<p>"Now, lads, it will be worse for you, if you make trouble.</p> +<p>"Constables, take them up to Mr. Bailey. He lives half a mile +away. Fortunately, we have means of proving which is the fellow +concerned.</p> +<p>"Now, Sam, you and I will go up with the Netherwood constable to +Mr. Bailey.</p> +<p>"And do you," he said, to the other policeman, "keep a sharp +watch over these women. You say you can find nothing in the tents; +but it is likely the other fowls are hid, not far off, and I will +put all the boys of the village to search, when I come back."</p> +<p>The gypsies, with sullen faces, accompanied Captain Ripon and +the policeman to the magistrate's.</p> +<p>"Is that feather the only proof you have, Ripon?" Mr. Bailey +asked, when he had given his evidence. "I do not think that it will +be enough to convict, if unsupported; besides, you cannot bring it +home to any one of them. But it is sufficient for me to have them +locked up for twenty-four hours and, in the meantime, you may find +the other fowls."</p> +<p>"But I have means of identification," Captain Ripon said. "There +is a footmark in some earth, at the fowl house door. It is made by +a boot which has got hobnails and a horseshoe heel, and a piece of +that heel has been broken off.</p> +<p>"Now, which of these men has got such a boot on? Whichever has, +he is the man."</p> +<p>There was a sudden movement among the accused.</p> +<p>"It's of no use," one of them said, when the policeman +approached to examine their boots. "I'm the man, I'll admit it. I +can't get over the boot," and he held up his right foot.</p> +<p>"That is the boot, sir," the constable exclaimed. "I can swear +that it will fit the impression, exactly."</p> +<p>"Very well," the magistrate said. "Constable, take that man to +the lockup; and bring him before the bench, tomorrow, for final +committal for trial. There is no evidence against the other four. +They can go."</p> +<p>With surly, threatening faces the men left the room; while the +constable placed handcuffs on the prisoner.</p> +<p>"Constable," Mr. Bailey said, "you had better not put this man +in the village lockup. The place is of no great strength, and his +comrades would as likely as not get him out, tonight. Put him in my +dog cart. My groom shall drive you over to Hunston."</p> +<p>Captain Ripon returned with his groom to Netherwood, and set all +the children searching the gorse, copses, and hedges near the +common, by the promise of ten shillings reward, if they found the +missing fowls. Half an hour later, the gypsies struck their tents, +loaded the van, and went off.</p> +<p>Late that afternoon, the ten missing fowls were discovered in a +small copse by the wayside, half a mile from the common, on the +road to Captain Ripon's park.</p> +<p>"I cannot bring your fowls back to life, Emma," that gentleman +said, when he returned home, "but I have got the thief. It was one +of the gypsies on Netherwood Common. We found two of the fowls in +their pot. No doubt they thought that they would have plenty of +time to get their dinner before anyone came, even if suspicion fell +on them; and they have hidden the rest away somewhere, but I expect +that we shall find them.</p> +<p>"They had burnt all the feathers, as they thought; but I found a +breast feather of a Spangled Dorking, and that was enough for me to +give them in custody. Then, when it came to the question of boots, +the thief found it no good to deny it, any longer."</p> +<p>That evening, Captain Ripen was told that a woman wished to +speak to him and, on going out into the hall, he saw a gypsy of +some thirty years of age.</p> +<p>"I have come, sir, to beg you not to appear against my +husband."</p> +<p>"But, my good woman, I see no reason why I should not do so. If +he had only stolen a couple of common fowls, for a sick wife or +child, I might have been inclined to overlook it--for I am not fond +of sending men to prison--but to steal a dozen valuable fowls, for +the pot, is a little too much. Besides, the matter has gone too +far, now, for me to retract, even if I wished to--which I certainly +do not."</p> +<p>"He is a good husband, sir."</p> +<p>"He may be," Captain Ripon said, "though that black eye you have +got does not speak in his favor But that has nothing to do with it. +Matters must take their course."</p> +<p>The woman changed her tone.</p> +<p>"I have asked you fairly, sir; and it will be better for you if +you don't prosecute Reuben."</p> +<p>"Oh, nonsense, my good woman! Don't let me have any threats, or +it will be worse for you."</p> +<p>"I tell you," the woman exclaimed, fiercely, "it will be the +worse for you, if you appear against my Reuben."</p> +<p>"There, go out," Captain Ripon said, opening the front door of +the hall. "As if I cared for your ridiculous threats! Your husband +will get what he deserves--five years, if I am not mistaken."</p> +<p>"You will repent this," the gypsy said, as she passed out.</p> +<p>Captain Ripon closed the door after her, without a word.</p> +<p>"Well, who was it?" his wife inquired, when he returned to the +drawing room.</p> +<p>"An insolent gypsy woman, wife of the man who stole the fowls. +She had the impudence to threaten me, if I appeared against +him."</p> +<p>"Oh, Robert!" the young wife exclaimed, apprehensively, "what +could she do? Perhaps you had better not appear."</p> +<p>"Nonsense, my dear!" her husband laughed. "Not appear, because +an impudent gypsy woman has threatened me? A nice magistrate I +should be! Why, half the fellows who are committed swear that they +will pay off the magistrate, some day; but nothing ever comes of +it. Here, we have been married six months, and you are wanting me +to neglect my duty; especially when it is your pet fowls which have +been stolen.</p> +<p>"Why, at the worst, my dear," he went on, seeing that his wife +still looked pale, "they could burn down a tick or two, on a windy +night in winter and, to satisfy you, I will have an extra sharp +lookout kept in that direction, and have a watchdog chained up near +them.</p> +<p>"Come, my love, it is not worth giving a second thought about; +and I shall not tell you about my work on the bench, if you are +going to take matters to heart like this."</p> +<p>The winter came and went, and the ricks were untouched, and +Captain Ripon forgot all about the gypsy's threats. At the assizes +a previous conviction was proved against her husband, and he got +five years penal servitude and, after the trial was over, the +matter passed out of the minds of both husband and wife.</p> +<p>They had, indeed, other matters to think about for, soon after +Christmas, a baby boy was born, and monopolized the greater portion +of his mother's thoughts. When, in due time, he was taken out for +walks, the old women of the village--perhaps with an eye to +presents from the Park--were unanimous in declaring that he was the +finest boy ever seen, and the image both of his father and +mother.</p> +<p>He certainly was a fine baby; and his mother lamented sorely +over the fact that he had a dark blood mark, about the size of a +three-penny piece, upon his shoulder. Her husband, however, +consoled her by pointing out that--as it was a boy--the mark did +not matter in the slightest; whereas--had it been a girl--the mark +would have been a disfigurement, when she attained to the dignified +age at which low dresses are worn.</p> +<p>"Yes, of course, that would have been dreadful, Robert. Still, +you know, it is a pity."</p> +<p>"I really cannot see that it is even a pity, little woman; and +it would have made no great difference if he had been spotted all +over, like a leopard, so that his face and arms were free. The only +drawback would have been he would have got some nickname or other, +such as 'the Leopard,' or 'Spotty,' or something of that sort, when +he went to bathe with his school fellows. But this little spot does +not matter, in the slightest.</p> +<p>"Some day or other Tom will laugh, when I tell him what a fuss +you made over it."</p> +<p>Mrs. Ripon was silenced but, although she said nothing more +about it, she was grieved in her heart at this little blemish on +her boy; and lamented that it would spoil his appearance, when he +began to run about in little short frocks; and she determined, at +once, that he should wear long curls, until he got into +jackets.</p> +<p>Summer, autumn, and winter came and passed. In the spring, Tom +Ripon was toddling about; but he had not yet begun to talk, +although his mother declared that certain incoherent sounds, which +he made, were quite plain and distinct words; but her husband, +while willing to allow that they might be perfectly intelligible to +her, insisted that--to the male ear--they in no way resembled +words.</p> +<p>"But he ought to begin to talk, Robert," his wife urged. "He is +sixteen months old, now, and can run about quite well. He really +ought to begin to talk."</p> +<p>"He will talk, before long," her husband said, carelessly. "Many +children do not talk till they are eighteen months old, some not +till they are two years. Besides, you say he does begin, +already."</p> +<p>"Yes, Robert, but not quite plainly."</p> +<p>"No, indeed, not plainly at all," her husband laughed. "Don't +trouble, my dear, he will talk soon enough; and if he only talks as +loud as he roars, sometimes, you will regret the hurry you have +been in about it."</p> +<p>"Oh, Robert, how can you talk so? I am sure he does not cry more +than other children. Nurse says he is the best child she ever +knew."</p> +<p>"Of course she does, my dear; nurses always do. But I don't say +he roars more than other children. I only say he roars, and that +loudly; so you need not be afraid of there being anything the +matter with his tongue, or his lungs.</p> +<p>"What fidgets you young mothers are, to be sure!"</p> +<p>"And what heartless things you young fathers are, to be sure!" +his wife retorted, laughing. "Men don't deserve to have children. +They do not appreciate them, one bit."</p> +<p>"We appreciate them, in our way, little woman; but it is not a +fussy way. We are content with them as they are, and are not in any +hurry for them to run, or to walk, or to cut their first teeth. Tom +is a fine little chap, and I am very fond of him, in his +way--principally, perhaps, because he is your Tom--but I cannot see +that he is a prodigy."</p> +<p>"He is a prodigy," Mrs. Ripon said, with a little toss of her +head, "and I shall go up to the nursery, to admire him."</p> +<p>So saying, she walked off with dignity; and Captain Ripon went +out to look at his horses, and thought to himself what a wonderful +dispensation of providence it was, that mothers were so fond of +their babies.</p> +<p>"I don't know what the poor little beggars would do," he +muttered, "if they had only their fathers to look after them; but I +suppose we should take to it, just as the old goose in the yard has +taken to that brood of chickens, whose mother was carried off by +the fox.</p> +<p>"By the way, I must order some wire netting. I forgot to write +for it, yesterday."</p> +<p>Another two months. It was June, and now even Captain Ripon +allowed that Tom could say "Pa," and "Ma," with tolerable +distinctness; but as yet he had got no farther. He could now run +about sturdily and, as the season was warm and bright, and Mrs. +Ripon believed in fresh air, the child spent a considerable portion +of his time in the garden.</p> +<p>One day his mother was out with him, and he had been running +about for some time. Mrs. Ripon was picking flowers, for she had a +dinner party that evening, and she enjoyed getting her flowers, and +arranging her vases, herself. Presently she looked round, but Tom +was missing. There were many clumps of ornamental shrubs on the +lawn, and Mrs. Ripon thought nothing of his disappearance.</p> +<p>"Tom," she called, "come to mamma, she wants you," and went on +with her work.</p> +<p>A minute or two passed.</p> +<p>"Where is that little pickle?" she said. "Hiding, I suppose," +and she went off in search.</p> +<p>Nowhere was Tom to be seen. She called loudly, and searched in +the bushes.</p> +<p>"He must have gone up to the house.</p> +<p>"Oh, here comes nurse. Nurse, have you seen Master Tom? He has +just run away," she called.</p> +<p>"No, ma'am, I have seen nothing of him."</p> +<p>"He must be about the garden then, somewhere. Look about, nurse. +Where can the child have hidden itself?"</p> +<p>Nurse and mother ran about, calling loudly the name of the +missing child. Five minutes later Mrs. Ripon ran into the study, +where her husband was going through his farm accounts.</p> +<p>"Oh, Robert," she said, "I can't find Tom!" and she burst into +tears.</p> +<p>"Not find Tom?" her husband said, rising in surprise. "Why, how +long have you missed him?"</p> +<p>"He was out in the garden with me. I was picking flowers for the +dinner table and, when I looked round, he was gone. Nurse and I +have been looking everywhere, and calling, but we cannot find +him."</p> +<p>"Oh, he is all right," Captain Ripon said, cheerfully. "Do not +alarm yourself, little woman. He must have wandered into the +shrubbery. We shall hear him howling, directly. But I will come and +look for him."</p> +<p>No better success attended Captain Ripon's search than that +which his wife had met with. He looked anxious, now. The gardeners +and servants were called, and soon every place in the garden was +ransacked.</p> +<p>"He must have got through the gate, somehow, into the park," +Captain Ripon said, hurrying in that direction. "He certainly is +not in the garden, or in any of the hothouses."</p> +<p>Some of the men had already gone in that direction. Presently +Captain Ripon met one, running back.</p> +<p>"I have been down to the gate, sir, and can see nothing of +Master Tom; but in the middle of the drive, just by the clump of +laurels by the gate, this boot was lying--just as if it had been +put there on purpose, to be seen."</p> +<p>"Nonsense!" Captain Ripon said. "What can that have to do with +it?"</p> +<p>Nevertheless he took the boot, and looked at it. It was a +roughly-made, heavy boot, such as would be worn by a laboring man. +He was about to throw it carelessly aside, and to proceed on his +search, when he happened to turn it over. Then he started, as if +struck.</p> +<p>"Good Heaven!" he exclaimed, "it is the gypsy's."</p> +<p>Yes, he remembered it now. The man had pleaded not guilty, when +brought up at the assizes, and the boot had been produced as +evidence. He remembered it particularly because, after the man was +sentenced, his wife had provoked a smile by asking that the boots +might be given up to her; in exchange for a better pair for her +husband to put on, when discharged from prison.</p> +<p>Yes, it was clear. The gypsy woman had kept her word, and had +taken her revenge. She had stolen the child, and had placed the +boot where it would attract attention, in order that the parents +might know the hand that struck them.</p> +<p>Instantly Captain Ripon ran to the stable, ordered the groom to +mount at once, and scour every road and lane; while he himself rode +off to Hunston to give notice to the police, and offer a large +reward for the child's recovery. He charged the man who had brought +the boot to carry it away, and put it in a place of safety till it +was required; and on no account to mention to a soul where he put +it.</p> +<p>Before riding off he ran in to his wife, who was half wild with +grief, to tell her that he was going to search outside the park; +and that she must keep up her spirits for, no doubt, Tom would turn +up all right, in no time.</p> +<p>He admitted to himself, however, as he galloped away, that he +was not altogether sure that Tom would be so speedily recovered. +The woman would never have dared to place the boot on the road, and +so give a clue against herself, unless she felt very confident that +she could get away, or conceal herself.</p> +<p>"She has probably some hiding place, close by the park," he said +to himself, "where she will lie hid till night, and will then make +across country."</p> +<p>He paused at the village, and set the whole population at work, +by telling them that his child was missing--and had, he believed, +been carried off by a gypsy woman--and that he would give fifty +pounds to anyone who would find him. She could not be far off, as +it was only about half an hour since the child had been missed.</p> +<p>Then he galloped to Hunston, set the police at work and, going +to a printer, told him instantly to set up and strike off placards, +offering five hundred pounds reward for the recovery of the child. +This was to be done in an hour or two, and then taken to the police +station for distribution throughout the country round. Having now +done all in his power, Captain Ripon rode back as rapidly as he had +come, in hopes that the child might already have been found.</p> +<p>No news had, however, been obtained of him, nor had anyone seen +any strange woman in the neighborhood.</p> +<p>On reaching the house, he found his wife prostrated with grief +and, in answer to her questions, he thought it better to tell her +about the discovery of the boot.</p> +<p>"We may be some little time, before we find the boy," he said; +"but we shall find him, sooner or later. I have got placards out +already, offering five hundred pounds reward; and this evening I +will send advertisements to all the papers in this and the +neighboring counties.</p> +<p>"Do not fret, darling. The woman has done it out of spite, no +doubt; but she will not risk putting her neck in a noose, by +harming the child. It is a terrible grief, but it will only be for +a time. We are sure to find him before long."</p> +<p>Later in the evening, when Mrs. Ripon had somewhat recovered her +composure, she said to her husband:</p> +<p>"How strange are God's ways, Robert. How wicked and wrong in us +to grumble! I was foolish enough to fret over that mark on the +darling's neck, and now the thought of it is my greatest comfort. +If it should be God's will that months or years should pass over, +before we find him, there is a sign by which we shall always know +him. No other child can be palmed off upon us, as our own. When we +find Tom we shall know him, however changed he may be!"</p> +<p>"Yes, dear," her husband said, "God is very good, and this trial +may be sent us for the best. As you say, we can take comfort, now, +from what we were disposed to think, at the time, a little cross. +After that, dear, we may surely trust in God. That mark was placed +there that we might know our boy again and, were it not decreed +that we should again see him, that mark would have been +useless."</p> +<p>The thought, for a time, greatly cheered Mrs. Ripon but, +gradually, the hope that she should ever see her boy again faded +away; and Captain Ripon became much alarmed at the manifest change +in her health.</p> +<p>In spite of all Captain Ripon could do, no news was obtained of +the gypsy, or Tom. For weeks he rode about the country, asking +questions in every village; or hurried away to distant parts of +England, where the police thought they had a clue.</p> +<p>It was all in vain. Every gypsy encampment in the kingdom was +searched, but without avail; and even the police, sharp eyed as +they are, could not guess that the decent-looking Irishwoman, +speaking--when she did speak, which was seldom, for she was a +taciturn woman--with a strong brogue, working in a laundry in a +small street in the Potteries, Notting Hill, was the gypsy they +were looking for; or that the little boy, whose father she said was +at sea, was the child for whose discovery a thousand pounds was +continually advertised.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch2" id="Ch2">Chapter 2</a>: The Foundling.</h2> +<p>It was a bitterly cold night in January. The wind was roaring +across the flats and fens of Cambridgeshire, driving tiny flakes of +snow before it. But few people had been about all day, and those +whose business compelled them to face the weather had hurried +along, muffled up to the chin. It was ten at night; and the porter +and his wife at the workhouse, at Ely, had just gone to bed, when +the woman exclaimed:</p> +<p>"Sam, I hear a child crying."</p> +<p>"Oh, nonsense!" the man replied, drawing the bedclothes higher +over his head. "It is the wind; it's been whistling all day."</p> +<p>The woman was silent, but not convinced. Presently she sat up in +bed.</p> +<p>"I tell you, Sam, it's a child; don't you hear it, man? It's a +child, outside the gate. On such a night as this, too. Get up, man, +and see; if you won't, I will go myself."</p> +<p>"Lie still, woman. It's all thy fancy."</p> +<p>"You are a fool, Sam Dickson," his wife said, sharply. "Do you +think I have lived to the age of forty-five, and don't know a +child's cry, when I hear it? Now are you going to get up, or am +I?"</p> +<p>With much grumbling, the porter turned out of bed, slipped on a +pair of trousers and a greatcoat, took down the key from the wall, +lighted a lantern, and went out. He opened the gate, and looked +out. There was nothing to be seen; and he was about to close the +gate again, with a curse on his wife's fancies, when a fresh cry +broke on his ears. He hurried out now and, directed by the voice, +found lying near the gate a child, wrapped in a dark-colored shawl, +which had prevented him from seeing it at his first glance. There +was no one else in sight.</p> +<a id="PicA" name="PicA"></a> +<center><img src="images/a.jpg" alt= +"Illustration: Sam Dickson finds little Willie Gale." /></center> +<p>The man lifted his lantern above his head, and gave a shout. +There was no answer. Then he raised the child and carried it in; +locked the door, and entered the lodge.</p> +<p>"You are right, for once," he said. "Here is a child, and a +pretty heavy one, too. It has been deserted by someone; and a +heartless creature she must have been, for in another half hour it +would have been frozen to death, if you had not heard it."</p> +<p>The woman was out of bed now.</p> +<p>"It is a boy," she said, opening the shawl, "about two years +old, I should say.</p> +<p>"Don't cry, my boy--don't cry.</p> +<p>"It's half frozen, Sam. The best thing will be to put it into +our bed, that has just got warm. I will warm it up a little milk. +It's no use taking it into the ward, tonight."</p> +<p>Ten minutes later the child was sound asleep; the porter--who +was a good-natured man--having gone over to sleep in an empty bed +in the house, leaving the child to share his wife's bed.</p> +<p>In the morning the foundling opened its eyes and looked round. +Seeing everything strange, it began to cry.</p> +<p>"Don't cry, dear," the woman said. "I will get you some nice +breakfast, directly."</p> +<p>The kindness of tone at once pacified the child. It looked +round.</p> +<p>"Where's mother?" he asked.</p> +<p>"I don't know, dear. We shall find her soon enough, no doubt; +don't you fret."</p> +<p>The child did not seem inclined to fret. On the contrary, he +brightened up visibly.</p> +<p>"Will she beat Billy, when she comes back?"</p> +<p>"No, my dear, she sha'n't beat you. Does she often beat +you?"</p> +<p>The child nodded its head several times, emphatically.</p> +<p>"Then she's a bad lot," the woman said, indignantly.</p> +<p>The child ate its breakfast contentedly, and was then carried by +the porter's wife to the master, who had already heard the +circumstance of its entry.</p> +<p>"It's of no use asking such a baby whether it has any name," he +said; "of course, it would not know. It had better go into the +infants' ward. The guardians will settle what its name shall be. We +will set the police at work, and try and find out something about +its mother. It is a fine-looking little chap; and she must be +either a thoroughly bad one, or terribly pressed, to desert it like +this. Most likely it is a tramp and, in that case, it's odds we +shall never hear further about it.</p> +<p>"Any distinguishing mark on its clothes?"</p> +<p>"None at all, sir. It is poorly dressed, and seems to have been +very bad treated. Its skin is dirty, and its little back is black +and blue with bruises; but it has a blood mark on the neck, which +will enable its mother to swear to it, if it's fifty years +hence--but I don't suppose we shall ever hear of her, again."</p> +<p>That afternoon, however, the news came that the body of a tramp +had been found, frozen to death in a ditch near the town. She had +apparently lost her way and, when she had fallen in, was so numbed +and cold that she was unable to rise, and so had been drowned in +the shallow water. When the master heard of it, he sent for the +porter's wife.</p> +<p>"Mrs. Dickson," he said, "you had better take that child down, +and let it see the tramp they have found, frozen to death. The +child is too young to be shocked at death, and will suppose she is +asleep. But you will be able to see if he recognizes her."</p> +<p>There was no doubt as to the recognition. The child started in +terror, when he saw the woman lying in the shed into which she had +been carried. It checked its first impulse to cry out, but +struggled to get further off.</p> +<p>"Moder asleep," he said, in a whisper. "If she wake, she beat +Billy."</p> +<p>That was enough. The woman carried him back to the house.</p> +<p>"She's his mother, sir, sure enough," she said to the master, +"though how she should be puzzles me. She is dressed in pretty +decent clothes; but she is as dark as a gypsy, with black hair. +This child is fair, with a skin as white as milk, now he is +washed."</p> +<p>"I daresay he takes after his father," the master--who was a +practical man--said. "I hear that there is no name on her things, +no paper or other article which would identify her in her pockets; +but there is two pounds, twelve shillings in her purse, so she was +not absolutely in want. It will pay the parish for her +funeral."</p> +<p>An hour later the guardians assembled and, upon hearing the +circumstances of the newcomer's admission, and the death of the +tramp, they decided that the child should be entered in the books +as "William Gale,"--the name being chosen with a reference to the +weather during which he came into the house--and against his name a +note was written, to the effect that his mother--a tramp, name +unknown--had, after leaving him at the door of the workhouse, been +found frozen to death next day.</p> +<p>William Gale grew, and throve. He was a quiet and contented +child; accustomed to be shut up all day alone, while his mother was +out washing, the companionship of other children in the workhouse +was a pleasant novelty and, if the food was not such as a dainty +child would fancy, it was at least as good as he had been +accustomed to.</p> +<p>The porter's wife continued to be the fast friend of the child +whom she had saved from death. The fact that she had done so gave +her an interest in it. Her own children were out in service, or at +work in the fields; and the child was a pleasure to her. Scarce a +day passed, then, that she would not go across the yard up to the +infants' ward, and bring Billy down to the lodge; where he would +play contentedly by the hour, or sit watching her, and sucking at a +cake, while she washed or prepared her husband's dinner.</p> +<p>Billy was seldom heard to cry. Perhaps he had wept all his stock +of tears away, before he entered the house. He had seldom fits of +bad temper, and was a really lovable child. Mrs. Dickson never +wavered in the opinion she had first formed--that the dead tramp +was not Billy's mother--but as no one else agreed with her, she +kept her thoughts to herself.</p> +<p>The years passed on, and William Gale was now no longer in the +infants' ward, but took his place in the boys' school. Here he at +once showed an intelligence beyond that of the other boys of his +own age. The hours which he had, each day, spent in the porter's +lodge had not been wasted. The affection of the good woman had +brightened his life, and he had none of the dull, downcast look so +common among children in workhouses. She had encouraged him to talk +and play, had taught him the alphabet, and supplied him with an +occasional picture book, with easy words. Indeed, she devoted far +more time to him than many mothers, in her class of life, can give +to their children.</p> +<p>The guardians, as they went in and out to board meeting, would +delight her by remarking:</p> +<p>"That is really a fine little fellow, Mrs. Dickson. He really +does you credit. A fine, sturdy, independent little chap."</p> +<p>The child, of course, wore the regular uniform of workhouse +children; but Mrs. Dickson--who was handy with her needle--used to +cut and alter the clothes to fit him, and thus entirely changed +their appearance.</p> +<p>"He looks like a gentleman's child," one of the guardians said, +one day.</p> +<p>"I believe he is a gentleman's child, sir. Look at his white +skin; see how upright he is, with his head far back, as if he was +somebody. He is different, altogether, from the run of them. I +always said he came of good blood, and I shall say so to my dying +day."</p> +<p>"It may be so, Mrs. Dickson; but the woman who left him here, if +I remember right, did not look as if she had any good blood in +her."</p> +<p>"Not likely, sir. She never came by him honestly, I am sure. I +couldn't have believed she was his mother, not if she had sworn to +it with her dying breath."</p> +<p>Mrs. Dickson's belief was not without influence upon the boy. +When he was old enough to understand, she told him the +circumstances of his having been found at the workhouse door, and +of the discovery of the woman who had brought him there; and +impressed upon him her own strong conviction that this was not his +mother.</p> +<p>"I believe, Billy," she said, over and over again, "that your +parents were gentlefolk. Now mind, it does not make one bit of +difference to you, for it ain't likely you will ever hear of them. +Still, please God, you may do so; and it is for you to bear it in +mind, and to act so as--if you were to meet them--they need not be +ashamed of you. You have got to earn your living just like all the +other boys here; but you can act right, and straight, and honorable.</p> +<p>"Never tell a lie, Billy; not if it's to save yourself from +being thrashed ever so much. Always speak out manful, and straight, +no matter what comes of it. Don't never use no bad words, work hard +at your books, and try to improve yourself. Keep it always before +you that you mean to be a good man, and a gentleman, some day and, +mark my words, you will do it."</p> +<p>"You're spoiling that child," her husband would say, "filling +his head with your ridiculous notions."</p> +<p>"No, I am not spoiling him, Sam. I'm doing him good. It will +help keep him straight, if he thinks that he is of gentle blood, +and must not shame it. Why, the matron said only yesterday she +could not make him out, he was so different from other boys."</p> +<p>"More's the pity," grumbled the porter. "It mayn't do him harm +now--I don't say as it does; but when he leaves the house he'll be +above his work, and will be discontented, and never keep a +place."</p> +<p>"No, he won't," his wife asserted stoutly; although, in her +heart, she feared that there was some risk of her teaching having +that effect.</p> +<p>So far, however, there could be no doubt that her teaching had +been of great advantage to the boy; and his steadiness and +diligence soon attracted the attention of the schoolmaster. +Schoolmasters are always ready to help pupils forward who promise +to be a credit to them, and William Gale's teacher was no +exception. He was not a learned man--very far from it. He had been +a grocer who had failed in business and, having no other resource, +had accepted the very small salary offered, by the guardians of Ely +workhouse, as the only means which presented itself of keeping out +of one of the pauper wards of that institution. However, he was not +a bad reader, and wrote an excellent hand. With books of geography +and history before him, he could make no blunders in his teaching; +and although he might have been failing in method, he was not harsh +or unkind--and the boys, therefore, learned as much with him as +they might have done with a more learned master, of a harsher +disposition.</p> +<p>He soon recognized not only William's anxiety to learn, but the +fearlessness and spirit with which he was always ready to own a +fault, and to bear its punishment. On several occasions he brought +the boy before the notice of the guardians, when they came round +the school and, when questions had to be asked before visitors, +William Gale was always called up as the show boy.</p> +<p>This prominence would have made him an object of dislike, among +the other lads of his own age; had it not been that William was a +lively, good-tempered boy; and if, as sometimes happened on these +occasions, a sixpence or shilling was slipped into his hand by some +visitor, who was taken by his frank open face and bright +intelligent manner, it was always shared among his school +fellows.</p> +<p>At one of the examinations the wife of a guardian, who was +present with her husband, said on returning home:</p> +<p>"It must be very dull for those poor boys. I will pack up some +of the boys' books, and send them. Now they have gone to college, +they will never want them again; and they would make quite a +library for the workhouse boys. There must be twenty or thirty of +them, at least."</p> +<p>If ladies could but know what brightness they can infuse into +the lives of lads, placed like these in Ely workhouse, by a simple +act of kindness of this kind, there would not be an institution in +the kingdom without a well-supplied library. The gift infused a new +life into the school. Hitherto the world outside had been a sealed +book to the boys. They knew of no world, save that included within +the walls of the house. Their geography told them of other lands +and people, but these were mere names, until now.</p> +<p>Among the books were Robinson Crusoe, Midshipman Easy, +Peter Simple, three or four of Cooper's Indian tales, Dana's +Life before the Mast, and several of Kingston's and Ballantyne's +books. These opened a wonderland of life and adventure to the boys. +The schoolmaster used to give them out, at twelve o'clock; and they +were returned at two, when school recommenced; and only such boys +as obtained full marks for their lessons were allowed to have them. +In this way, instead of the library being a cause of idleness--as +some of the guardians predicted, when they heard of its +presentation--it was an incentive to work.</p> +<p>Certainly its perusal filled the minds of most of the boys with +an intense longing to go to sea but, as there is always a demand +for apprentices for the Yarmouth and Lowestoft smacks, the +guardians did not disapprove of this bent being given to their +wishes--indeed, as no premium had to be paid, with apprentices to +smack owners, while in most trades a premium is required, a +preference was given to the sea by the guardians.</p> +<p>When William Gale reached the age of fifteen, and was brought +before the board to choose the trade to which he would be +apprenticed, he at once said that he would go to sea. There were +applications from several smack masters for apprentices; and he, +with the five other boys brought up with him, were all of one +opinion in the matter.</p> +<p>"Mind, lads," the chairman said, "the life of an apprentice on +board a North Sea smack is a hard one. You will get a great many +more kicks than half pence. It will be no use grumbling, when you +have once made your choice. It is a rough, hard life--none rougher, +or harder. When you have served your time, it will be open to you +either to continue as smacksmen, or to ship as seamen in sea-going +ships.</p> +<p>"Sailors who hail from the eastern fishing ports are always +regarded as amongst the best of our seamen. Still, it is a rough +life, and a dangerous one. The hardest life, on shore, is easy in +comparison. There is time to change your minds, before you sign; +when you have done so, it will be too late. Are you all +determined?"</p> +<p>None of them wavered. Their signatures were attached to the +indentures, and they were told that the porter would take them to +Yarmouth, on the following day. William Gale obtained leave to +spend his last evening at the porter's lodge, and there he talked +very seriously, with Mrs. Dickson, over his future prospects.</p> +<p>"I know," he said, "from Dana's book, that the life is a very +rough one, but that will not matter. A sailor, when he has been +four years at sea, can pass his examination as a mate; and I mean +to work hard, and pass as soon as I can. I don't care how much I am +knocked about, that's nothing; there's a good chance of getting on, +in the end."</p> +<p>"You will meet a great many bad boys, Bill; don't you let them +lead you into their ways."</p> +<p>"Don't be afraid of that," he answered, "I won't do anything I +should be ashamed of, afterwards. You have taught me better."</p> +<p>"I suppose the guardians gave you a Bible, today; they always +do, when boys goes out."</p> +<p>Will nodded.</p> +<p>"Be sure you read it often, my boy. You read that, and stick to +it, and you won't go far wrong. You know what the parson said, last +Sunday:</p> +<p>"'No one is strong in himself, but God gives strength.'"</p> +<p>"I remember," Will said. "I made up my mind, then, that I'd bear +it in mind, and act upon it when I could. I think the thought of +God, and the thought that I may meet my parents--and they must not +be ashamed of me--will help me to be honest, and firm."</p> +<p>"I hope, Bill, you will come, sometimes, and see me, when you +are ashore."</p> +<p>"I shall be sure to do that, when I can," he answered. "But of +course, I shall have no money, at first; and it may be a long time +before I can pay my railway fare here; but you may be sure I will +come. Whoever may be my real mother, you are the only mother I ever +knew, and no mother could have been kinder. When I grow to be a +man, and go to sea in big ships, I will bring you all sorts of +pretty things from abroad and, if ever you should want it, you may +be sure that my wages will be quite as much yours as if I had been, +really, your son!"</p> +<p>Sam Dickson gave a snort. It was very good of the boy, but he +considered it his duty to snub him, in order to counteract what he +considered to be the pernicious counsels and treatment of his +wife.</p> +<p>"Fine talk," he said, "fine talk. We shall see."</p> +<p>"You ought to be ashamed of yourself, Sam Dickson," his wife +said, wrathfully. "The boy means what he says, and I believe him. +If anything was to happen to you, and that boy was growed up, I +believe he would come forward to lend me a helping hand, just as he +says, as if he were my son. The gals is good gals, but gals in +service have plenty to do with their wages--what with dress, and +one thing or another. We must never look for much help from them +but, if Bill is doing well, and I ever come to want, I believe as +his heart would be good to help, a bit."</p> +<p>"Well," the porter said, dryly, "there's time enough to see +about it, yet. I ain't dead, you ain't a pauper, and he ain't a +man, not by a long way."</p> +<p>"Well, you needn't go to be short tempered over it, Sam. The boy +says as he'll be as good as a son to me, if the time ever comes as +how I may want it. There is no call for you to fly out, as if he'd +said as he'd poison me, if he'd the chance.</p> +<p>"Anyhow, you'll write to me regular, won't you, Bill?"</p> +<p>"That I will," the boy said. "Every time I gets back to port, +I'll write; and you'll write sometimes, won't you? And tell me how +you are, and how every one is, schoolmaster and all. They have all +been very kind to me, and I have nothing to say against any of +them."</p> +<p>The next morning William Gale laid aside, for ever, his +workhouse dress; and put on a suit of rough blue cloth, fitted for +his future work. Then, bidding adieu to all his friends, he--with +his five fellow apprentices--started by rail, under charge of Sam +Dickson, for Yarmouth.</p> +<p>The journey itself was, to them, a most exciting event. They +had, in all their remembrance, never been a mile from the +workhouse; and the swift motion of the train, the changing scenery, +the villages and stations, were a source of immense interest. As +they neared Yarmouth their excitement increased, for now they were +nearing the sea; of which they had read so much, but could form so +little idea. They were disappointed, however, inasmuch as no +glimpse was obtained of it, as they crossed the flat country +leading to the town but, failing the sea, Yarmouth itself--the town +which was henceforth to be their headquarters--was in the highest +degree interesting.</p> +<p>Presently the train reached the station, and then Sam +Dickson--who had made many annual journeys to Yarmouth, on the same +errand--at once started off with them to the smack owners who had +written to the workhouse. These lived at Gorleston, a large village +on the south side of the river. Walking down from the station, the +boys caught a glimpse of the river, and were delighted at the sight +of the long line of smacks, and coasters, lying by the wharves +opposite.</p> +<p>Presently they left the road, and made their way down to the +river side. Their guardian had great difficulty in getting them +along, so interested were they in the smacks lying alongside. +Presently they stopped at a large wooden building, over which was +the name of "James Eastrey."</p> +<p>"Here we are," Sam Dickson said. "Now, stop quietly outside. I +will call three of you up, when I have spoken to Mr. Eastrey."</p> +<p>Presently the porter re-appeared at the door, and called three +of the boys in. William Gale was one of the number, James Eastrey +being the name of the owner to whom he had signed his +indentures.</p> +<p>A smell of tar pervaded the whole place. Nets, sails, and +cordage were piled in great heaps in the store; iron bolts and +buckets, iron heads for trawls, and ship's stores of all kinds.</p> +<p>Mr. Eastrey came out from a little wooden office.</p> +<p>"So," he said, "you are the three lads who are going to be my +apprentices. Well, boys, it is a rough life but, if you take the +ups and downs as they come, it is not a bad one. I always tell my +captains to be kind to the boys but, when they are at sea, they do +not always act as I wish them. When you are on shore, between the +voyages, I give you eight shillings a week, to keep yourselves; or +I put you in the Smack Boys' Home, and pay for you there. The last +is the best place for you, but some boys prefer to go their own +way.</p> +<p>"I suppose you are all anxious to go to sea--boys always are, +for the first time. One of my boats is going out, tomorrow.</p> +<p>"You," he said, pointing to William Gale, "shall go in her. What +is your name?"</p> +<p>"William Gale, sir."</p> +<p>"Very well, William Gale, then you shall be off first. The +others will only have a day or two to wait.</p> +<p>"I can only send one new hand in each smack. The others will go +to the Home, till the smacks are ready. I will send a man with +them, at once. They can have a day to run about the town. I shall +find plenty of work for them, afterwards.</p> +<p>"You, Gale, will stop on the smack. I will take you on board, in +half an hour, when I have finished my letter."</p> +<p>The three lads said goodbye to their comrades and to Sam +Dickson. A sailor was called up, and took two off to the Smack +Boys' Home; and Will Gale sat down on a coil of rope, to wait till +his employer was ready to take him down to the craft to which he +was, henceforth, to belong.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch3" id="Ch3">Chapter 3</a>: Life On A Smack.</h2> +<p>"Now come along, Gale," Mr. Eastrey said, at last, "the Kitty is +close by."</p> +<p>Following his master, the lad went out from the store and along +the wharf and, presently, stepped upon a smack on which several +men, and a boy, were at work.</p> +<p>"Harvey," Mr. Eastrey said, "I have brought you a new lad. He +will sail with you, tomorrow. I have a very good account of him, +and I think you will find him quick, and ready."</p> +<p>"So as he's not up to tricks, I shall do very well with him, I +don't doubt," the skipper said; "but boys are an awful trouble, the +first voyage or two. However, I will do my best for him.</p> +<p>"Are you ready to begin work at once, young 'un? What is your +name?"</p> +<p>"William Gale, and I am quite ready."</p> +<p>"Very well, Bill, chuck off your jacket, then, and pass those +bags along from the wharf."</p> +<p>The boy was soon hard at work. He was a little disappointed at +finding that the skipper was, in dress and manner, in no way +superior to the rest of the crew. The Kitty was a yawl of +forty-five tons, deep in the water and broad in the beam. Her deck +was dirty and, at present, in disorder; and she did not come up to +the perfection of neatness and cleanliness which William Gale had +read of, in the pages of his favorite author. However--as he told +himself--there must, of course, be a good deal of difference +between a man of war, where the crew have little to do but to keep +things neat and bright, and a fishing smack.</p> +<p>The work upon which he was, at present, engaged was the +transferring of the provisions for the voyage from the quay to the +hold. These consisted principally of barrels of salt meat, and bags +of biscuits; but there were a large tin of tea, a keg of sugar, a +small barrel of molasses--or treacle--two or three sacks of +potatoes, pepper and salt. Then there was a barrel of oil for the +lamps, coils of spare rope of different sizes, and a number of +articles of whose use William Gale had not the most remote +idea.</p> +<p>After two hours' work, the skipper looked at his watch.</p> +<p>"Time to knock off work," he said, "and we've got pretty near +everything on board. Now, be sure you are all here by six in the +morning. Tide will begin to run out at eight, and I don't want to +lose any of it.</p> +<p>"Bill, you are to come home with me, for the night."</p> +<p>It was but a hundred yards to the sailor's cottage, which stood +on the edge of the sharp rise, a short distance back from the +river.</p> +<p>"Here, wife," he said as he entered, "I've got a new apprentice, +and I expect he's pretty hungry; I am, I can tell you, and I hope +tea's ready. His name's Bill, and he's going to stop here, +tonight."</p> +<p>"Tea is quite ready, John, and there's plenty of mackerel. I +thought you would not be getting them again, for a spell.</p> +<p>"Do you like fish?" she asked the boy.</p> +<p>"I don't know, ma'am--I never tasted them."</p> +<p>"Bless me!" the woman cried, in astonishment; "never tasted +fish! To think, now!"</p> +<p>"I've been brought up in a workhouse," William said, coloring a +little as he spoke, for he knew the prejudice against the +House.</p> +<p>"Ah!" she said, "we have had a good many of that sort; and I +can't say as I likes 'em, for the most part. But you haven't got +the look about you. You don't seem that sort."</p> +<p>"I hope I shall turn out none the worse for it," the boy said; +"at any rate, I'll do my best."</p> +<p>"And none can't do more," the good woman said, briskly. "I like +your looks, Bill, and you've a nice way of talking. Well, we shall +see."</p> +<p>In a few minutes tea was upon the table, and Will sat down with +the skipper, his wife, and two daughters--girls of ten and twelve. +The lad enjoyed his meal immensely, and did full justice to the +fish.</p> +<p>"You will have plenty of them, before you eat your next tea on +shore. We pretty nigh live on them, when we are on the fishing +grounds."</p> +<p>"The same kind of fish as this?"</p> +<p>"No, mackerel are caught in small boats, with a different sort +of gear, altogether. We get them, sometimes, in the trawl--not +shoals of 'em, but single fish, which we call horse mackerel."</p> +<p>After tea, the skipper lit his pipe; and his wife, after +clearing up, took some knitting, and sat down and began to question +the new apprentice.</p> +<p>"It's lucky, for you, you found such a good friend," she said, +when he had finished his story. "That's how it is you are so +different from other boys who have been apprenticed from the House. +I should never have thought you had come from there.</p> +<p>"And she gave you good advice as to how you should go on, I'll +be bound."</p> +<p>"Yes, ma'am," Will said, "and I hope I shall act up to it."</p> +<p>"I hope so, Bill; but you'll find it hard work to keep yourself +as you should do, among them boys. They are an awful lot, them +smack boys."</p> +<p>"Not worse nor other boys," her husband said.</p> +<p>"Not worse than might be looked for, John, but they are most of +'em pretty bad. The language they use make my blood run cold, +often. They seems to take a delight in it. The hands are bad +enough, but the boys are dreadful.</p> +<p>"I suppose you don't swear, Will. They look too sharp after you, +in the House; but if you take my advice, boy, don't you ever get +into the way of bad language. If you once begin, it will grow on +you. There ain't no use in it, and it's awful to hear it."</p> +<p>"I will try not to do so," Will said firmly. "Mother--I always +call her mother--told me how bad it was, and I said I'd try."</p> +<p>"That's right, Will, you stick to that, and make up your mind to +keep from liquor, and you'll do."</p> +<p>"What's the use of talking that way?" the skipper said. "The +boy's sure to do it. They all do."</p> +<p>"Not all, John. There's some teetotalers in the fleet."</p> +<p>"I won't say I'll never touch it," Will said, "for I don't know, +yet, how I may want it--they say when you are cold and wet through, +at sea, it is really good--but I have made up my mind I'll never +drink for the sake of drinking. Half the men--ay, nineteen out of +twenty in the House--would never have been there, I've heard mother +say, if it hadn't been for drink; and I told her she need never +fear I'd take to that."</p> +<p>"If you can do without it on shore, you can do without it at +sea," the skipper said. "I take it when I'm on shore, but there's +not a drop goes out on the Kitty. Some boats carries spirits, some +don't. We don't. The old man puts chocolate on board instead and, +of a wet night, a drink of hot chocolate's worth all the rum in the +world.</p> +<p>"As for giving it up altogether, I see no call for it. There are +men who can't touch liquor, but they must go on till they get +drunk. That sort ought to swear off, and never touch it at all. +It's worse than poison, to some. But for a man who is content with +his pint of beer with his dinner, and a glass of grog of an +evening, I see no harm in it."</p> +<p>"Except that the money might be better spent, John."</p> +<p>"It might be, or it might not. In my case, the saving would be +of no account. The beer costs three pence, and the rum as much +more. That's six pence a day. I'm only at home ten days, once every +two months; so it come to thirty shillings a year, and I enjoy my +dinner, and my evening pipe, all the better for them."</p> +<p>"The thing is this, Will: you don't know, when you begin, +whether you are going to be one of the men who--like my John--is +content with his pint of beer, and his glass of grog; or whether +you will be one of them as can't touch liquor without wanting to +make beasts of themselves. Therefore the safest plan is, don't +touch it at all--leastways, till you've served your time. The +others may laugh at you, at first; but they won't like you any the +worse for it."</p> +<p>"Thank you, ma'am. I will make up my mind to that--not to touch +liquor till I am out of my apprenticeship. After that, I can see +for myself."</p> +<p>"That's right, lad. When you come back from your first trip, you +can join the lodge, if you like. I and my girls are members."</p> +<p>"Thank you, ma'am," Will said; "but I won't take any pledge. I +have said I will not do it, and I don't see any use in taking an +oath about it. If I am so weak as to break my word, I should break +my oath. I don't know why I shouldn't be able to trust myself to do +as I am willed, in that way as in any other. If I'd a craving after +it, it might be different; but I never have tasted it, and don't +want to taste it, so I don't see why I can't trust myself."</p> +<p>"Yes, I think as how you can trust yourself, Will," the woman +said, looking at him; "and I've noticed often that it isn't them +who say most, as do most.</p> +<p>"Now, I daresay you are sleepy. There's my boy's bed for you. He +is fourth hand in one of the smacks at sea."</p> +<p>The next morning Will was out of bed the instant he was called, +excited at the thought that he was going really to sea. The +skipper's wife had tea made, and the table laid.</p> +<p>"Here," she said, "are some oilskin suits my boy has given up. +They will suit you well enough for size and, although they are not +as good as they were, they will keep out a good deal of water, yet. +You will get half-a-crown a week, while you are at sea so, by the +time you get back, you will have enough to buy yourself a fresh +suit."</p> +<p>Half an hour later Will was at work, getting two spare sails and +the last of the stores on board.</p> +<p>"Now, Bill, come below," the skipper said. "I will show you your +bunk."</p> +<p>The cabin was larger than Will had expected. It was about twelve +feet square, and lofty enough for a tall man to stand upright. By +the side of the companion stairs was a grate, on which a kettle was +boiling; and this, as he afterwards learned, was a fixture, except +when cooking was going on, and the men could have tea whenever they +chose. Round three sides of the cabin extended lockers, the tops +forming seats. Above were what looked like cupboards, running round +the sides; but the skipper pushed open a sliding door, and showed a +bed place.</p> +<p>"That is your bunk," he said. "You see, there are two at the +end, and one each side, above, and as many under them--eight bunks, +in all. You will have to help Jack--that is the other boy--in +cooking, and make yourself useful, generally, in the day. The crew +are divided into two watches, but you will not have much to do on +deck. If the night is clear you can sleep, except when the trawl is +being got up. Of a thick or stormy night, you will keep your +watch.</p> +<p>"Now, as the other lad is more handy on deck than you are, you +can take charge here. All you have to do is to see that the kettle +is kept boiling. You can come on deck and lend a hand, if wanted; +but you must come down sometimes, and see the fire is all +right."</p> +<p>After inspecting the contents of the kettle, and seeing that it +was full, Will climbed up the steep ladder again; and was soon +working away, coiling down the ropes with the other lad, while the +crew hoisted sails and got the boat under weigh.</p> +<p>"Are there only two hands under the captain?" he asked the other +boy.</p> +<p>"There are two others," the boy said. "They will come on board +after we get out of the river, and you'll see they will be just as +drunk as they can stand."</p> +<p>"What, drunk at this time in the morning?"</p> +<p>"Yes, they got drunk last night and, as they won't have fairly +slept it off, they will be beginning again this morning. The old +man will look them up, and get them off."</p> +<p>"Who is the old man?"</p> +<p>"Old Eastrey, of course, stupid.</p> +<p>"I wish they were all on board. There's a fine breeze, and I +hate wasting four or five hours off the bar, waiting for the hands +to come off."</p> +<p>"I wonder the old man stands it," Will said.</p> +<p>"He can't help it," the other answered. "Scarce a smack goes out +of Yarmouth without half the hands being drunk, when she starts. +They don't get much chance afterwards, you see; and they sleep it +off by night, so it don't make any odds. Our skipper is always +sober, and that's more than many of them are. I have gone out when +me and the other boy were the only two sober on board."</p> +<p>"But isn't it very dangerous?"</p> +<p>"Dangerous? No," the boy said, "one of them is sure to be sober +enough to manage to stand at the helm and, though I've bumped +pretty heavy on the sands, sometimes, we generally strike the +channel. There is no fear of anything else. We never start, if a +gale is blowing; and the smacks are safe in anything but a gale. +They are too deep to capsize and, at sea, there's no more +drinking."</p> +<p>The smack dropped down the river and stood, off and on, near its +entrance. Will was delighted with the bright sea, dotted with ships +and fishing craft. The sun was shining, and there was just enough +wind to send the smack along briskly through the water, without +raising any waves sufficiently high to give her a perceptible +motion. At eight o'clock the captain went on shore in the boat, +with a man, to look after the absent sailors; leaving only one hand +and the two boys on board. At ten the boat was again seen, coming +out.</p> +<p>"One, two, three, four," the boy said, "he has got them both. +Now we shall be off."</p> +<p>The boat was soon alongside. The two drunken men were helped on +board and, at once, went below to sleep themselves sober. Then the +boat was hoisted on board and, the second hand taking the helm, the +Kitty started fairly on her way.</p> +<p>"Now," the captain said, "let us get her a little tidy."</p> +<p>It took some hours' work before the deck was washed, the ropes +coiled down, and everything ship-shape. By the time all was done, +the low coast of Norfolk had sunk below the horizon, and the smack +was far out at sea. There was more motion now, but the wind was +still light.</p> +<p>The skipper was pleased with the earnestness and alacrity which +the new apprentice showed.</p> +<p>"Now, Jack," he said to the other boy, "take Will below with +you, and show him how to make tea."</p> +<p>The process of tea making, on board a smack, is not a difficult +one to master; the sole operation consisting in putting a few more +spoonfuls of tea into the kettle boiling over the fire, when it +begins to get low, and filling up with fresh water. But, simple as +the thing was, William Gale did not learn it on that occasion. He +had been feeling somewhat shaky, even while on deck; and the heat +of the cabin, and the smell of some grease which Jack had just put +in the frying pan, preparatory to cooking some fish brought off +from shore, completed the effect of the rising sea. Until next +morning he was not in a condition to care, even had the tea +remained unmade to the end of time. He did not go below, but lay +under the shelter of a tarpaulin, on deck.</p> +<p>In the morning, the skipper roused him up.</p> +<p>"Now, lad, just take off your coat and shirt. Here is a bucket +of water. Put your head in that, and give yourself a good sluice; +and then come down and have a cup of tea, and a bit of biscuit, and +you will find yourself all right again."</p> +<p>Will followed the instructions, and found himself wonderfully +better.</p> +<p>"Now, lad, lend a hand in tidying up on deck. There is nothing +like work, for keeping off seasickness. Jack shall cook, for +today."</p> +<p>The boy set to work with a will; and felt so refreshed that, by +one o'clock, he was able to go below and take his share of the +dinner. At present, while on their way to the fishing grounds, +their meals were taken at the same time as on shore but, once at +work, there were only two meals a day. Of these the first was taken +when the fishing was over, the fish cleaned, picked, weighed, and +packed--the hour varying between nine and eleven. The second meal +was taken before the trawl was lowered, at six or seven o'clock in +the evening.</p> +<p>After five days' sailing, the smack arrived off the +fishing ground; but another two days were spent in finding the +fleet, as the fishing grounds extend over a distance of some +hundreds of miles. When they came up with it, William Gale was +astonished at the vast number of boats that dotted the sea.</p> +<p>In the Yarmouth fleet there are between four and five hundred +vessels and, were it not that the most perfect order and discipline +reign, the number of accidents which would occur, from so many +boats fishing close to each other at night, would be terrible. The +fleet is commanded by one of the most experienced skippers, who is +termed the admiral. His authority is absolute. He leads the fleet +to the grounds he selects for fishing and, by signals by day and +rockets by night, issues his orders--when the nets are to be +lowered down and drawn up, the course which is to be steered, and +the tack on which they are to stand.</p> +<p>The fishing is entirely done at night. The trawls are let down +about dusk, and the fleet attached to these moving anchors forge +slowly ahead and to leeward, until daybreak. Then the trawls are +got in, and the fleet sail in a body to the spot where the admiral +decides that fishing shall be continued in the evening. At 10 +o'clock at night the trawls are hauled in, and the nets emptied. +All hands are called up for this operation. When it is concluded, +the trawl is again lowered and the fish cleaned and packed; by the +light of a torch formed of rope, dipped in tar. The watch who have +hitherto been on deck turn in, and the others remain on deck until +morning, when the nets are again hauled in.</p> +<p>There is not, indeed, much for the watch to do; as the smack +needs no steering, and the attention of the men on deck is directed +chiefly to see that no other smack drifts down upon them. Should +there appear any danger of this, a flare is lit to warn the other +smacksmen. The trawl rope is slacked out or hauled in, as the case +may require and, generally, volleys of strong language pass between +the respective crews.</p> +<p>The trawl beam is a heavy pole, some 30 or 35 feet long. At each +end are fitted strong iron hoops, of about three feet in diameter. +These keep the pole from touching the ground, and keep open the +mouth of the net; one side of which is attached to the pole, while +the other drags along the bottom. The net resembles in shape a +long, deep purse; and has various pockets and other contrivances by +which, when a fish has once entered its mouth, it is prevented from +returning.</p> +<p>The trawl rope--which is from 40 to 80 yards in length, +according to the depth of water--is hauled in by means of a winch; +and its great weight taxes the united strength of the crew, to get +it level with the bulwark. When it is up, the net is hauled on +board, the small end is opened, and the fish tumble on to the deck. +They are then separated and packed in trunks--as the wooden cases, +in which they are sent to market, are called.</p> +<p>Soles fetch by far the highest price, and fortunate are the crew +who get a good haul of this fish; for the men work upon shares, an +account being kept of all the sales made, during the fishing trip. +The owner deducts the cost of the provisions and stores which have +been put on board, and takes one or more shares for the vessel. +Each man has one share, the skipper and mate receiving rather a +larger proportion than the others; thus the men have a lively +interest in each haul, and great is the satisfaction when the net +comes up well filled, and there is seen to be a good proportion of +soles among the contents.</p> +<p>The coarse fish--as they are called--include brill, haddock, +hake, ling, whiting, and many others. Turbot are also caught. In +each haul there would probably be a vast number of objects which +would delight the heart of a naturalist. Dog fish, too, are +sometimes taken; as are conger eels, and horse mackerel. Stones, +and oysters, too, come up in the nets; and the latter are the +betes-noires of the fishing. Sometimes, when the fleet gets over a +bed of oysters, a score of nets will be lost in a single night for, +when the bag becomes full of oysters, its weight is so great that +the utmost power of the fishermen's exertions, on the winch, is +insufficient to lift it from the bottom; and there is nothing to be +done but to cut the rope, and abandon trawl and net. Upon these +occasions the language applied to the admiral is scarcely of a kind +for polite ears.</p> +<p>The food of the crews, when once upon the fishing ground, +consists almost wholly of fish. With the exception of soles, each +man may select any fish he fancies from the glistening mass upon +the deck; and the amount which each consumed at a meal at first +astonished William Gale, accustomed as he was to meager workhouse +rations. He soon, however, found himself able to keep up with the +rest; but the operation of frying seemed sometimes interminable, so +many times had the pan to be filled and emptied.</p> +<p>Hard biscuits were eaten with the fish, and the whole washed +down with copious draughts of tea, without milk. Two or three times +a week the men would, as a change, have a meal of salt meat; and on +Sundays a duff--or pudding--of flour and currants was made.</p> +<p>A few days after joining the fleet the weather changed, the sky +became gloomy and threatening. The wind blew hard, and a heavy sea +got up. Will found that keeping watch at night--which was pleasant +enough on a fine, star-light night--was a very different thing, +now. It was no joke looking ahead with the wind blowing fiercely, +and showers of spray dashing into the eyes; and yet a vigilant +watch must be kept for, if the rockets which ordered the hauling of +the trawl were not noticed, some other smack, moving rapidly when +released from the drag of its net, might at any moment come into +collision with the smack.</p> +<p>Still more important was it to notice upon which side the trawl +was to be lowered, after being emptied; and upon which tack the +vessel was to proceed. For a mistake in this respect would be +certain to bring the smack across another; in which case the trawl +ropes would become entangled--involving, in a heavy sea, the +certain loss of one or the other. Many of the smacks carry dogs, +and it is found that these become even better watchers than their +masters; for they can be relied on to call the attention of the +watch, by sharp barking, to the letting up of the rocket, however +distant.</p> +<p>A rocket may seem to be an easy thing to see but, in a large +fleet, the stern-most smacks may be three or four miles away from +the leaders and, in a dark, thick night, it is exceedingly +difficult to make out even a rocket, at that distance.</p> +<p>The wind increased to a gale. The trawls were up now, and the +fleet lay to. It may be explained that this operation is performed +by bringing a ship nearly into the eye of the wind, and then +hauling the foresail across, and belaying the sheet. The aft +sail--or mizzen--is then hauled tight, and the tiller lashed +amidships. As the fore-sail pays the vessel off from the wind, the +after sail brings her up again; and she is thus kept nearly head to +sea, and the crew go below, and wait till the storm abates.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch4" id="Ch4">Chapter 4</a>: Run Down.</h2> +<p>William Gale was astonished at the fury of the tempest, and the +wildness of the sea. Although, at the workhouse, he had often heard +the wind roaring round the walls, there was nothing to show him the +force that was being exerted. There were but few trees in the +neighborhood, and William had hardly ever been without the walls, +except in fine summer weather. He was, therefore, almost bewildered +by the force and fury of the gale; and by the noise, as it shrieked +through the rigging, and howled across the water. The occasional +flapping of the sails, and the rattling of the heavy blocks added +to the din; and it seemed to him that the Kitty which, like all +fishing smacks, was very deep in the water, must be completely +engulfed by the great waves which swept down upon her.</p> +<p>Several times, indeed, he was obliged to leap down into the +cabin, to avoid being swept away by the great masses of green water +which--pouring over her bows--swept aft, carrying away all before +them. But the Yarmouth smacks are admirable sea boats and, pounded +and belabored as she was, the Kitty always shook off the water that +smothered her, and rose again for the next wave. In twenty-four +hours the gale abated, the scattered fleet were assembled--each +flying its flag--and it was found that three were missing, having +either foundered, or been driven away from their consorts.</p> +<p>With the return of fine weather the fishing began again, and +William thoroughly enjoyed his life. The skipper was kind and +forbearing; he neither ill treated the boys, himself, nor permitted +any of the crew to do so; and everything went on regularly and +comfortably. There were a few books on board and, of an evening, +after the trawl was lowered and before the watch below turned into +their bunks, William--who was the best reader on board--would be +asked to read aloud for an hour. Sometimes there were songs and, as +the Kitty was fortunate, and her taking of fish good, the men were +all cheerful and good tempered.</p> +<p>Once every three or four days, the collecting steamer came in +sight; then there was a general race, in the fleet, to put the +trunks of fish on board her. Each did his best to be in good time +for, when the catch had been heavy, the steamer was sometimes +unable to take the whole of it; in which case the portion left +behind would be wholly spoilt, before the arrival of another +steamer. The whole of the fleet, therefore, ran down towards the +steamer as soon as she was seen; the heavy boats were tossed +overboard, and the trunk lowered into them, and two hands jumped in +to row them to the steamer. Round her a swarm of boats would soon +be collected, each striving to get alongside, to deliver the +fish.</p> +<p>In calm weather the scene was simply amusing but, when the sea +was high, it was exciting and even dangerous; indeed, in the course +of a year more lives are lost, in the process of taking the fish +from the smack to the steamer, than in vessels foundered by +gales.</p> +<p>Sometimes the fleet will be joined by Dutch trading smacks, who +exchange fresh bread and meat, tobacco, and spirits for fish. This +traffic is the cause, alike, of loss to the owners, by the fish +thus parted with; and of injury to the men, by the use of spirits. +Fortunately the skipper of the Kitty--although not averse to the +use of spirits, on shore--was a strict man at sea, and saw that no +one took more than a single glass of grog, of an evening.</p> +<p>Over and over again, Will congratulated himself that he had the +good fortune to make his first voyage under such a skipper; for he +shuddered at the stories Jack told him, of the cruelties and +barbarities with which apprentices are treated on board some of the +smacks. Although, however, there is no doubt many brutal skippers +hail from Yarmouth; the fleet from that town bears a good +reputation, in comparison with that of Grimsby--where the number of +apprentices returned as drowned, each year, is appalling.</p> +<p>One night, when the wind was high and the fleet trawling lower +down the North Sea than usual, Will--who was on deck--was startled +at seeing a great ship bearing down upon the smack. He gave a shout +of terror and warning, which was joined in by the crew on deck. One +ran for the hatchet to cut the trawl, and thus give steerage way to +the smack.</p> +<p>It was too late. In another moment the great ship bore down upon +them with a crash, and the Kitty sunk beneath the waves. The +bowsprit of the vessel projected across the deck, just at the point +where William Gale was standing and, in a moment, he caught at the +bob stay and quickly hauled himself on to the bowsprit. Climbing +along this, he was soon on board.</p> +<p>Two or three sailors were leaning over the bows, peering into +the darkness. They had not seen the smack, until too late to avoid +it; and the collision, which had proved fatal to the Kitty, had +scarcely been felt by the ship. Will was at ones taken to the +captain, who spoke English. The boy implored him to turn back, but +the captain shook his head.</p> +<p>"It would be useless," he said; "the sea is heavy and, in these +long boots--" and he pointed to the sea boots, up to the thigh, +which all fishermen wear, "--no man could swim for two minutes; nor +would there be a chance, if they could, of our finding them on so +dark a night. I am very sorry, my lad, but it cannot be helped. It +would take half an hour to bring the ship about, and go back to the +spot where the smack sunk; and we might not get within half a mile +of it. You know that, as well as I do."</p> +<p>Will had been long enough at sea to recognize the truth of what +the captain said. As he was led forward, he burst into tears at the +thought of the loss of his kind friend the captain, and the rest of +his mates. The sailor who accompanied him patted him on the back, +and spoke cheeringly to him in a foreign language; and he was soon +between decks with the crew. Several of these could speak English, +and Will found that he was on board a Dutch merchantman, bound with +troops for Java.</p> +<p>The wind got up and, in the morning, it was blowing a heavy gale +from the east; and the vessel, with reefed topsails, was running +for the straits between Dover and Calais, at twelve knots an hour. +After breakfast, the captain sent for William.</p> +<p>"I am sorry, for your sake, that the state of the weather will +prevent our communicating with any ship we may meet. But I promise +you that, if the gale breaks before we are fairly out from the +channel, I will heave to and put you on board a homeward-bound +ship."</p> +<p>Such a chance did not occur. For four or five days the gale +continued with great severity and, before it ceased, the ship was +well down the coast of Spain, on her way south. When the captain +saw that there was but small chance of his being able to transship +his involuntary passenger, he said to him:</p> +<p>"Look you, my lad. I fear that you will have to make the voyage +with me, for we shall not touch at any port, until we arrive at our +destination. If you like, I will ship you as a hand on board, as +from the day of the collision. A hand, more or less, will make no +difference to the owners; and the money will be useful to you, when +you leave the ship. Of course, you can return in her, if you think +fit; but it is likely enough that, when we reach Java, we may be +sent up to China for a homeward cargo--in which case I will procure +you a passage in the first ship sailing for your home."</p> +<p>Will gladly accepted the offer. He was, however, by no means +penniless for, upon the morning after his coming on board, the +Dutch officers and passengers--hearing what had happened in the +night--made a collection among themselves, and presented the boy +with a purse containing fifteen pounds.</p> +<p>It was a long voyage, but not an unpleasant one for William. His +duties were not very heavy--he had far less to do than had been the +case, on board the smack. A month on board the Kitty had done much +towards making a sailor of him, for there are no better seamen in +the world than the Yarmouth smacksmen. Going aloft was, at first, a +trial; but he soon learned his duties and, being a strong and +active lad, he was quickly able to do efficient work; and speedily +gained the good opinion of the Dutch sailors, by his good temper +and anxiety to please.</p> +<p>They ran some little distance to the south of the Cape before +shaping an easterly course, to avoid the bad weather so frequently +met with there and, beyond encountering two or three gales, of no +exceptional severity, nothing occurred to break the monotony of the +voyage, until the coasts of Java were in sight. Upon their arrival +in port, they found no vessel there about to sail for Europe; and +the captain's expectation was fulfilled, as he found orders +awaiting him to proceed to China, when he had landed the troops and +discharged his cargo. Will determined to continue his voyage in her +to that place.</p> +<p>Among the ship boys on board was one between whom, and Will +Gale, a great friendship had been struck up. He was a year or two +Will's senior, but scarcely so tall; upon the other hand, he was +nearly twice his girth. He talked but little, but his broad face +was ever alight with a good-tempered grin. He spoke a few words of +English; and Will had, when first picked up, been given specially +into his charge. Will's superior activity and energy astonished the +Dutch lad, whose movements were slow and heavy; while Will, on his +part, was surprised at the strength which Hans could exert, when he +chose. One day, when Will had been plaguing him, and ventured +within his reach, the lad had seized and held him out at arm's +length, shaking him as a dog would a rat, till he shouted for +mercy.</p> +<p>The two were soon able to get on in a queer mixture of Dutch and +English and, when words failed, they would eke out their words by +gestures.</p> +<p>The vessel had sailed but a few days from Java when there were +signs of a change of weather. Hitherto it had been lovely; now a +slight mist seemed to hang over the sea while, overhead, it was +clear and bright. There was not a breath of wind, and the sails +hung listlessly against the masts. Will--who was leaning against +the bulwarks, chatting to Hans--observed the captain, after looking +round at the horizon, go into his cabin. He reappeared in a minute, +and spoke to the officer; who immediately shouted an order for "all +hands to shorten sail."</p> +<p>"What is that for?" Will said, wonderingly; "there is not a +breath of wind."</p> +<p>"I egzpect captain haz looked at glass," Hans said, "find him +fall. I egzpect we going to have ztorm--very bad ztorms in dese +zeas."</p> +<p>Will ran aloft with the sailors and, in ten minutes, every inch +of canvas--with the exception of a small stay sail--was stripped +from the ship. Still, there was not a breath of wind. The sea was +as smooth as glass, save for a slight ground swell. Although the +mist did not seem to thicken, a strange darkness hung over the sky; +as if, high up, a thick fog had gathered. Darker and darker it +grew, until there was little more than a pale twilight. The men +stood in twos and threes, watching the sea and sky, and talking +together in low tones.</p> +<p>"I don't like this, Hans," Will said. "There is something awful +about it."</p> +<p>"We have big ztorm," Hans replied, "zyclone they call him."</p> +<p>Scarcely had Hans spoken when the sky above seemed to open, with +a crash. A roar of thunder, louder than ten thousand pieces of +artillery, pealed around them while, at the same moment, a blinding +flash of lightning struck the mainmast, shivering it into +splinters, and prostrating to the deck five seamen who were +standing round its foot. As if a signal had been given by the peal +of thunder, a tremendous blast of wind smote the vessel and, +stripped though she was of sails, heaved her over almost to the +gunwale.</p> +<p>For a moment, the crew were paralyzed by the suddenness of the +catastrophe; stunned by the terrible thunder, and blinded by the +lightning. None seemed capable of moving. Will had instinctively +covered his eyes with his hands. It seemed to him, for a moment, +that his sight was gone. Then the voice of the captain was heard, +shouting:</p> +<p>"Helm, hard up. Out axes, and cut away the wreck, at once!"</p> +<p>Those who were least stupefied by the shock sprang, in a dazed +and stupid way, to obey the order. Will drew out his knife and, +feeling rather than seeing what he was doing, tried to assist in +cutting away the shrouds of the fallen mast--it had gone a few feet +above the deck. Presently he seemed, as he worked, to recover from +his stupor; and the power of sight came back to him. Then he saw +that the vessel--taken on the broadside by the gale--was lying far +over, with several feet of her lee deck under water. So furious was +the wind that he could not show his head over the weather bulwark. +The sea was still smooth, as if the water was flattened by the +force of the wind. The stay sail had been blown into ribbons.</p> +<p>In order to get the ship's head off the wind, the head of the +jib was hauled up a few feet. It happened to be a new and strong +one and, although it bellied and lashed, as if it would tear itself +into fragments, it still stood. Again the captain gave an order, +and the sail was hauled up to its full height. Still further the +vessel heaved over; and Will expected, every moment, that she would +capsize. Then, gradually, her head paid off, and slowly she +righted, and flew before the gale.</p> +<p>"That was a near squeak," Will said.</p> +<p>"What is zqueak?" Hans shouted.</p> +<p>"I mean a close shave," Will replied.</p> +<p>Hans' blue eyes opened wider than usual.</p> +<p>"A zhave!" he repeated; "what are you talking about +zhaving?"</p> +<p>"No, no," Will said, laughing, "I mean a narrow escape of being +capsized."</p> +<p>Hans nodded. There was no time for talk, for orders were given +for getting preventer stays on the foremast. The jib, having done +its work, had been hauled down the instant the ship payed off; and +a small storm sail set, in its place.</p> +<p>The men now had time to attend to those who had been struck by +lightning. Three of them were found to be dead, but the other +two--who were stunned and senseless--still lived, and were lifted +and carried below.</p> +<p>Serious as the disaster had been, Will felt that the stroke of +lightning had saved the ship. The pressure of the wind, upon two +masts and hull, had nearly sufficed to capsize her. Had the main +mast stood, he felt that she must have gone over.</p> +<p>The sea got up in a very few minutes but, being now only in +light ballast, the vessel rose easily over them. Four men were at +the helm, for the waves soon became so high that the ship yawed +dangerously on her course. The gale seemed to increase, rather than +diminish in fury; and the sea, instead of following in regular +waves, became a perfect chaos of tossing water, such as Will had +never before seen. He understood it, however, when--half an hour +after the outburst of the gale--he heard one of the men, who had +just been relieved at the wheel, say that in that time the ship had +already run twice round the compass. She was therefore in the very +center of the cyclone, and the strangely tossed sea was accounted +for.</p> +<p>The motion of the ship was extraordinary. Sometimes she was +thrown on one side, sometimes on the other. Mountains of water +seemed to rise suddenly beside her, and tumbled in great green +masses over the bulwarks. So wild and sudden were her movements +that even the oldest sailors were unable to keep their feet; and +all clung on to shrouds, or belaying pins. Will and Hans had lashed +themselves by the slack of a rope to the bulwarks, close to each +other, and there clung on; sometimes half drowned by the waves, +which poured in above them; sometimes torn from their feet by the +rush of green water, as the ship plunged, head foremost, into a +wave, or shipped one over her poop.</p> +<p>Presently there was a crash that sounded even above the fury of +the gale--the fore top-mast had gone, at the cap. The axes were +again called into requisition, for a blow from the floating spar +would have instantly stove in the side. While engaged upon this, +the captain called two of the men with axes aft. These were set to +work to chop through the shrouds of the mizzen and, in a minute +later, the mast snapped asunder on the level of the deck, and went +over the side with a crash, carrying away several feet of the +bulwark. This act was necessitated by the loss of the fore +top-mast, as the pressure of the wind upon the mizzen would have +brought her head up, and laid her broadside to the gale.</p> +<p>The motion of the vessel was now considerably easier, and there +was no longer any difficulty in keeping her dead before the wind. +She was now describing much larger circles in her course, showing +that she was farther removed from the center of the cyclone. After +five or six hours, the extreme violence of the wind somewhat +abated, and it seemed to settle down into a heavy gale.</p> +<p>For two days the vessel ran before it. She had made a good deal +of water, from the opening of the seams by straining, and the pumps +were kept going. They were, they found, able to prevent the water +from gaining upon them; and all felt that they should weather the +tempest, provided that they were not dashed upon any of the islands +in which this portion of the ocean abounds.</p> +<p>The crew had had no regular meals, since the gale began; for the +caboose had been broken up, and washed overboard, soon after the +commencement of the storm; and they had been obliged to be content +with biscuits. There was little to be done on deck and, the watch +over, they passed their time in their bunks.</p> +<p>In the afternoon of the third day of the tempest, the cry was +raised of "Breakers ahead!" Will, with his comrades of the watch +below, sprang from their berths and hurried on deck. Far ahead, as +the vessel lifted on the waves, could be seen a gleam of white +water.</p> +<p>In anticipation of such a danger, a small spar had been erected +upon the stump of the mizzen, and steadied with strong stays. Sail +was now hoisted upon this, and an effort was made to bring the +vessel's head to wind. Watching for a favorable moment between the +passage of the heavy seas, the helm was put down and, slowly, her +head came up into the wind. Under such sail, the captain had no +hope of being able to reach out, in the teeth of the gale; but he +hoped to be able to claw off the shore until clear of the land, +which lay to leeward of him.</p> +<p>That hope soon vanished. One of the mates was sent to the top of +the foremast, and descended with news that, as far as could be +seen, the line of breakers stretched away, both on her beam and +quarter. As the minutes went by the anxious crew could see, but too +clearly, that the ship was drifting down upon the land; and that +she must inevitably be wrecked upon it.</p> +<p>The outlines of the shore could now be seen--a forest of tossing +trees, behind which high land could be made out, through the +driving clouds. Orders were now given to prepare to anchor, but all +knew that the chances were slight, indeed. The water is for the +most part deep, close alongside the islands of the Eastern +Archipelago and, even were the holding ground good, hemp and iron +would hardly hold the vessel head to the gale, and tremendous +sea.</p> +<p>When within a quarter of a mile of the breakers, the man with +the lead proclaimed a depth of ten fathoms. This was better than +they had expected. The jib was lowered, and her head brought dead +to wind. The captain shouted "cut," and, in an instant, the +stoppers were severed, and two heavy anchors dropt into the sea. +One had a heavy chain cable, the other hemp; and these were allowed +to run out to the bits. The vessel brought up with less shock than +could be expected. A wave or two passed under her, and still her +cable held.</p> +<p>A gleam of hope began to reign, when a mountainous sea was seen, +approaching. Higher and higher it rose and, just as it reached the +ship, it curled over and crashed down upon her deck. The cables +snapped like pack thread, and a cry of despair arose from the crew. +The captain was calm and collected, and shouted orders for the jib +to be again hoisted, and the helm put up; so as to run her, head +first, on to the shore.</p> +<p>As they neared the line of breakers, they could see heads of +jagged rocks rising among them while, beyond, a belt of smooth +water--a quarter of a mile wide--extended to the land. The ship's +head was directed towards a point where no rocks appeared above the +surface. Everyone held their breath and, clinging to the bulwarks, +awaited the shock.</p> +<p>The vessel lifted on a great wave, just as she came to the line +of broken water and, as she settled down, struck with a tremendous +crash. So great was the shock that she broke in two, amidships, as +if she had been made of paper; the portion aft going instantly to +pieces and, at once, the sea around was covered with fragments of +wreck, bales, boxes, and casks. Another great sea followed, filling +the now open ship, forcing up the deck, and sweeping everything +before it.</p> +<p>William Gale and Hans had gone as far forward as possible.</p> +<p>"Come out to the end of the bowsprit," Will said to Hans; and +the two lads crawled out together, and sat on the end of the +spar.</p> +<p>The sea beneath them was white as milk, with the foam which +poured over the reef; but Will thought that they were beyond the +rocks. Every sea which struck the wreck added to the disaster; +until a larger one than usual struck it, and broke it into +fragments. The lads clung to the spar, as it fell. It sank deep in +the water, but they retained their hold until it came to the +surface, and Will looked round.</p> +<p>They were safely beyond the edge of the reef. The sea was still +rough and broken; but it was quiet, compared to that beyond the +reef. He saw that the fore mast was floating near and, to it, +several were clinging.</p> +<p>In a quarter of an hour the spar floated to land, the boys felt +the bottom with their feet, and soon scrambled ashore. A few +minutes later the fore mast also drifted up; and several men, +clinging to fragments of the wreck, were also cast ashore. In all +eleven men, including the first mate, were saved.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch5" id="Ch5">Chapter 5</a>: The Castaways.</h2> +<p>After waiting on the shore, until all hope that any more of +their shipmates survived was at an end, the party--by the mate's +orders--detached a sail from a yard that had drifted ashore, and +carried it well into the wood; where they were sheltered, to some +extent, from the force of the gale. A stout pole was then cut, and +lashed between two trees. The sail was thrown over this, and pegged +down at both sides. A fire was lit, with some difficulty. Then a +quantity of ferns and branches of trees were cut. These made a soft +and elastic bed, and the whole party slept heavily until the +morning.</p> +<p>Then they went back to the shore. It was littered thickly with +fragments of wreck, casks, boxes, and other articles. Here, too, +were nearly a score of the corpses of their shipmates. The first +duty was to dig a long shallow trench in the sand, beyond high +water mark; and in this the bodies of their drowned comrades were +laid.</p> +<p>The storm was now breaking. Glimpses of blue sky were visible +overhead, and the wind had greatly abated. The sea upon the reef +was, however, as high as ever. Setting to work, they hauled a large +number of boxes and bales beyond the reach of the waves. One of the +casks contained biscuits and, knocking in the head, they helped +themselves to its contents, and sat down to talk over their +position.</p> +<p>"I am not sure," the mate said, "that our poor comrades there--" +and he nodded towards the grave, "--have not the best of it. The +inhabitants of most of these islands are bloodthirsty pirates who, +if they find us, will either cut our throats at once, or keep us as +slaves. Our only hope is that we may not be discovered, until we +have time to build a boat in which to sail away to Singapore, or +back to Java.</p> +<p>"Had we been wrecked further south, things would have been more +hopeful; for the Papuans are friendly, and inoffensive people. +These islands here are inhabited by Malays, the most bloodthirsty +pirates in the world. However, we must hope that we may not be +found, before we have finished a boat.</p> +<p>"My chest is among those which have been washed up, and there +are a few tools in it. I always had a fancy for carpentry; and it's +hard if, in a fortnight, we cannot make some sort of craft which +will carry us. Indeed, if we content ourselves with a strong +framework, covered with canvas, we may be ready in four or five +days."</p> +<p>The men set cheerfully to work, under his directions. In his +chest was a hatchet, saw, and chisels. With these, young trees of +flexible wood were cut down and split. A keel was laid, 25 feet in +length. Cross pieces, 12 feet long, were pegged to this by +trenails--nails formed of tough and hard wood. The cross pieces +were then bent upwards, and fastened to the strips which were to +form the gunwale. Strengthening pieces were placed along, at +distances of 7 or 8 inches apart, and firmly lashed. When the whole +was finished, after three days' labor, the framework of a boat 25 +feet long, 3 feet deep, and 7 feet in beam stood upon the beach. A +barrel of oil had been thrown ashore and, with this, the mate +intended thoroughly to soak the canvas with which the frame was to +be covered. The boat would, he calculated, carry the whole of the +men, with an ample store of food and water for the voyage.</p> +<p>Upon the morning of the fourth day as, on their way to work, +they emerged from the wood upon the open beach, the mate gave a low +cry, and pointed along the shore. There, between the reef and the +island, was a large Malay prahu. The party instantly fell back +among the trees. The Malays were apparently cruising along the +reef, to see if the late storm had thrown up the wreckage--which +might be useful to them--and a loud shout proclaimed their +satisfaction, as they saw the shore strewn with the remains of the +Dutch ship. The prahu was rowed to the shore, and fifty or sixty +Malays sprang from the bows on to the sand.</p> +<p>Scarcely had they done so when a shout, from one of them, called +the attention of the others to the framework of the boat. There was +a minute's loud and excited chatter among them. Then they dashed +forward to the wood, the deep footsteps in the sand showing, +plainly enough, the direction from which the builders of the boat +had come and gone. The latter, as the Malay boat neared the shore, +had retired further into the wood but, from the screen of leaves, +they were able to see what was going on. As they saw the Malays +rush, in an excited and yelling throng, towards the wood, the +little party took to their heels.</p> +<p>"Scatter," the mate said. "Together, they are sure to overtake +us; singly, we may escape."</p> +<p>"Let us keep together, Hans," Will said, as they dashed along +through the wild jungle. Torn by thorns, often thrown down by +projecting roots and low creepers, they kept on; their pace at +times quickening, as shouts and screams told them that some of +their comrades had fallen into the hands of the Malays. Presently +they came upon the little stream which flowed into the sea, close +to where they had been cast ashore.</p> +<p>"Let us follow this up," Will said. "They can track us, through +the forest; but the water will set them off our scent."</p> +<p>For a quarter of a mile, they followed the course of the stream; +stopping breathlessly, many times, as they heard voices in the +wood, not far off. Presently Will pointed to a tree, rising from a +clump of bushes, close to the bank.</p> +<p>"Let us get through those bushes," he said. "Be careful, Hans, +not to break a twig, as you go. We can climb that tree. There are +plants, with stems like cords, winding round it. The top is so +thick and bushy that I don't think they can see us, there."</p> +<p>Very carefully they parted the bushes that overhung the stream, +and entered the thicket. Then they made their way, with great +difficulty, to the foot of the tree. It was a very large one, with +a trunk fully 15 feet in diameter, rising some forty feet without a +branch. Then a number of great arms grew out, at right angles. +These were covered thickly with parasitic vegetation. Round the +trunk, like a snake embracing its victim, a great climber had wound +itself. Its main stem was as thick as a man's arm, and there were +dozens of smaller, cord-like climbers. Thus, the lads had no +difficulty in climbing to the point where the branches grew out. +Above these was a mass of foliage, completely covered by the +climbers; whose drooping sprays, and clusters, gave the tree the +appearance of a solid mass of verdure. The boys continued to climb +until they were nearly at the top of the tree.</p> +<p>"There!" Will said, wiping away the perspiration which streamed +from his face, "if they do not track us through the bushes to the +very foot of this tree, I defy them to find us."</p> +<p>For some hours, the wood was alive with noises. The Malays were +evidently beating every foot of it, and were determined that none +of their victims should escape. Several times parties of men came +up the stream, searching the banks on both sides but, happily, even +their sharp eyes did not detect the spot where the boys had entered +the bushes and, gradually, the noises ceased and, at night, a great +glare by the seashore told the lads that their enemies had gathered +again there; and were continuing, by fire light, the work of +breaking open and examining the treasures which the sea had cast up +for them.</p> +<p>"What do you zay, Will? Zhall we get down and go furder into +wood, or zhall we wait here?"</p> +<p>"I think, anyhow, we had better wait till tomorrow night," Will +answered. "They may search again, tomorrow, and might come upon our +tracks. If they don't find us, they may suppose that they have +caught us all, or that we have escaped right into the interior. If +they find no traces of us they will, likely enough, set sail before +night."</p> +<p>There was no difficulty in finding a place in which they could +sleep; for the cord-like climbers from bough to bough formed +natural cradles, in which they lay as securely as if in a hammock, +on board a ship. In the morning they were woke, at daybreak, by the +cries of the many birds which throng the forests of the Eastern +Archipelago. No one approached them during the day, and they +doubted not that the Malays were all hard at work, on the +shore.</p> +<p>That night there was no reflection of a fire on the beach. In +the morning they descended from their perches and made their way +carefully, and as noiselessly as possible, through the wood; to a +point upon the shore, a mile distant from the point where they +landed. Going to the edge of the trees, they were enabled to take a +view along the shore. It was deserted. The Malay prahu was +gone.</p> +<p>Confident that none of their enemies would have remained behind, +they walked boldly along the shore to the spot where the Malays had +landed. Every box and barrel had been broken open, and the contents +carried away. Planks and beams had been split asunder, to obtain +the copper bolts and fastenings. The framework of the boat had been +destroyed, and every portion of canvas and rope carried away. The +lads sat down on the shore.</p> +<p>"What shall we do next, Hans?"</p> +<p>Hans shook his head.</p> +<p>"Perhaps some of the others may have got away, and may join us +here, today or tomorrow. If any are alive, they would be certain to +come back here, when they thought the Malays had left."</p> +<p>Hans grunted an assent.</p> +<p>"Anyhow, the first thing to do," Will went on, "is to gather up +the pieces of biscuits. They have wasted lots, in breaking open the +barrels, and I am famishing."</p> +<p>Hans rose with alacrity, and they soon were at work collecting +pieces of biscuits.</p> +<p>"Let us gather up all the pieces, carefully. There are a good +lot, altogether; and we may want them, badly, before we have +done."</p> +<p>In half an hour they had collected about 30 pounds of biscuits +and, having gone to the stream and taken a drink, they made for the +spot where their tent had stood. As they expected, they found the +canvas was gone. They set to work with their knives and, cutting a +number of boughs, erected a shelter sufficient to shield them from +the night air.</p> +<p>All day they hoped, but in vain, that some of their comrades +would return, and listened eagerly to every sound in the forest; +but no call, or footstep, met their ears. They had no means of +lighting a fire, the first having been lit by the mate who--being a +smoker--had had a small tin box of matches in his pocket. This had +fitted closely, and kept out the water.</p> +<p>"What had we better do, if no one comes back?" Will said, as +they sat in their little hut.</p> +<p>"Build anoder boat," Hans answered.</p> +<p>"But how are we to do that, Hans? We might make the framework, +but we have no canvas to cover it with. Besides, even if we had, I +have no idea of the direction of Singapore, and I doubt if we could +find our way back to Java."</p> +<p>Hans had no further suggestion to offer.</p> +<p>"I suppose we could live in the forest for some time," Will +said. "I read a book called Robinson Crusoe, and a sailor there +lived on a desert island for years; but then he had a gun, and all +sorts of things. There are plenty of birds but, even if we could +make bows and arrows, I suppose we should be months before we could +shoot straight enough to hit them."</p> +<p>Several days passed. The lads found plenty of fruit; but the +season was advancing, and Will said one day to Hans:</p> +<p>"What on earth are we to do, when the fruit and biscuits are all +finished?"</p> +<p>Wandering in the woods, they found the bodies of the whole of +their companions. All were headless, the Malays having carried off +these coveted trophies. They did not attempt to bury the bodies +for, in such a climate, decomposition sets in rapidly, and swarms +of insects complete the work. In the grass near the hut they found +one treasure--the mate's ax--which had evidently fallen from his +belt, in his flight, and had been overlooked by the Malays.</p> +<p>"I tell you what, Hans," Will said, one day, "fruit is getting +scarcer and scarcer, and there are not more than five or six pounds +of biscuits left. I vote that we make through the forest into the +interior of the island. There must be some villages scattered +about. If we enter one boldly, they may not kill us. I don't know +whether they have any respect for the laws of hospitality, as some +savages have but, even if they did kill us, it's better than being +starved to death, here. It's a chance, anyhow.</p> +<p>"What do you say, Hans?"</p> +<p>"I don't zay noding," Hans answered. "I don't have no obinion, +at all. If you dink zat is ze best plan, let us do it."</p> +<p>So saying, Hans collected the biscuit, tied it up in his +handkerchief, and was ready to start at once.</p> +<p>"There is no hurry, Hans," Will said, laughing; "still, if we +are to make a start, we may as well go at once."</p> +<p>Turning their backs upon the sea, they struck into the wood. +They had never before gone farther than a mile from the shore. +After an hour's walking, they found that the character of the +forest was changing: the ground rose rapidly, the thick, tangled +undergrowth disappeared, and they were able to walk briskly +forward, under the shade of the large trees. The hill became +steeper and steeper, as they advanced; and Will knew that they were +ascending the hill that they had seen from the ship, when she was +coming towards the shore.</p> +<p>Three hours after leaving the coast, they were upon its top. The +ground was rocky here and, in some places, bare of trees. Inland, +they saw hill rising behind hill, and knew that the island must be +a large one.</p> +<a id="PicB" name="PicB"></a> +<center><img src="images/b.jpg" alt= +"Illustration: Will and Hans in Search of a Shelter." /></center> +<p>"Look, Hans, there is smoke curling up at the foot of that hill, +over there. Don't you see it? It is very faint, but it is certainly +smoke. There must be a house there and, most likely, a village.</p> +<p>"Come on, we shall get there before the sun sets. I don't think +it can be more than a mile and a half away."</p> +<p>Hans, as usual, assented and, in about half an hour, they +arrived at a Malay village. The aspect was curious, each hut being +built in a tree. At the point where the lower branches started, a +platform was made. The tree above this was cut down, and on the +platform the hut was erected--access being obtained to it by a +ladder. Several of the inhabitants were walking about. These, upon +seeing the lads, uttered cries of warning and, instantly flying to +the ladders, which were constructed of light bamboo, climbed to the +huts and raised the ladders after them. Then, at every door, men +appeared with bent bows and pointed arrows, threatening the +invaders.</p> +<p>Will had cut a green bough, and this he waved as a token of +peace; while Hans threw up his hands, to show that he was unarmed. +Then they bowed several times, almost to the ground; held out their +arms with outstretched hands and, finally, sat down upon the +ground.</p> +<p>The Malays apparently understood that their visitors came in +peace. They held a long conversation among themselves and, at last, +the ladder of one of the huts--which appeared larger and better +finished than the others--was lowered, and four men descended. One +of these carried a kriss in his hand. His bow was slung behind his +back. The others kept their bows bent in readiness for instant +action.</p> +<p>The chief was a tall and well-built man, of about forty years of +age. He, like his followers, was dressed only in a loincloth; he +had copper bracelets round his wrists. As he approached, the lads +rose and bowed deeply; then Will held out to him the ax and, +placing it in his hand, motioned to him that it was a present.</p> +<p>The chief looked pleased at the gift, placed his hands on Will's +shoulder and nodded, and performed the same gesture to Hans. Then +he led them towards his hut, and motioned to them to sit down at +the foot of the tree.</p> +<p>Curious faces were watching from every hut and, as soon as it +was seen that peace was established, the ladders were lowered and a +swarm of men, women, and children soon surrounded the visitors. At +the chief's order a woman approached them, bringing a dish of food. +This was composed, the boys found, principally of birds; cut up and +stewed, with some sort of vegetable. The dish was by no means bad +and, after living for nearly a fortnight upon biscuit and fruit, +they much enjoyed it.</p> +<p>Presently, women brought bundles of dried fern and spread them +at the foot of the tree and, soon after it was dark, the boys lay +down upon them. It was long, however, before they went to sleep; +for the din and chatter in the village continued, until far into +the night. The lads guessed that the reason and manner of their +coming was warmly debated; and judged by their reception that the +prevailing opinions were favorable, and that the visit from the two +white men was considered to be a fortunate omen.</p> +<p>The next day they were again amply supplied with food, and were +constantly surrounded by a little group of women and children, to +whom their white skins appeared a source of constant wonder. Their +movements were entirely unchecked, and they were evidently +considered in the light of guests rather than prisoners.</p> +<p>The next night the village retired to rest early. The boys sat +talking together, for a long time, and then lay down to sleep. +Presently, Will thought that he heard a noise and, looking up, saw +in the moonlight a number of savages, stealthily approaching. They +carried with them ladders; and intended, he had no doubt, to +surprise the sleeping villagers. They were already close at +hand.</p> +<p>Will shook Hans--who had already gone off to sleep--and pointed +out to him the advancing foes. These were already in the village +and, separating, fixed a ladder against each of the huts. So far +the boys, who lay in the shadow of the hut, had not been noticed. +The Malays--who belonged to a hostile village--began to climb the +ladders; when the lads, grasping the heavy sticks which they always +carried, and springing to their feet with loud shouts, ran to the +ladders, before the Malays could recover from their astonishment at +the approach of the white-faced men, rushing upon them.</p> +<p>Half a dozen of the ladders were upset, the men who had mounted +them coming heavily to the ground. Some of these, as they rose, at +once took to their heels; others, drawing their krisses, rushed at +their assailants. But the lads were no longer alone. At the first +shout, the doors of the huts had opened; and the inhabitants rushed +out, with their arms. The remaining ladders were instantly +overthrown, and a shower of arrows poured upon their +assailants.</p> +<p>Will and Hans knocked down the foremost of their assailants; and +the whole body, foiled in their attempted surprise, discomfited at +the appearance of the strange white-faced men, and exposed to the +arrows of the defenders, at once darted away--several of their +number having already fallen, under the shafts from above. With +exulting shouts, the warriors of the village poured down their +ladders from the huts, and took up the pursuit; and soon no one +remained in the village, save the white lads and the women and +children.</p> +<p>Towards morning the warriors returned, several of them bringing +with them gory heads, showing that their pursuit had not been in +vain. The village was now the scene of great rejoicings. Huge fires +were lighted, and a feast held in honor of the victory. The chief +solemnly placed the white men, one on each side of him, and made +them a speech; in which, by his bowing and placing his hand on +their heads, they judged he was thanking them for having preserved +their village from massacre. Indeed, it was clear, from the +respectful manner of all towards them, that they were regarded in +the light of genii, who had come specially to protect the village +from the assaults of its enemies.</p> +<p>After the feast was over the chief, after a consultation with +the rest, pointed to a tree close to that in which his own hut was +situated. The whole village set to work, ladders were fixed against +it; and the men, ascending, hacked away with krisses and stone +hatchets at the trunk. Hans--seeing their object--made signs to the +chief to lend him his ax and, ascending to the tree, set to work +with it; doing, in five minutes, more work than the whole of the +natives employed could have accomplished in an hour. After working +for some time, he handed the ax to one of the natives, who +continued the work. The tree was not a large one--the trunk, at +this point, being about 18 inches in diameter. Half an hour's work +sufficed to cut it through; and the upper part of the tree fell, +with a crash.</p> +<p>In the meantime the women had brought in, from the forest, a +quantity of bamboos and, with these, the men set to work and +speedily formed a platform. Upon this a hut was erected, the roof +and sides being covered with palm leaves laid closely together, +forming a roof impervious to rain. Two large bundles of fern, for +beds, were then taken up; and the chief, ascending, solemnly +invited the boys to come up and take possession.</p> +<p>A woman was told off to prepare food for them, and attend to +their wants and, by nightfall, the lads found themselves in a +comfortable abode of their own. Pulling up the ladder, after the +manner of the natives, they sat down to chat over their altered +prospects. They were now clearly regarded as adopted into the +village community, and need have no further fear as to their +personal security, or means of living.</p> +<p>"For the time we are safe," Will said; "but--as I don't want to +turn Malay, and live all my life with no other amusement than +keeping my own head on, and hunting for those of the enemies of the +village--we must think of making our escape, somehow; though at +present, I own I don't see how."</p> +<h2><a name="Ch6" id="Ch6">Chapter 6</a>: The Attack On The +Village.</h2> +<p>A day or two later a Malay ran at full speed into the village, +and said a few words which caused a perfect hubbub of excitement. +The men shouted. The women screamed and, running up the ladders to +their tree abodes, began gathering together the various articles of +value, in their eyes. The chief came up to the boys and, by signs, +intimated that a large number of hostile natives, belonging to +several villages, were advancing to attack them; and that they must +fly into the interior.</p> +<p>This was very unwelcome news for the lads. Once removed farther +from the sea the tribe might, not improbably, take up their abode +there, as they would fear to return to the neighborhood of their +enemies. This would be fatal to any chance of the lads being taken +off by a passing ship. After a few words together, they determined +to oppose the movement. Will, in a loud voice and with threatening +gestures, intimated that he disapproved of the plan, and that he +and his companion would assist them in defending their village.</p> +<p>The Malays paused in their preparations. Their faith in their +white visitors was very great and, after a few minutes' talk among +themselves, they intimated to the boys that they would obey their +orders. Will at once signed to a few men to stand as guards round +the village, to warn them of the approaching enemy; and then set +the whole of the rest of the population to work cutting +sharp-pointed poles, boughs, and thorny bushes. With these a circle +was made around the trees upon which the village was built. +Fortunately the hostile Malays had halted in the forest, two or +three miles away, intending to make their attack by night and, as +the news of their coming had arrived at noon, the villagers had, +before they ceased work late in the evening, erected a formidable +hedge round the village.</p> +<p>Some of the women had been set to work manufacturing a number of +torches, similar to those used by them for lighting their +dwellings, but much larger. They were formed of the stringy bark of +a tree, dipped in the resinous juice obtained from another. Will +had one of these fastened to each of the trees nearest to the +hedge. They were fixed to the trunks on the outside, so that their +flame would throw a light on the whole circle beyond the hedge +while, within, all would be shadow and darkness.</p> +<p>It was very late before all preparations were completed. Will +then placed a few men as outposts, some hundred yards in the +forest, in the direction from which the enemy were likely to +approach. They were ordered to give the alarm, the moment they +heard a noise; and were then to run in and enter the circle by a +small gap, which had been left in the abbatis for the purpose. Many +of the men then took their posts, with their bows and arrows, in +the trees near the hedge. The others remained on the ground, ready +to rush to any point assailed.</p> +<p>For several hours no sound save the calls of the night birds, +and the occasional distant howls of beasts of prey, were heard in +the forest; and it was not until within an hour of morning--the +hour generally selected by Malays for an attack, as men sleep at +that time the heaviest--that a loud yell, at one of the outposts, +told that the enemy were close at hand.</p> +<p>Two or three minutes later the scouts ran in, and the gap +through which they had entered was at once filled up with bushes, +which had been piled close at hand for the purpose. Aware that +their approach was discovered, the enemy abandoned all further +concealment; and advanced with wild yells, intending to strike +terror into the defenders of the village. As they advanced the +torches were all lighted and, as the assailants came within their +circle of light, a shower of arrows from the Malays on the ground, +and in the trees above, was poured into them.</p> +<p>Yells and screams told that the volley had been a successful one +but, discharging their arrows in turn, the Malays, with demoniac +yells, rushed against the village. The advance, however, was +arrested suddenly when they arrived at the abbatis. From behind its +shelter, so deadly a rain of arrows was poured in that they soon +shrank back, and bounded away beyond the circle of light, while +taunting shouts rose from its defenders.</p> +<p>For a time they contented themselves by distant shouting; and +then, with a wild yell, charged forward again. Several dropped from +the fire of arrows, from those in the trees and behind the abbatis +but, discharging their arrows in return, the assailants kept on +until they again reached the impediment. Here they strove furiously +to break through--hacking with their krisses, and endeavoring to +pull up the stakes with their hands--but the defenders, in the +shade behind, sent their arrows so fast and thick that the +assailants again shrank back, and darted away to shelter.</p> +<p>Throughout the night there was no renewal of the attack and, in +the morning, not a foe was visible. Two or three scouts went out to +reconnoiter; but no sooner did they enter the forest than one of +them was shot down, and the rest sent flying back.</p> +<p>"I believe the scoundrels are going to try to starve us out," +Will said. "Let us speak to the chief, and ask how much provisions +they have got."</p> +<p>After much pantomime, Will succeeded in conveying his meaning to +the chief; and the latter at once ordered all the inhabitants to +produce their stock of food. This was unexpectedly large, and Will +thought that there was sufficient for a fortnight's consumption. He +now made signs of drinking, but the reply to this was disheartening +in the extreme. A few gourds full of water were brought forward, +and two or three of the close-woven baskets in which water is often +carried, in this country. There was, in fact, scarce enough to last +the defenders for a day. The stream from which the village drew its +supply of water was about a couple of hundred yards away; +consequently the villagers fetched up their water as they needed +it, and no one thought of keeping a store.</p> +<p>Will looked in dismay at the smallness of the supply.</p> +<p>"If they really intend to starve us out, Hans, we are done for. +No doubt they reckon on our water falling short. They would know +that it was not likely that there would be a supply here."</p> +<p>The natives were not slow to recognize the weak point of their +defense One or two of the men, taking water baskets, were about to +go to the stream; but Will made signs to the chief that they must +not do this. The only hope was that the enemies would draw off; but +if they saw that water was already short, they would be encouraged +to continue to beleaguer the place. Will was unable to explain his +reasons to the chief; but the latter, seeing how great was the +advantage that they had already gained, by following the counsel of +their white visitors in the matter of the hedge, acquiesced at once +in their wishes.</p> +<p>Will then ascended to one of the huts, and carefully +reconnoitered the whole ground. There was, he saw, at the end +farthest from the stream, a slight dip in the land extending into +the forest. Beckoning the chief to join him, he made signs that, at +night, the warriors should issue silently from the village at this +point, and make noiselessly through the wood. They would then take +a wide circuit, till they came upon the stream; and would then, +working up it, fall upon the enemy in the rear.</p> +<p>The chief was dubious; but Will made an imperative gesture and +the chief, in a humble manner, agreed to do as he was ordered. The +day passed slowly and, before nightfall, the supply of water was +entirely finished. Once or twice scouts had gone out, to see if the +enemy were still round the village; but returned, each time, with +the news that they were there.</p> +<p>The last time, just before nightfall, Will directed two or three +of them to take water buckets, and to go in the direction of the +stream; signing to them, however, to return the moment they saw +signs of the enemy. They were soon back and, as Will had expected, +the sight of the water buckets showed the enemy that the garrison +of the village were badly supplied, in that respect; and taunting +shouts arose from the woods, asking them why they did not go down +to drink.</p> +<p>Will felt certain that the Malays would now draw the greater +part of their number down to the side of the stream; and that there +would therefore be the more chance of the garrison making their way +out, at the other end of the village. Three hours after it was +dark, the chief mustered all his men. They were about +five-and-forty, in all. Will signed that each should take with him +a water basket or large gourd so that, in case they failed in +defeating the enemy, and breaking up the blockade, they might at +least be able to bring a supply of water into the village. Will +then, with much difficulty, explained to the chief that the old +men, boys, and women remaining in the village were, the moment they +heard the sound of the attack upon the enemy's rear, to shout and +yell their loudest, and to shoot arrows in the direction of the +enemy.</p> +<p>A few sticks had already been pulled up at the point of the +hedge through which Will intended to make a sally, and the band now +passed noiselessly out. The chief himself led the way, the white +boys following behind him. Lying upon their stomachs, they crawled +noiselessly along down the little depression and, in ten minutes, +were well in the wood; without having met with an enemy, although +they had several times heard voices among the trees, near them.</p> +<p>They now rose to their feet and, making a wide detour, came +down, after a quarter of an hour's walk, upon the stream. Here the +gourds and baskets were filled; and then, keeping along by the +waterside, they continued their march. Presently they saw a number +of fires, round which many Malays were sitting. They crept +noiselessly up until within a few yards and then, with a yell, +burst upon the enemy. Numbers were cut down at once; and the rest, +appalled by this attack on their rear, and supposing that the +inhabitants of some other village must have arrived to the +assistance of those they were besieging, at once fled in all +directions. Those remaining in the village had seconded the attack +by wild shouts, so loud and continuous that their besiegers had no +reason to suppose that their number had been weakened.</p> +<p>For a few minutes the pursuit was kept up; then the chief +recalled his followers, with a shout. The water baskets--many of +which had been thrown down in the attack--were refilled, and the +party made their way up to the village, where they were received +with shouts of triumph.</p> +<p>The panic of the Malays had been, in no slight degree, caused by +the appearance of the two boys; who had purposely stripped to the +waist, and had shouted at the top of their voices as, waving the +krisses which they had borrowed, they fell upon the foe. The idea +that white devils were leagued with the enemies against them had +excited the superstitious fear of the Malays to the utmost; and +when, in the morning, scouts again sallied from the village, they +found that the enemy had entirely gone--the fact that they had not +even returned to carry off the effects which had been abandoned, in +the first panic, showing that they had continued their flight, +without stopping, to their distant villages.</p> +<p>The chief, like an able politician, took advantage of the +impression which his white visitors had created and, the same day, +sent off messengers to the villages which had combined in the +attack against them, saying that the white men--his guests--were +very angry; and that, unless peace was made, and a solemn promise +given that there should be no renewal of the late attempts, they +were going to lay a dreadful spell upon the villages. Women and +children would be seized by disease, and the right arms of the +warriors wither up.</p> +<p>This terrible threat carried consternation into the Malay +villages. The women burst into prolonged wailings, and the bravest +of the men trembled. The messenger said that the white men had +consented to abstain from using their magical powers until the +following day; and that the only chance to propitiate them was for +deputations from the villages to come in, early the next morning, +with promises of peace and offerings for the offended white +men.</p> +<p>It was not for some time afterwards that the lads learned enough +of the language to understand what had been done; but they guessed, +from the exultation of the chief, and the signs which he made that +their late enemies would shortly come in, in an attitude of +humiliation, that he had in some way succeeded in establishing a +scare among them.</p> +<p>On the following morning deputations--consisting of six +warriors, and women bearing trays with fruit, birds, and other +offerings--arrived at the village. The men were unarmed. At their +approach, the chief made signs to the boys to take a seat at the +foot of the principal tree; and then, accompanied by his leading +warriors, led the deputation--with much ceremony--before them. The +women placed their trays at their feet, and the men addressed them +in long speeches, and with many signs of submission.</p> +<p>The boys played their part well. As soon as they saw what was +required of them they signified, with an air of much dignity, that +they accepted the offerings; and then went through the ceremony of +shaking hands, solemnly, with each of the warriors. Then they made +a speech in which, with much gesticulation, they signified to the +visitors that a terrible fate would befall them, should they again +venture to meddle with the village.</p> +<p>Much awed and impressed, the Malays withdrew. The boys made a +selection, from the baskets of fruit, for their own eating; and +then signified, to the chief, that he should divide the rest among +the inhabitants of the village. When this was done, the boys +ascended to their tree and passed the day there quietly; the +villagers indulging in feasting, singing, and rejoicing over their +victory.</p> +<p>"The worst of all this is," Will said to Hans, "that the more +they reverence us, and the more useful they find us, the more +anxious they will be to keep us always with them. However, there is +one comfort: we are safe, as long as we choose to remain here; and +that is more than we could have hoped for, when we first landed +from the wreck. It is curious that the Malays, who have no +hesitation in attacking English ships, and murdering their crews, +have yet a sort of superstitious dread of us. But I suppose it is +something the same way as it was in England, in the days of the +persecution of old women as witches: they believed that, if left to +themselves, they could cast deadly spells, and yet they had no +hesitation in putting them to death. I suppose that it is something +of the same feeling, here."</p> +<h2><a name="Ch7" id="Ch7">Chapter 7</a>: The Fight With The +Prahus.</h2> +<p>Very frequently, in the days that followed, William Gale and his +friend Hans talked over the possibility of effecting an escape; but +the difficulties appeared almost invincible. The various villages +which, so far as the boys could understand, were scattered at some +distance apart, had little dealings with each other; and indeed, +were frequently engaged in feuds. The particular people with whom +they lived had nothing whatever to do with the sea. They used--at +least so the boys understood, by their signs--to fish, at one time; +but they had been robbed of their boats, and maltreated, by some of +the cruising tribes who lived in villages on the coast, or on +creeks and rivers.</p> +<p>The possibility of escape seemed small, indeed. To escape they +must get on board a ship and, to do this, they must first go out to +sea; and this could only be done in a boat of their own, or in one +of the piratical prahus. The latter course could not be thought of, +for the coast pirates were bloodthirsty in the extreme and, even +could they change their residence to one of the seaside villages, +and gain the friendship of the inhabitants, they would be no nearer +to their end. For as these go out to attack, and not to trade with +European ships, there would be no chance of escaping in that +way.</p> +<p>Upon the other hand, they might build a boat of their own; but +they considered it improbable that the Malays would allow them to +depart, for they evidently regarded their presence as a prodigy; +and revered them as having miraculously arrived, at the moment when +a great danger threatened the village. But, even should they be +allowed to build a boat and depart, they knew not whither to go. +They knew nothing of navigation, and were ignorant of the geography +of the Archipelago; and the chances of their striking upon the one +or two spots, where, alone they could land with safety, were so +small that it would be madness to undertake the voyage.</p> +<p>For six months they lived quietly in the Malay village. The +people instructed them in the use of their blowguns, in which they +are wonderfully skilful; being able to bring down a bird, sitting +on a lofty bough of a tree, with almost an unerring accuracy. They +also taught them to shoot with the bow and arrow, and they found +that the natives used the roots of various kinds of plants for +food. The time did not pass unpleasantly and, had they known that +it would last but a few months, only, they would have enjoyed it +much.</p> +<p>At last, after much deliberation, they determined that they +would--as a first step towards escape--construct a little boat, +under pretense of wanting to fish. Accordingly one day, when out +with the chief and two or three of his men in the direction of the +sea, they pointed there, and signified that they wished to go +there--for they had picked up a good many Malay words. The chief +shook his head, but they insisted in so authoritative a manner that +he gave way, and followed them.</p> +<p>When they reached the shore, they made signs that they wanted to +construct a boat. Again the chief shook his head vehemently; and +enforced his meaning by pointing along shore, and going through the +action first of rowing, then of fighting--intimating that they +would certainly be killed, if they ventured out, by the fierce +coast tribes. The boys nodded, to show that they understood what he +wished to say but, pointing to the water a few yards from shore, +went through the action of fishing; then, burdening themselves with +imaginary fish, they pointed to the village, and showed that they +would supply it with food.</p> +<p>The Malays talked for some time among themselves. They had so +vast a respect for the white men that they did not like to thwart +their wishes. The thought, too, of a supply of fish--of which they +had been long deprived owing to their feuds with some of the coast +villages--also operated strongly in favor of their yielding an +assent and, at last, the chief made signs that he agreed and, +pointing to the village, intimated that assistance should be given +in building a boat.</p> +<p>The next day, accordingly, ten or twelve men came down to the +shore with them. A tree was felled, the ends were pointed, and the +whole formed roughly into the shape of a canoe. Fires were lighted +on the top and, by dint of flame and ax, a hollow was dug out. The +operation lasted three days, the men having brought provisions with +them, so as to avoid making the journey--two and a half hours +long--to and from the village each day. The boat, when finished, +was but a rough construction; and would have excited the mockery of +any of the coast villagers, as they are expert boat builders. +Still, it was amply sufficient for the purpose for which it was +intended--namely, for fishing inside the line of reefs.</p> +<p>It was heavy, and paddled slowly; and the lads had a strong +suspicion that the Malays had purposely made it more clumsy and +unseaworthy than need be, in order that they should have no +temptation to attempt a distant journey in it.</p> +<p>There was no difficulty about lines, the Malays being skilled in +making string and ropes from the fibers of trees. The hooks were +more difficult but, upon searching very carefully along the shore, +the lads found some fragments of one of the ship boats; and in +these were several copper nails which, hammered and bent, would +serve their purpose well. The lines were ready on the day the canoe +was finished and, as soon as she was launched, the chief and one of +the other Malays, and the boys, took their seats in her.</p> +<p>The natives paddled her out nearly to the edge of the reef. Four +lines, baited with pieces of raw birds' flesh, were thrown +overboard. A few minutes passed--rather anxiously for the lads, who +were most desirous that the fishing should be successful, so as to +afford them an excuse for frequently pursuing it. Then there was a +bite; and Hans, who held the line, found that it taxed his strength +to haul in the fish which tugged and strained upon it. When it was +got into the boat, it proved to be some fourteen pounds in weight. +By this time two of the other baits had been taken and, in less +than an hour, they had caught upwards of thirty fish, most of them +of considerable size.</p> +<p>The natives were delighted and, paddling to shore, the burden +was distributed among the whole party, with the exception of the +chief and the two whites. Before starting, a young tree was cut +down and chopped into lengths of a few feet each; and on these +rollers the canoe was hauled high up the beach. Then the party set +out for the village; where their arrival, with so large a supply of +food, occasioned great rejoicing.</p> +<p>After this, the boys went down regularly, every day, to fish. At +first three or four of the natives always accompanied them, under +pretense of carrying back the fish; but really, as they thought, to +keep a watch over them. To lessen their hosts' suspicions, +sometimes one or other stayed in the village. As time went on, the +suspicion of the Malays abated. The number of the guard was +lessened and, finally, as the men disliked so long a tramp, some of +the boys were told off to accompany the white men, and assist in +bringing back their fish. They were in the habit of starting soon +after daybreak, and of not returning till late in the evening; +accounting for their long absence by pointing to the sun.</p> +<p>The fishing was always performed immediately they reached the +coast. When they had caught as many as they and the boys could +carry, these were placed in a large covered basket; which was sunk +in the water close to the shore, to keep the fish in good condition +until they started. Then they would paddle about within the reef +or, during the extreme heat of the day, lie in the boat, shaded by +bunches of palm leaves. The Malay boys--who were set on shore after +the fishing--were left alone; and amused themselves by bathing, or +passed the time asleep under the trees.</p> +<p>After the first day or two, it had struck the boys that it was +dangerous to leave the canoe high on the sand; as it would be +observed, even at a distance, by a passing prahu. Consequently a +deep trench had been dug from the sea, far enough up to allow the +canoe, when floating in it, to lie below the level of the beach. +Before leaving her she was, each day, roughly covered with seaweed; +and might, therefore, escape observation by any craft passing at a +short distance from the shore.</p> +<p>In their expeditions along the reef, the boys discovered a +passage through it. It was of about double the width of a ship, and +of amply sufficient depth to allow a vessel of any size to cross. +At all other points, for a distance of a mile or two either +way--which was the extent of their excursions--the reef came very +near to the surface; its jagged points, for the most part, showing +above it.</p> +<p>Several months passed, and still no sail which promised a hope +of deliverance had shown over the surface of the sea. Scarce a day +passed without their seeing the Malay prahus passing up and down +the coast; but these always kept some distance out, and caused no +uneasiness to the fishermen. They had, during this time, completed +the hollowing out of the boat; until her sides were extremely thin, +and she was so light that she could be paddled at a high rate of +speed.</p> +<p>They were both now expert with the paddle; and felt that if, in +a light wind, a vessel should be seen off the coast, they would be +enabled to row out and reach her. It might be, they knew, months or +even years before such a ship could be seen. Still, as there were +many vessels trading among the islands, at any moment an occurrence +might arise.</p> +<p>One afternoon, they had been dozing under their leafy shade when +Will, who first awoke, sat up and uttered a cry. Almost abreast of +them, and but a quarter of a mile outside the reef, was a large +brig. The wind was light and, with every stitch of canvas set, she +was making but slow progress through the water. Hans leaped up, +echoed the cry and, seizing their paddles, they rowed with all +their strength away to the opening through the reef; passed +through, and headed for the ship.</p> +<p>They now saw what they had not, at first, observed. At a +distance of some three miles astern were five large prahus, with +their sails set, and the banks of oars rising and falling rapidly. +The brig was chased by the pirates.</p> +<p>The boys rested on their paddles, for a moment.</p> +<p>"They are more than a match for her, I am afraid," Will said. +"What do you say, Hans, shall we go on, or not?"</p> +<p>Hans made no reply. He was never quick at coming to a +decision.</p> +<p>"We had better go," Will went on. "We can see whether they mean +to fight, or not."</p> +<p>The boys were naked to the waist--for the thorns of the forest +had long since torn in pieces the shirts which they had on, when +they landed from the wreck--and their skins were bronzed to a deep +copper color Still, they differed in hue from the natives of the +island; and the men on board the brig regarded them with some +surprise, as they approached it.</p> +<p>"Throw us a rope!" Will shouted as they neared her.</p> +<p>There was a cry of surprise from the crew, at being addressed in +English; but a rope was thrown, and the boys soon sprang on board. +They saw, at once, that the ship was an English one.</p> +<p>"Hallo! Where do you spring from?" asked the captain.</p> +<p>"We were shipwrecked here, ten months ago," Will said, "and have +been living with the natives."</p> +<p>"At any other time, I should have been glad to see you," the +captain said; "but just at present, if you will take my advice, you +will get into your canoe and row on shore again.</p> +<p>"As you see," and he pointed to the prahus, "we are chased and, +although I mean to fight to the last--for there is no mercy to be +expected from these bloodthirsty scoundrels--I fear the chances are +small."</p> +<p>Will looked round and saw that the six cannons which the brig +carried--for vessels trading in the Eastern Archipelago are always +armed--had already been loosened ready for action; and that a group +of men were at work mounting a long gun, which had just been raised +from the hold. Knowing the number of men that the prahus carried, +Will felt that the chance of a successful resistance was +slight.</p> +<p>There were about eighteen men on deck--a number larger than the +brig would carry in other seas, but necessary in so dangerous a +trading ground as this. The prahus, however, would each carry from +eighty to one hundred men; and these, attacking at once from +opposite sides, would be likely to bear down all opposition.</p> +<p>Suddenly an idea occurred to him.</p> +<p>"Look, sir, there is a passage through the reef, there; with +plenty of water and width enough for your ship. I can take her +through. There is no other passage, for some distance. If you take +her inside, and lay her across the channel, the prahus can only +attack on one side; and you can place all your guns and strength +there."</p> +<p>The captain at once saw the advantage of this scheme.</p> +<p>"Capital!" he exclaimed. "Take the helm at once, my lad.</p> +<p>"Ease off the sheets, men."</p> +<p>They were now nearly opposite the entrance, and the light wind +was blowing towards the shore. The captain ordered all hands to +reduce sail, only keeping on enough to give the vessel steerage +way. Two boats were lowered, and an anchor and cable passed into +each and, as the brig passed through the opening, the rest of the +sail was lowered.</p> +<p>The boats rowed to the reef, one on either side. The anchors +were firmly fixed into the rock and, one being taken from the head +and the other from the stern, the crews set to work at the capstan, +and speedily had the vessel safely moored, broadside on, across the +entrance to the reef.</p> +<p>The Malay boats were now about a mile astern. They had ceased +rowing, when they saw the vessel headed for the land, supposing +that the captain was about to run on shore. When, to their +astonishment, they saw her pass the reef with safety, they again +set to at their work.</p> +<p>The guns were now all brought over to the side facing the +entrance, and were loaded to the muzzle with bullets. A number of +shots, belonging to the long gun, were placed by the bulwarks; in +readiness to hurl down into the prahus, should they get alongside. +The sailors--though determined to fight till the last--had, when +the boys came on board, been making their preparations with the +silence of despair. They were now in high spirits, for they felt +that they could beat off any attempt of the enemy to attack +them.</p> +<p>When the Malays were abreast of the ship, they ceased rowing and +drew close together, and evidently held a consultation.</p> +<p>The brig at once opened fire with her long gun, and the first +shot hulled one of the prahus, close to the water's edge.</p> +<p>"That's right, Tom," the captain said, "stick to the same craft. +If you can sink her, there is one the less."</p> +<p>Several more shots were fired, with such effect that the Malays +were observed jumping overboard in great numbers, and swimming +towards the other boats--their own being in a sinking condition. +The other four prahus at once turned their heads towards shore, and +rowed with full speed towards the ship.</p> +<p>They knew that the entrance, of whose existence they had been +previously unaware, was an exceedingly narrow one and, as they +neared the shore, could see--by the line of breaking surf--that it +could, at most, be wide enough for one to pass at a time, +Accordingly one drew ahead and, discharging the cannon which it +carried in its bow, rowed at full speed for the entrance; another +following so close behind that its bow almost touched the +stern.</p> +<p>"Train the guns to bear on the center of the channel," the +captain said. "Let the three bow guns take the first boat, the +other three the second.</p> +<p>"Do you, Tom, work away at the two behind."</p> +<p>The prahus came along at a great rate, the sweeps churning up +the water into foam. The leading boat dashed through the channel, +the sweeps grating on the rocks on either side. Her bow was but two +yards distant from the side of the ship when the captain gave the +word. The three cannon poured their contents into her, sweeping her +crowded decks and tearing out her bottom. Great as was her speed, +she sank below the water, just as her bow touched the side of the +ship.</p> +<p>Ten seconds later the command was again given; and a broadside, +as destructive, was poured into the second boat. The damage done +was somewhat less, and her bow reached the side of the ship. A +dozen Malays sprang on board, as their boat sank under their feet; +but the sailors were ready and, with musket, pistol, and cutlass +fell upon them, and either cut down or drove them overboard. The +sea around was covered with swimmers, but the ship was too high out +of the water for them to attempt to board her; and the Malays at +once struck out for the shore, the sailors keeping up the musketry +fire upon them, until out of range.</p> +<p>The other two boats had not followed. The mate had plumped a +shot from the long gun full into the bow of the first and--seeing +the destruction which had fallen upon their leaders--both turned +their heads and made for sea; the mate continuing his fire until +they were out of range, one shot carrying away the greater part of +the oars, on one side of the boat previously struck. When at a +distance of upwards of a mile they ceased rowing and, for some +time, lay close together. The men of the injured boat were observed +to be stopping the yawning hole in her bows, a few inches above the +water level; the other started off, at full speed, up the +coast.</p> +<p>It was now evening, and there was scarcely a breath of wind. The +men crowded round the lads, and thanked them warmly for having been +the means of saving them from destruction.</p> +<p>"I am afraid you are not out of danger, yet," Will said, as the +captain shook him by the hand. "No doubt that boat has gone off +with the news and, before morning, you will have half a dozen fresh +enemies coming down, inside the reef, to attack you."</p> +<p>"If we had but a breath of wind, we might do," the captain +said.</p> +<p>"I fear you will have none before morning; then it generally +blows fresh, for two or three hours. I don't know how far it is to +the village which is the headquarters of the pirates. As far as I +could make out, from the Malays with whom we have been living, it +is about six hours' walking; but the boats will row twice as fast +as a man would walk through the forest. In that case you may be +attacked at two or three o'clock in the morning, and you won't get +the breeze till after sunrise."</p> +<p>"Are there any other channels through the reef?" the captain +asked.</p> +<p>"I do not know," Will replied. "We have never explored it very +far, either way; but as I should think, from the action of the +Malays, that they did not know of this, they might not know of any +other, did it exist."</p> +<p>"Then," the captain said, "I will warp the brig out through the +channel again; and anchor her, stem and stern, across it outside. +They will find it as hard to attack us, there, as they did before. +Then, when the breeze comes, we will slip our cable and run for it. +She is a fast sailer; and can, I think, get away from the pirates, +even with their sails and oars. Besides, by shifting the long gun +and two of the others to her stern, we can give it them so hot +that, even if they are the fastest, we may sicken them."</p> +<p>"I do not know, sir," Will said. "They would be likely to hang +about you, until the breeze drops; and then to attack you on all +sides at once. If we could but keep them from coming through the +channel, in pursuit, we should be safe."</p> +<p>"Ah! But how on earth are we to do that?" the captain asked.</p> +<p>William Gale was silent for a minute or two.</p> +<p>"Have you plenty of powder on board the ship, sir?"</p> +<p>"Plenty--we use it for barter."</p> +<p>"It seems to me--" Will went on, "--that if, before sailing, you +could sink a couple of barrels of powder in the channel, with a +fuse to explode them, a few minutes after we had left; the Malays +would be so astonished, at the explosion, that they would not +venture to pass through."</p> +<p>"Your idea is a capital one," the captain said, warmly; "but how +about a fuse which would burn under water?</p> +<p>"What do you think, Tom? Could it be managed?"</p> +<p>"I should think so, sir," the mate answered. "Suppose we take +one of those empty 30-gallon beer casks, and fill that up with +powder--it will hold ten or twelve of the little barrels--and then +we might bung it up, and make a hole in its head. Over the hole we +might fix a wine bottle, with the bottom knocked out; and so +fastened, with tow and oakum, that the water won't get in. Then we +might shove down through the mouth of the bottle, and through the +hole below it into the powder, a long strip of paper dipped in +saltpetre, to make touch paper of it. I don't know as a regular +fuse would do, as it might go out for want of air; but there would +be plenty to keep touch paper alight.</p> +<p>"We could sling three or four 18-pounder shots under the bottom +of the cask, to make it sink upright. Just before we slip our +cables, we might lower it down with the boats; lighting the fuse +the last thing, and sticking in the cork. If we don't put too much +saltpetre, it might burn for some minutes before it reached the +powder."</p> +<p>"It's worth trying, at any rate," the captain said; "but I fear +it would not burn long enough. I think that, instead of a bottle, +we might jam a piece of iron tube--six or eight feet long--into the +head of the cask, and cut a bung to fit it. In that way we could +get a good length of fuse."</p> +<p>This plan was carried out. A large cask was filled with powder; +and an iron tube, three inches in diameter and six feet long, +fitted into it, and made water tight. A long strip of paper, after +being dipped in water in which gunpowder had been dissolved; was +then dried, rolled tight, and lowered down the tube, until it +touched the powder. A bung was cut to fit the top of the tube; a +piece of wash-leather being placed over it, to ensure its being +perfectly water tight. The top of the fuse was then cut level with +the pipe. Several bits of iron were lashed to the lower end of the +cask, to make it sink upright; and the cask was steadily lowered +into a boat lying alongside the ship, in readiness for use.</p> +<p>The sailors entered into the preparations with the glee of +schoolboys; but the machine was not ready until long after the ship +had been towed out again through the channel, and moored broadside +to it, just outside.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch8" id="Ch8">Chapter 8</a>: The Torpedo.</h2> +<p>It was about two o'clock in the morning when the watch awoke the +crew, with the news that they could hear the distant sound of oars +coming along the shore. All took their places, in silence. After a +time the rowing ceased, and all was quiet again. Half an hour +passed, and then there was a slight sound close alongside and, in +the channel, they could dimly make out a small boat--which was +rapidly rowed away into the darkness again, several musket shots +being fired after it.</p> +<p>"They have sent on ahead, to find if we were lying in the same +berth," the captain said. "I expect they will be puzzled when they +hear that we are outside, and that the entrance is guarded. I +should not be surprised if they did not attack before morning. They +had such a lesson, yesterday, that I don't think they will try to +force the channel in our teeth again; but will play the waiting +game, sure that they will secure us, sooner or later."</p> +<p>So it turned out. The hours passed slowly on, but no sound was +heard. Then, in the dim morning light, a pirate fleet of eight +prahus was seen, lying at a distance of half a mile within the +reef.</p> +<p>As the day broke, the breeze sprang up, the sails were hoisted, +and the captain prepared to slip his cables. A similar preparation +could, through the glasses, be observed on board the Malay +fleet.</p> +<p>"That will do very well," the captain said. "Those fellows will +be along in about eight or ten minutes after we have started; and +the fuse, according to the experiments we made as to its rate of +burning, will last about seven.</p> +<p>"Now, quick, lads, into the boat.</p> +<p>"Tom, you take charge of the sinking."</p> +<p>In another minute the boat was rowed to the channel, and the +cask lowered over the side. It was held there, for a minute, while +the mate struck a light and applied it to the touch paper. Then he +pressed the bung firmly into the top of the tube, the lashings of +the cask were cut, and the boat rowed back to the ship. The anchors +were already on board, and the brig was getting way on her as the +boat rowed alongside. The men jumped on board, and the boat was +suffered to tow behind, while all hands set the whole of the sails. +The vessel was soon running briskly before the land breeze.</p> +<p>The pirate fleet was instantly in motion. Every eye in the ship +was directed towards them.</p> +<p>"They will be there in less than ten minutes from the moment I +lowered the cask," the mate said, looking at his watch.</p> +<p>"Not much," the captain said, "they are rowing fast, now; but +the trees keep off the wind, and their sails do not help them. They +were a minute or two behind us in starting."</p> +<p>It was just eight minutes, from the time when the cask had been +lowered, that the first of the Malay boats rowed out through the +channel.</p> +<p>"I hope nothing has gone wrong," the mate growled.</p> +<p>"I am not afraid of that; though we may be wrong, a minute or +two, as to the length of the fuse."</p> +<p>Another boat followed the first. The third was in mid channel +when, suddenly, she seemed to rise bodily in the air, and then to +fall into pieces. A mighty column of water, a hundred feet high, +rose into the air; mingled with fragments of wood, and human +bodies. A deep, low report was heard; and the brig shook, as if she +had come into collision with some floating body.</p> +<p>Although they were nearly a mile away, the yell of astonishment, +and fright, of the Malays reached the ship. The prahus still inside +the reef were seen to turn round, and row away along the coast at +the top of their speed; while those which had passed the channel, +after rowing wildly for some distance, lay on their oars--the crews +apparently stupefied at what had taken place. The craft which had +been injured the day before still lay seaward, on watch; but now +turned her head, and rowed towards the shore to join her +consorts.</p> +<p>The Sea Belle left the coast. The Malays attempted no pursuit +but, so long as they could be seen, remained inactive near the +scene of the sudden and--to them--inexplicable catastrophe which +had befallen their consort.</p> +<p>Once fairly freed from all fear of pursuit, the captain invited +the two lads into his cabin; and there heard from them an account +of all the adventures through which they had passed. When they had +finished, he questioned them as to their plans.</p> +<p>Hans said that he intended to take the first ship bound for +Holland.</p> +<p>"And you?" he asked Will.</p> +<p>"I have no particular plan," Will said. "I am in no hurry to +return to England, having no relatives there. After being so long +absent--for it is now a year since I sailed from Yarmouth--I should +not care to return and take up my apprenticeship as a +fisherman."</p> +<p>"Will you ship regularly on board the Sea Belle?" the captain +asked.</p> +<p>"Thank you, sir, I think I would rather not decide upon anything +until we get to Calcutta. I have thirty pounds in money--fifteen +pounds of which were given me on board the Dutch ship, and the rest +I received as wages for the voyage from England to Java. I carried +the money in a belt round my waist, and have kept it ever since. So +I need not be in any great hurry to settle upon what I shall do; +but certainly, after a regular sea life, I should not like to go +back to being a fisherman. I am now past sixteen and, in another +three years, shall be able to earn more wages.</p> +<p>"I should have taken you for at least two years older," the +captain said; "you are as big and strong as many lads of +eighteen."</p> +<p>"I have done a good lot of hard work, in the last two years," +Will said; "for on board the Dutch ship--although, of course, I was +only rated as a boy--I used to do man's work, aloft."</p> +<p>Other people would have been deceived, as well as the captain. +Hard work and exposure to the air had done much to age the boy. He +had been tall and slight for his age when he left the workhouse +and, while he had not ceased growing in height, he had widened out +considerably and, had he asserted himself to be eighteen years of +age, few would have questioned the statement.</p> +<p>The Sea Belle for some time kept south, touching at some of the +islands where a trade was done with the Papuans; then her head was +turned north and, after an eventful voyage, she reached Calcutta, +where the captain had been ordered to fill up with cotton, or +grain, for England. The captain at once landed, and proceeded to +the office of the agent of the firm who owned the Sea Belle. He was +shown into that gentleman's private room where, at the time, two +gentlemen were seated, chatting. The agent was personally +acquainted with the captain, and asked him to sit down and smoke a +cigar.</p> +<p>"This is Captain Mayhew, of the Sea Belle," he said to his +friends. "He has been trading, for the last three months, down +among the islands.</p> +<p>"These gentlemen, Captain Mayhew, are Major Harrison and Captain +Edwards, who have just arrived from China, with their regiment, in +the Euphrates.</p> +<p>"Has your voyage been a pleasant one, captain?"</p> +<p>"Pleasant enough, sir, on the whole; but we were attacked by the +Malay pirates, and I should certainly not be here to tell the tale, +at present, had it not been for the quickness and shrewdness of a +lad, who had been shipwrecked on the coast."</p> +<p>"How is that, Mayhew? Tell us all about it."</p> +<p>Captain Mayhew related the whole story of the fight with the +pirates; saying that, unquestionably, had it not been for Will's +pointing out the passage through the reef, in the first place, and +his idea of burying a submarine mine, in the second, the Sea Belle +would have fallen into the hands of the pirates.</p> +<p>"But where did the boy spring from? How on earth came he to be +there?"</p> +<p>Captain Mayhew then related the story of William Gale's +adventures, as he had them from his own lips.</p> +<p>"He must be a cool and plucky young fellow, indeed," Major +Harrison exclaimed. "I should like to see him.</p> +<p>"What style and type is he, captain? A rough sort of chap?"</p> +<p>"By no means," the captain answered. "He is surprisingly well +mannered. Had I met him elsewhere, and in gentleman's clothes, I do +not think that I should have suspected that he was not what he +appeared. His features, too, somehow or other, strike one as being +those of a gentleman; which is all the more singular when, as a +fact, he told me he had been brought up in a workhouse.</p> +<p>"In a workhouse!" Major Harrison repeated. "Then I suppose his +parents were farm laborers."</p> +<p>"No," the captain answered; "he was left at the door, on a +stormy night, by a tramp who was found drowned, next morning, in a +ditch near. He had, when found, a gold trinket of some kind round +his neck; and he tells me that, from that and other circumstances, +it was generally supposed by the workhouse authorities that he did +not belong to the tramp, but that he had been stolen by her; and +that he belonged, at least, to a respectable family."</p> +<p>"All this is very interesting," Captain Edwards said. "I should +like much to see the boy. Will you come and dine with us this +evening on board the Euphrates--Mr. Reynolds, here, is coming--and +have the boy sent on board--say, at nine o'clock--when we can have +him in, and have a chat with him?"</p> +<p>Captain Mayhew readily agreed. William was even then waiting +outside for him, having landed with him; and the captain, when he +entered the office, had told him to walk about for an hour and +amuse himself with the sights of Calcutta, and then return and wait +for him. He said nothing about his being close at hand, as he did +not wish the officers to see him in the rough outfit which had been +furnished him on board ship; intending to surprise them by his +appearance in decent clothes. Accordingly, on leaving Mr. Reynolds' +office he took him to one of the numerous shops, in the town, where +clothes of any kind can be procured.</p> +<p>"Now, Will," he said, "I want you to get a suit of shore-going +clothes. You can get your sea outfit tomorrow, at your leisure; but +I want you to show up well at the mess, this evening, and a suit of +good clothes will always be useful to you."</p> +<p>Captain Mayhew had intended to pay for the outfit, himself, but +this Will would not hear of; and Captain Mayhew was the less +reluctant to let the lad have his own way as he had, in the course +of the interview with the agent, agreed that the lad's services +deserved a handsome recognition from the firm; and that the sum of +one hundred guineas should be given to him, at once. The agent +felt, no doubt, that the firm would thoroughly approve of the +payment. Twenty pounds were to be given to Hans, for his share of +the services; but the two suggestions which had saved the Sea Belle +had both originated with Will.</p> +<p>By Captain Mayhew's advice, Will purchased a suit of +dark-colored tweed, a black tie, and some white shirts and collars. +At other shops, he bought some boots and a Panama straw hat. Having +completed their purchases, they walked for some hours about +Calcutta; Will being delighted with the variety of the native +costumes, and the newness and singularity of everything which met +his eye.</p> +<p>On their return to the ghaut--as the landing stage is +called--they found their various purchases already stowed in the +Sea Belle's boat; which had, about an hour before, come to shore to +fetch them off. At seven o'clock Captain Mayhew went off to the +Euphrates, leaving orders that the boat was to bring Will over, at +nine. At that hour the lad was dressed in his new clothes which, +fortunately, fitted him well.</p> +<p>"By jingo, Will," the first mate said, as he entered the cabin, +"you look a tip-topper, and no mistake."</p> +<p>The mate was right. The lad, with his sunburnt face, quiet +manner, and easy carriage, looked thoroughly at home in his +attire.</p> +<p>"I don't know who your parents were, but I would bet a month's +pay that the old tramp you were telling us of had nothing to do +with it; for you look every inch a gentleman, from head to +foot."</p> +<p>Will found, on gaining the deck of the Euphrates, that orders +had been left by the officer in command that he was to be shown +into the saloon cabin upon his giving his name to the sergeant, who +came up at the sentry's call. He was at once conducted below. For a +moment he felt almost bewildered as he entered; the size of the +cabin, the handsomeness of its fittings, the well-laid table decked +with fragrant flowers, so far surpassed anything he had ever seen, +or thought of.</p> +<p>He was conducted to the head of the table, where Major Harrison, +with Mr. Reynolds on one hand and Captain Mayhew on the other, sat +near the colonel commanding the regiment. Captain Mayhew, who had +already told the outline of the story, smiled quietly to himself at +the expression of surprise which crossed the faces of the major and +Mr. Reynolds, as well as of the other officers sitting near, at the +appearance of the lad he introduced to them. The colonel ordered a +chair to be placed next to himself, and told the servant to fill a +glass of wine for Will, and entered into conversation with him.</p> +<p>"I think, gentlemen," he said, after a minute or two, seeing +that the lad did not touch the wine that was poured out for him, +"it will be pleasanter on deck; for it is terribly hot here, and I +see that most of you have finished your wine."</p> +<p>An adjournment was at once made, to the deck. Here cigars were +lighted and, the colonel and senior officers taking their places in +some of the easy chairs--which were still all out--the rest +gathered round to hear the story, which Major Harrison had promised +them would be an interesting one.</p> +<p>Captain Mayhew first gave his account of the fight between the +Sea Belle and the pirates, beginning at the point when, as he was +hotly chased and despairing of making a successful defense, the +canoe with the two lads in it came out to him. Then Will was called +upon to explain how he came to be there, at that moment. He told +briefly how the fishing smack was sunk, how he had saved himself by +clinging to the bob stay of the Dutch Indianan, and how he had +sailed in this vessel to Java; and was on his way in her to China, +when wrecked in the cyclone.</p> +<p>Here his audience insisted upon his giving them full details; +and he accordingly told them the manner in which he and a few of +the crew had escaped; how, when they were building a boat, they had +been attacked by Malays, and all--except another lad and himself, +who were hiding in a tree--were massacred by the pirates; how they +had gone inland to a village where, having aided the natives when +attacked by a hostile tribe, they had been most kindly received; +how they had finally obtained a canoe, and spent their time in +fishing, in hopes of seeing a passing sail; until the Sea Belle, +chased by the Malay pirates, had appeared off the shore.</p> +<p>There was a genuine murmur of approval, from those thickly +clustered round, as the lad finished his story; and the colonel +warmly expressed his approval of his conduct, under such exciting +circumstances.</p> +<p>"What are you going to do, now?" he asked.</p> +<p>"I have not made up my mind, sir," the lad said. "I expect that +I shall ship in some vessel sailing for England, shortly."</p> +<p>"Major Harrison," the colonel said, "will you and Captain Mayhew +come with me to my cabin?</p> +<p>"I should like to have a few minutes' private chat with you," he +went on, putting his hand on Will's shoulder.</p> +<p>A minute or two later, the three gentlemen and Will were seated +in the private cabin.</p> +<p>"Look here, my boy," the colonel said; "I have heard, from Major +Harrison, what you had told Captain Mayhew concerning your birth +and, certainly, your appearance and manner go far to sustain the +belief that the tramp who left you was not your mother, and that +your parents were of gentle birth. I do not say that a man's birth +makes much difference to him; still, it does go for something and, +in nine cases out of ten, the difference both in face and figure is +unmistakable. Unless I am very wrong, your father was a +gentleman.</p> +<p>"However, that is not to the point: it is your quickness and +activity, your coolness in danger, and the adventures which you +have gone through which interest us in you. Now I think it is a +pity that a lad, who has shown that there is so much in him, should +remain a sailor before the mast. You have not been so long at sea +as to become wedded to it, and to be unable to turn your hands to +anything else.</p> +<p>"Now, what do you say to enlisting? In the ranks are men of all +sorts--gentlemen, honest men, and blackguards. The steady, +respectable man is sure to rise. You can, the captain tells me, +read and write well. There is a chance of active service, at +present; and when there is active service, a man who distinguishes +himself gets rapid promotion. The regiment land, tomorrow; and go +straight through, by train, to the North. There is trouble in +Afghanistan; and an ultimatum has just been sent, to the Ameer, +that if he does not comply with our terms it will be war; and we +hope to be there in time for the beginning of it. I can only say +that, if you like to join, Major Harrison and myself will keep our +eyes upon you and, if you deserve it, you may be sure of rapid +promotion. You have greatly interested me in your story, and I +should be very glad to give a helping hand to so deserving a young +fellow.</p> +<p>"It is not usual, certainly, for a regiment to take recruits in +India; but I don't suppose that there can be any objection to +it."</p> +<p>"Thank you very much," Will said, when the colonel ceased. "I am +greatly obliged to you for your kindness. I have never thought +about the army, but I am sure that I cannot possibly do better than +accept your kind offer.</p> +<p>"The only thing, sir, is about my age.</p> +<p>"Tut, tut!" the colonel interrupted, "I don't want to know +anything about your age. When you go up for attestment, you will +say that you are under nineteen, which will be strictly true. I +will give a hint, and no further questions will be asked. Neither I +nor anyone else know that you are not past eighteen and, in time of +war, no one is particular as to the age of recruits, as long as +they are fit to do their duty.</p> +<p>"You must work hard, to pick up enough knowledge of drill to +enable you to take your place in the ranks. There is neither parade +work, nor difficult maneuvering, in the face of an enemy; and you +can finish up, afterwards.</p> +<p>"Are you quite agreed?"</p> +<p>"Quite, sir," Will said, joyously, "and am, indeed, obliged to +you."</p> +<p>"Come on board, then, tomorrow at eight o'clock, and ask for +Sergeant Ringwood."</p> +<p>William Gale left the cabin with a new prospect of life before +him. He had, of late, rather shrunk from the thought of again +taking his place as a ship boy; and the prospect of adventures--to +say nothing of the advancement which might befall him, through the +interest taken in him by the colonel--was delightful to him.</p> +<p>The last words the colonel had said when he left the cabin +were:</p> +<p>"Say nothing about the workhouse, and as little as possible of +anything which happened before you were wrecked on the island, in +the barrack room."</p> +<p>When William and Captain Mayhew had left the cabin, Colonel +Shepherd sent for Sergeant Ringwood.</p> +<p>"Sergeant," he said, "a young fellow will come on board, +tomorrow at eight o'clock, to join the regiment as a recruit. Take +him at once to the surgeon, and get him passed. I know we shall be +able to give him but little drill, before we get to the frontier; +but do all you can for him, and I will make it up to you. He is a +smart young fellow, and I have a good deal of interest in him.</p> +<p>"He was on his way to China, and was wrecked among the Malays, +and has gone through a good deal. Finding himself here with nothing +to do, and with a prospect of active service on the frontier, he +has decided to enlist and, as he is a gallant young fellow, I do +not wish to balk his fancy."</p> +<p>The sergeant saluted and took his leave, impressed with the +idea--although the colonel had not said so--that the new recruit +was a young gentleman, who had joined the service simply for the +sake of taking part in the war.</p> +<p>The next morning Will took leave of his friend Hans; who had, +the previous day, shipped on board a Dutch ship, homeward bound; +and who was, a few hours later, to shift his berth to her, after he +had been on shore to fit himself out in clothes. Hans was much +affected at saying goodbye to his companion, and the two promised +to correspond with each other.</p> +<p>On bidding farewell to his friend the captain of the Sea Belle, +the latter informed Will that Mr. Reynolds had, on behalf of the +owners of the Sea Belle, paid 100 pounds to his account into the +Bank of Hindustan; and that this, or any portion of it, would be +paid to his order; as the captain had furnished the agent with a +slip of paper upon which Will had, at his request, signed his name. +This had, with the money, been deposited at the bank; so that his +signature might be recognized, and honored.</p> +<p>On reaching the Euphrates, Will was at once taken charge of by +Sergeant Ringwood; who took him before the doctor, to whom the +colonel had already spoken. The medical examination was +satisfactory, the doctor remarking:</p> +<p>"You are rather slight yet, but you will fill out, in time."</p> +<p>The age was asked, and given as under nineteen; and eighteen was +inscribed against him, in the books. Then he was taken before the +colonel, and attested; and was, from that moment, a member of the +regiment. A uniform was served out to him, and the usual articles +of kit. The sergeant saw that his belts were put on properly, and +his knapsack packed; and half an hour afterwards he fell in, with +his musket on his shoulder, among the troops paraded on the deck of +the Euphrates, prior to embarkation.</p> +<p>So quickly had it all been managed that Will could hardly +believe that he was awake as, feeling strangely hampered by his +belts and accouterments, he descended the accommodation ladder, and +took his place with his new comrades on board one of the great +native boats, and rowed to the shore. The regiment was marched +direct to the railway station, where the heavy baggage had been +sent, on the previous day. The men took their places in the long +train which stood in readiness and, half an hour later, steamed +north from Calcutta.</p> +<p>Hitherto, none of his comrades had spoken to Will. In the bustle +of landing, all had enough to do to look to themselves; and it was +not until he found himself, with eight comrades and a corporal, in +the railway carriage that he was addressed.</p> +<p>"Well, young 'un," one said, "what's yer name, and where do you +come from? Calcutta isn't much of a place for recruiting."</p> +<p>"I was on my way to China," Will replied, "and got wrecked among +the Malays; then I got picked up by a vessel, and we had some hot +fighting. Then I was landed at Calcutta and, seeing nothing much to +do, and hearing that there was a chance of a fight with the +Afghans, I thought the best thing to do was to enlist.</p> +<p>"My name is William Gale."</p> +<p>"I wasn't quite sure that you were an Englishman. You are pretty +nigh as dark as them copper-colored niggers here."</p> +<p>"So would you be," Will laughed, "if you had been living, as I +have, for ten months among savages, without even a shirt to your +back."</p> +<p>"Tell us all about it," the soldier said.</p> +<p>"This is a bit of luck, mates, our having someone who can tell +us a tale, when we have got such a long journey before us."</p> +<p>Will made his story as full as he could, and it lasted a long +time. When it was finished, the men expressed their opinion that he +was a good sort and, Will having handed over to the corporal a +sovereign--to be expended on drinks by the way, as his footing in +the regiment--he became quite a popular character, and soon felt at +home in his new position.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch9" id="Ch9">Chapter 9</a>: The Advance Into +Afghanistan.</h2> +<p>There was but little talking in the middle of the day, in the +train, for the heat was excessive. All the men had taken off their +coats, and sat in their shirt sleeves. But they were, nevertheless, +bathed in perspiration.</p> +<p>Late at night, the train arrived at Allahabad. Here there was a +stop, till morning. The men alighted from the train; and lay down +on their folded blankets, with their knapsacks for pillows, on the +platform or in the waiting rooms. A plentiful supply of water had +been prepared for their use, at the station; and outside were +several water carriers; and many of the men stripped off their +shirts, and had water poured over their heads and bodies. Will Gale +was among these and, greatly refreshed, he enjoyed some fruit and +cakes which he purchased from native vendors; and then, lying down +on a bench in the station, was soon asleep.</p> +<p>Four days' traveling brought them to the end of the railway. +They were ferried across the Attock, and then their real work +began. Although it was now late in September, the heat was still +intense. Tents were struck an hour before daybreak and, by eleven +o'clock each day, the column was at its halting place. It was, +however, hours before the tents and baggage arrived.</p> +<p>Many of the draft cattle were very poor, forage was scarce, and +the arrangements far from good. The consequence was that great +numbers of the oxen broke down and died, and many of the troops +were often obliged to sleep in the air, owing to the non-arrival of +their tents. The defects of the transport were aggravated, as the +time went on; and the Norfolk Rangers fared much better than some +of the troops which followed them.</p> +<p>The regiment was destined to operate in the Khuram valley, under +the command of General Roberts. The advanced column of this +division consisted of the 7th company of Bengal Sappers, the 23rd +Bengal Pioneers; a battery of horse artillery, one of Royal +Artillery, and two mountain batteries; a squadron of the 10th +Hussars, and the 12th Bengal Cavalry. The first brigade of infantry +comprised the 2nd battalion of the 8th Foot, the 29th Bengal Native +Infantry, and the 5th Punjaub Infantry. The second brigade +consisted of the 72nd Highlanders, the 21st Native Infantry, the +2nd Punjaub Infantry, and the 5th Ghoorkas. The place of assembly +was Kohat. The Norfolk Rangers were to act as a reserve.</p> +<p>It was on the 2nd of October that the Rangers arrived at Kohat, +heartily glad that their march across the sandy plains of the +Punjaub was at an end. The other regiments comprising the force +poured in rapidly and, on the 9th, the general arrived and assumed +the command. The next day the Punjaub regiments were sent forward +to Thull. It was not until the middle of November that the European +regiments followed them; and the six weeks were, by the Rangers, +for the most part employed in drill for, after their voyage and +journey up the country, their commanding officer considered it +necessary to work them hard, to get them to the highest state of +discipline.</p> +<p>William Gale was worked exceptionally hard; as he had, in that +short time, to learn the manual and platoon exercises, and to pick +up enough of drill to enable him to take his place in the ranks. +Fortunately he carried himself well, and required far less drilling +than the majority of the recruits. By the time that the regiment +moved forward, he was able to take his place in his company; and +had mastered all the movements which were likely to be necessary, +in the campaign.</p> +<p>The road between Kohat and Thull runs in a valley between +mountains, those on the right being inhabited by the Waziries, a +fierce and independent tribe. The regiment which had first marched +had exercised every precaution against an attack. The convoys of +stores and provisions sent forward had always been accompanied by +strong escorts, and orders were issued that officers going forward +on duty should not travel without protection. The Waziries, +however--contrary to expectation--remained quiet; probably waiting +to see the turn which matters took for, had we suffered a repulse, +they would assuredly have taken part, at once, against us; and +would have aided in massacring fugitives, and robbing baggage +wagons.</p> +<p>The march to Thull occupied five days, which were very pleasant +ones to William Gale. His heavy work at drill was now over. He was +no longer considered a recruit, but ranked as a soldier. The +marches were not long and, for many hours in the afternoon, the +high hills threw the valley in shade; and the soldiers, after +pitching their tents, were able to stroll about, or to lie under +the trees in which the valley abounded. The regiment reached Thull +on the 18th of November and, on the morning of the 21st, the column +advanced.</p> +<p>The river, whose bed was 500 yards wide, was fortunately now +low, being reduced to a stream of 40 yards wide by 3 deep. A +trestle bridge had been thrown across it, for the use of the +infantry. The river was distant a mile and a half from the town. No +opposition was expected but, as a small Afghan garrison was +stationed in a fort at Kapizang, a short distance beyond the river, +an attempt was to be made to capture it.</p> +<p>The 29th Punjaub Infantry first crossed the river, at the +bridge. The 10th Hussars forded the river and extended, in +skirmishing order, to cut off the retreat of the garrison. When +they reached the fort, however--which was a square enclosure, with +round towers at the corners--it was found that the garrison, who +had doubtless received warning from spies in Thull, had abandoned +the place in the night.</p> +<p>The cavalry were now sent forward to reconnoiter, the infantry +following; and the advanced force halted at Ahmed-I-shama for the +night. Not a single habitation was passed, during the nine miles +march. The road was generally a mere track, 6 feet wide; passing +through tangled brakes of dwarf palms, intersected by stony +gullies, except when it ran along the steep bank of the river.</p> +<p>The following day the rest of the first brigade marched up to +Ahmed-I-shama; while the advanced force, under Colonel Gordon, +moved on to Hazir-pir. The Rangers were with the first brigade, but +not with the advanced party. This was composed wholly of native +troops, consisting of the Pioneer regiments and the Sappers and +Miners. These had hard work, for the road--which was fifteen miles +in length--was scarcely passable for wheeled carriages, and the +guns could not be taken along until the boulders and blocks of +stone, which strewed the way, were removed or blasted into +pieces.</p> +<p>On the 23rd the Rangers, with the Horse Artillery battery and +two native regiments, marched towards Hazir-pir; but the +difficulties of the road were so great that they had to camp, for +the night, four miles short of that place. General Roberts and the +headquarters went forward the same day.</p> +<p>As the general passed along the road, the headmen of all the +villages near came and paid their respects; and the villagers lined +the roads as the troops passed, offering fowls, eggs, milk, and +dried fruit for sale. As William Gale had brought a supply of money +with him, he was able to indulge in all those luxuries and, indeed, +as the men had had few opportunities of spending money at Thull, +all were well supplied with cash.</p> +<p>The halt at Hazir-pir was, then, a very pleasant one. Supplies +of grass, fuel, and provisions were brought in, in considerable +quantities, there; but much difficulty arose in settling the terms +of purchase, as coin was almost unknown in the valley and, +therefore, there was no established price--one native being ready +to sell, for a few coppers, articles for which another demanded as +many pieces of silver. On the hills around a considerable number of +sheep were seen grazing; but the natives did not care about selling +these which, indeed, belonged for the most part, not to the +Turis--the tribe which inhabit the valley--but to nomad Ghilzais +who, like the Swiss shepherds, move about with their charges among +the mountains, wherever fodder is to be obtained.</p> +<p>Khuram valley, itself, is bare and monotonous. With the +exception of fruit trees planted round the villages, scarce a tree +is to be found; but each village is marked by a huge chunar--or +oriental plane--beneath which the villagers rest during the noonday +heat.</p> +<p>But if the valley itself was bare and desolate, the scenery +around was lovely. The great range of mountains known as the +Safaid-Koh bound the valley on the east and north. This range +averages 14,000 feet high, from which spurs run out at right +angles, enclosing narrower valleys, with broiling torrents rushing +through boulders. The slopes of these valleys are covered with +luxuriant vegetation, till the limit of trees is reached at a +height of about 11,000 feet; above which, in winter, the snow lies +thick while, in summer, it furnishes the finest pasture to the +Ghilzai flocks and herds. The valley lands and the lower slopes of +the hills are laid out in terraces, and irrigated rice fields +extend near the rivers. Valley and hill are alike covered with +stones and boulders, Afghanistan being probably the most stony +country in the world.</p> +<p>On the 24th the headquarters, with the cavalry and two +regiments, moved forward ten miles and encamped at the south end of +the Darwazi Pass--the road leading to open, broad valleys, covered +with dwarf palms, and wholly uncultivated. On the 25th the advanced +force crossed the pass, which was a gentle slope and offered no +great difficulty and, at night, encamped at the Khuram fort, which +had been evacuated by the enemy. The buildings--which would have +been useful for the troops--had, however, been wrecked by the +Turis; who have a deadly hate for the Afghans--their masters--and +who were also animated in their work of destruction by a desire to +obtain wood, which is exceedingly scarce there.</p> +<p>At Khuram there are two forts, the one 120 yards and the other +100 yards square. Inside these were quarters for the governor, and +huts for the garrison and officers; and in the smaller forts were +stables for the cavalry forces. This place was made the +headquarters of the forces in the Khuram valley.</p> +<p>The general now rode on, with two squadrons of the 12th Bengal +Cavalry, to reconnoiter in the direction of the Peiwar-Khotal; +towards which the enemy were supposed to be retreating, and where +they were expected to make a stand. As they approached the village +of Peiwar, two villages were seen in flames; and news was brought +in that three Afghan regiments, with twelve guns, had lately passed +through. The natives reported that they were encumbered by their +guns, and that forced labor was procured for the purpose of +removing them. Later on, a rumor came that the twelve guns were +stuck in the ravine at the foot of the Khotal, or pass.</p> +<p>With but a small force of cavalry at his command, the general +could do nothing; and so returned to Khuram, and determined to +hurry up the troops faster than he had intended, so as to capture +the guns reported--as was afterwards proved, falsely--to have been +left behind by the Afghans. The sick and all superfluous baggage +were left behind at Khuram and, on the 28th, the troops moved at +daybreak; the two brigades marching in parallel columns.</p> +<p>The cold was now severe at night, although it was hot in the +daytime. It had been intended to halt at Halid-Kitta, four miles +from the Khotal; but the intelligence arriving--that the Ameer's +troops had abandoned their guns, and were in disorderly +retreat--decided the general to push forward at once to the +Peiwar-Khotal--seven miles further--instead of waiting, and giving +the enemy time to strengthen their position. A mile from the foot +of the actual ascent of the Khotal lies the village of Turrai, two +miles and a half beyond Peiwar. Turrai is situated in a valley, the +ground at whose entrance is very much broken up by the shoulders +and spurs of the hill.</p> +<p>The left column--the 5th and 29th Punjaub in advance, with the +2nd battalion of the 8th and the 23rd Pioneers, the Rangers, and +two guns of the Number 1 mountain battery in support--were sent to +the left, with instructions to turn a ridge forming the south +boundary of the valley, and to seize the village of Turrai. They +were also to follow up, closely, any body of retreating Afghan +troops that they might come across. The light brigade were to march +up the regular road to the Peiwar, thus supporting the attack of +the left brigade.</p> +<p>The left brigade followed out its orders, except that the +regiment in support did not go round the southern side of the spur, +but kept to the north. No enemy was seen on the south side of the +spur so, when a track leading across to Turrai was reached, the +troops moved down towards the village; the regiments in support +advancing at the foot of the open, on the north side. The mountain +path that the advanced troops were now filing down did not lead +directly to the village, but fell into the valley ahead of it, at a +point where it widens out into what was known as the "punch bowl +valley," at the foot of the Peiwar-Khotal.</p> +<p>As soon as the head of the column reached this spot, they came +in sight of the Afghans; who showed themselves in great numbers on +the crest of the mountain, far above their heads. As the troops had +no orders to attack so formidable a position, they fell back +towards Turrai, which was about a quarter of a mile to the rear. At +the sight of this movement, the Afghans swarmed down a spur of the +hill, and commenced an attack on the regiments that were moving +towards the village. The 29th Punjaubees climbed the hill and a +sharp skirmish ensued, the two mounted guns coming into action.</p> +<p>While this was going on, the main body of the troops arrived at +Turrai. The advanced troops were recalled, and the 5th Ghoorkas +were advanced to cover the movement. As it was now seen that the +story of the abandonment of the guns was false, orders were given +to pile arms in the village, and to encamp there.</p> +<p>This step was an imprudent one, as the Afghans speedily showed. +While our men were sitting or lying upon the ground, waiting for +the baggage to arrive, the Afghans brought up a mountain gun from +the main ridge--about three-quarters of a mile distant--to the +point of the spur overlooking the village of Turrai, and opened +fire at 1700 yards range.</p> +<p>The astonishment of the troops, when the first shell fell among +them, was great. Every one jumped to his feet, and seized his rifle; +and the guns of the Royal Horse Artillery were brought at once into +action. It was four o'clock in the afternoon when the Afghans +opened fire. Had they waited for a few hours, brought up another +gun or two, and made a night attack immediately after opening fire, +it is morally certain that the imprudence of camping in such a +position would have been punished by a disaster, which might have +vied with that of Isandula. Huddled together in a small village +surrounded by scrub; and impeded, as the troops would have been, by +the baggage animals and native followers, rushing in terror in all +directions, our men would have been taken at an immense +disadvantage.</p> +<p>Fortunate was it that the enemy opened fire before the darkness +set in. The troops were at once ordered to fall back a mile and a +half, and to pitch on fresh ground. There was much confusion in the +retreat, as the road in the rear was crowded with the baggage +animals. The spot chosen for the camp was a rough one; for the +ground was covered with scrub, and a scattered growth of hill oak +and thorny bushes, and was broken by the remains of some ancient +terraces but, as the jungle and broken ground extended for three +and a half miles, there was nothing for it but to take up the best +position possible, under the circumstances. The troops bivouacked +on the ridge of a ravine, with steep banks; which formed a line of +defense in front of the camp, while the view in every other +direction was obscured by trees.</p> +<p>The regiments passed a wretched night on the rough ground. Most +of them were unable to find their baggage, which was wandering in +the scrub in the dark; and the greater part of the troops lay down +on the bare ground, and went supperless to sleep, after their +fatiguing march of twenty-one miles.</p> +<p>In the morning, both men and cattle were greatly exhausted by +their long marches and almost sleepless nights; and General Roberts +determined to wait, for a day or two, to reconnoiter the formidable +position of the enemy before undertaking its attack. The camp was +shifted to a more secure site, the brushwood and trees were cleared +away, the tents pitched, and the troops were again comfortable.</p> +<p>A reconnaissance was made by Colonel Perkins--commanding the +Royal Engineers--with two companies of the Pioneers. He ascertained +that a deep ravine lay between the ridge on which they were +encamped and the Khotal itself, and that it was impossible to +direct an attack on that side.</p> +<p>Major Collett also, with two companies of the 23rd, proceeded to +reconnoiter the route known as the Spingawi--or Cow--Pass. This, +instead of going straight up the hill in front, wound round its +foot to the right of the valley. Ascending the mountain at a point +some three or four miles to the east of the Peiwar-Khotal, the +reconnaissance reached the summit of a ridge about five miles +distant from the camp, and overlooking the Spingawi-Khotal. It was +ascertained that the road up the pass seemed easy and practicable, +for all arms; that the top of the pass appeared to be on the same +ridge as the Peiwar-Khotal; and that a force, working from it +towards the Peiwar, would pass over a series of dominating +positions. It did not appear to Major Collett that the enemy held +the Peiwar-Khotal in force; although there was a gun on a +commanding knoll on the south, and there seemed to be one at the +top of the pass. The road from the village of Peiwar to the top of +the Spingawi Pass seemed perfectly easy, for troops of all +arms.</p> +<p>The next two days were spent in clearing the camp and, so far as +possible, improving its military position; but it was still +surrounded by thick oak jungle, which would have afforded cover for +an enemy making a sudden attack.</p> +<p>A further reconnaissance was made of the Spingawi Pass and, as +the examination confirmed Major Collett's report, it was determined +to attack by it. Orders were issued, on the 1st of December, for a +march that night. The regiments which were to form the main attack, +by the Spingawi plateau route, were the 29th Punjaub Infantry and +the 5th Ghoorkas--commanded by Colonel Gordon--in advance; these +were to be followed by the mountain battery, a wing of the 72nd +Highlanders, a company of the Rangers, the 2nd Punjaubees, and the +23rd Pioneers, under Brigadier General Thelwall. Four guns, on +elephants, were to proceed with the column. The 5th Punjaub +Infantry, the 8th Regiment, two guns Royal Horse Artillery, three +guns Royal Artillery, and the 5th Bengal Cavalry--the whole under +the command of Brigadier General Cobbe--were to make an attack on +the Peiwar-Khotal direct.</p> +<p>The rest of the force was to remain to guard the camp and--in +order to convince the enemy that a front attack upon the +Peiwar-Khotal was intended--a party of pioneers, with an engineer +officer and a covering party of the 8th Regiment, were to construct +a battery near the village of Turrai. Frequent reconnoitering +parties had also been sent out in this direction and, so well was +the secret of the general's intention to attack by the Spingawi +Khotal kept, that everyone in camp who had not been let into the +secret was confident that the Peiwar-Khotal would be stormed, on +the morrow.</p> +<p>The enemy--although those in camp were ignorant of the +fact--were reinforced, on the 1st, by four regiments of infantry, +with a mountain battery and, on their side, were meditating an +attack upon the British camp. The regiments which had freshly +arrived were, however, fatigued by their long march; and the +assault on our camp was postponed until the next day, and the +chance of its coming off was, therefore, lost for ever.</p> +<p>To William Gale's great satisfaction, a company of the +Rangers--that to which he had been posted--was the one selected by +the colonel to accompany the column marching up the pass. He did +not, indeed, know that this was the route by which they were to +advance; but he was pleased at not being left behind, with the +regiment, in charge of the camp.</p> +<p>"Well, young 'un," a corporal said to him, that evening, "we are +going to be under fire, at last; and a nice climb we shall have of +it. It puts one out of breath, to look at that steep road running +up the hill and, when it comes to fighting one's way up it, with +cannon and Afghans on the top, we shall find it hard work."</p> +<p>"I expect," William answered, "that we sha'n't go up it at any +extraordinary pace. If we skirmish up--as I expect we shall--from +rock to rock, we shall have plenty of time to get our wind, at each +halt. We are not to take our knapsacks; so we shall fight light, +and we have not much extra weight to carry. What with the heat, and +what with the long marches, I should think I must have lost a stone +in weight, since we landed in Calcutta."</p> +<p>"I don't think you have lost weight at all," the corporal said; +"it seems to me that you have grown and widened out, in the two +months and, only yesterday, when I was sizing the company, I had to +move you two men higher; for a young 'un, you stand the fatigues +well."</p> +<p>"I am all right," Will said, "except that I have got some +frightful blisters on my feet. I was not going to say anything +about it, because I should have been kept in hospital, and left +behind at Khuram; but I have hardly known how to march, the last +few days. I don't think I could possibly have managed it, if I had +not adopted the native dodge of wearing putties--which I have +greased well on the inside, and wear instead of stockings."</p> +<p>Putties, it may be said, are slips of woolen cloth, about two +and a half yards long and three inches wide, with a tape sewn into +one end. They are wound round and round the leg, from the ankle to +below the knee, and secured by the end being tied with the tape. +Nearly every one, officers and men, wore them through the campaign. +For a long march there could be no doubt that these bandages--wound +round the foot instead of stockings--are very preferable, as they +obviate the liability to foot sores. Even with well-made boots all +pedestrians may, at times, suffer from sore feet; but the liability +is immensely increased when--as in the case of the British +soldier--the boots are coarse, roughly sewn, and frequently ill +fitted.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch10" id="Ch10">Chapter 10</a>: The +Peiwar-Khotal.</h2> +<p>At ten o'clock at night, on the 1st of December, the troops +detailed for the attack mustered in the camp. The assembly took +place without sound of bugle, and even the necessary words of +command were given in a low tone. Through the still night air the +Afghans on the hills, little more than two miles away, would have +heard the stir. It was a very dark night, although the stars shone +clear.</p> +<p>"Where can we be going?" William Gale asked the soldier next to +him. "We are going right away from the pass, instead of towards +it."</p> +<p>"So we are!" the soldier replied. "I am blest if I know what we +are up to, and it's so precious dark that I can scarcely see the +file before me. I hope we ain't going to fight in the dark, anyhow. +What would be the good of being a marksman, when you cannot see the +end of your own rifle, let alone the man you are firing at?"</p> +<p>"Oh! We can't be going to attack in the dark," Will said. "I +expect we have got a long march before us; and are going to work +round, somehow, and take them in rear."</p> +<p>"Well, I hope whoever is acting as guide can see better in the +darkness than I can; else we are safe to lose our way, and may find +ourselves anywhere, in the morning.</p> +<p>"Confound it!" The exclamation was elicited by the speaker +stumbling over a boulder, and nearly going on to his head.</p> +<p>"Silence in the ranks, there!" an officer said, close by.</p> +<p>Each regiment was followed by its ammunition mules, and hospital +doolies--the latter being covered stretchers, or palkies, carried +by natives. Besides these were dandies--or chairs--slung upon +mules. This greatly added to the difficulty of a night march for, +even in the daytime, the presence of baggage animals in a column, +upon a narrow road, greatly hinders the troops and, at night, the +delays occasioned by them are naturally very much greater.</p> +<p>For the first three and a half miles the column marched away +from the enemy upon the Khotal, and the surprise of the soldiers +increased at every step they took. At the end of that time they +arrived at the village of Peiwar. Here they turned to the left and, +after crossing several ravines, and stony water courses, arrived on +a cultivated terrace; and kept along this till they reached a very +stiff nullah, twenty feet deep.</p> +<p>The night was bitterly cold, the bank of the nullah was +extremely slippery, and the boulders in the water course below +coated with ice. The difficulty of getting the loaded animals +across, in the darkness, was therefore very great. The passage of +the various water courses caused great delays; and it was difficult +to keep the column together, in the dark. At each passage, the rear +was immensely delayed while the leading troops were passing; and +these again had to be halted, while those behind them struggled +over the difficulties. The men suffered much from cold, as the pace +was so slow that they could not warm themselves; and the mounted +officers specially suffered, in their hands and feet.</p> +<p>At midnight the ravine leading up to the Spingawi Pass was +reached; but so dark was it that the 2nd Punjaubees, separated by a +few yards from the regiment in front of them, marched straight on +instead of turning up it; and the 22nd Pioneers, and the four +artillery guns carried on elephants--being behind them--naturally +went astray, also. Brigadier General Thelwall, who commanded the +column, was at the head of his brigade; and was, for some time, +unaware of the absence of two of his regiments but, after halting +and finding that they did not come up, sent back a mounted officer +who, after a two-mile ride, came up with the missing troops, and +guided them back to the point where they had left the route.</p> +<p>From the foot of the ravine to the top of the pass is six miles +in distance and, dark as it was in the open, it was still more so +in the ravine, shadowed by the steep hills on either side. As the +ascent continued the road became worse; the boulders being larger, +and the holes and dried-up pools deeper. The darkness, and the +prevailing white color of the stones, prevented the difference of +level being observed; and many of the men had heavy falls, as the +steep sides of these pools were often from two to four feet +deep.</p> +<p>After marching for a mile and a half up the ravine, the report +of a rifle was heard in the ranks of the 29th Punjaubees--who were +leading the column--followed instantly by another discharge. +Colonel Gordon--commanding the regiment--halted; and he and the +general tried, in vain, to discover who had fired. No one could, or +would, identify them; and this seemed clearly to prove that the +rifles had been fired as a signal to the enemy, for they had not +been loaded before the column started. The Punjaubee regiments +contained many hill tribesmen--men closely connected, by ties of +blood and religion, with the enemy whom they were marching to +attack.</p> +<p>A non-commissioned officer and several of the men, who were just +about the spot where the guns had been fired, were placed under +arrest and sent back. It was afterwards found that two of their +rifles had been discharged; and the men who fired, and their +non-commissioned officer were tried by court martial for treachery, +and were hung. After these men had been sent back, the 5th +Ghoorkas, the company of Rangers, and two companies of the 72nd +passed the 23rd Punjaubees, and took their places at the head of +the column. In the course of the march a good many other men of the +23rd left the column, in the dark, and made their way back to +camp.</p> +<p>It turned out, afterwards, that the Afghan sentries at the top +of the pass heard the reports, and woke up the commander of the +post; who, hearing no further cause of alarm, took no action in the +matter. Had the traitors waited until the column was within a mile +of the top of the pass, the Afghans would assuredly have taken the +alarm but, firing at a distance of four and a half miles, they +failed in the desired effect.</p> +<p>The advance was resumed, up the bed of the stream, for another +mile and a half. About three in the morning the main water course +was quitted, the road now entering a ravine to the left; up which, +three miles further on, was the summit of the pass. The column +continued its weary way up the ravine, slowly stumbling along in +the dark.</p> +<p>One incident occurred, in this part of the road, showing the +necessity, in night marching, for the regiments to keep close to +each other. In one place a fir-covered island lay in the middle of +the ravine, the torrent's bed lying on either side of it. When the +two companies of the 72nd Highlanders--who had been following close +to that of the Rangers--came to the spot, they were surprised to +find that the troops in front had suddenly vanished. No explanation +could be given as to the cause of this disappearance, so the +company were halted until the mystery was solved.</p> +<p>The leading regiment had taken the passage to the right of the +island, while the 72nd had gone to the left; the separation of the +roads being unnoticed, in the dark. Had the roads diverged, instead +of reuniting, much inconvenience might have been caused by the +delay in collecting the separated portions of the force.</p> +<p>At last the foot of the Khotal was reached, where the track left +the ravine and turned up the spur. The two guides--natives of the +country, who had led the head of the column to this point--refused +to go any further and, as the column was now at the point where the +fighting might begin, they were allowed to depart.</p> +<p>It was about six o'clock when the Ghoorkas began to climb the +spur. The morning had broken; but it was still dark, and the path +was almost invisible in the shadow of the trees. The +Ghoorkas--their rifles loaded now--made their way quietly up the +hill. Presently the challenge of the sentry was heard, followed by +two shots.</p> +<p>It was a relief to the men, after ten hours of weary stumbling +along in the cold and darkness, to know that they were, at length, +face to face with their foe. Cold and fatigue were at once +forgotten and, with eyes strained through the darkness, and rifles +ready for use, every man pressed forward. Fifty yards up the hill, +behind the sentry who had fired, was the first stockade of the +enemy; formed by several large trees, which had been felled so as +to completely block up the road, presenting an obstacle of about +eight feet high to the attacking force.</p> +<p>The Afghan pickets lining the stockade poured a volley into the +Ghoorkas who, led by Major Fitzhugh and Captain Cook, made a rush +at the place. For a few minutes there was a fierce fight at the +trees but, as fresh assailants momentarily poured up, the +obstruction was scaled; and the Afghans retired on a second +stockade, eighty yards back. Here another stand was made but, the +spur being a little wider, the Ghoorkas were able to work round +and, taking the defense in flank, soon drove the Afghans back. +Beyond this point the ground was clear of trees; and the road ran, +in short zigzags, up the steep hill to the breastwork which lined +the edge of the top zigzag. A mountain gun, at this point, swept +the approach to the position; while the hill at its back was now +covered with Afghans, who opened a heavy fire upon the troops as, +in the dim morning light, they issued from the trees.</p> +<p>By the time that the Ghoorkas and the Rangers had cleared the +second stockade, the wing of the 72nd Highlanders--ascending by the +right flank--had made their way up to the front; and the whole now +advanced together. As quickly as possible they pushed up the hill, +under the heavy fire of the enemy. The latter fought well, and a +number of them were killed before retiring. At the defense erected +at the top of the zigzag, so obstinately did the Afghans in front +hold their ground that their comrades, behind, were enabled to +remove their mountain gun.</p> +<p>To the right of the enemy's position was a knoll, and the 72nd +at once took possession of this; and two mountain guns were brought +up to their assistance. The Afghans were seen, in great numbers, in +the broken ground ahead. The Ghoorkas and the little body of +Rangers pushed on against them. Presently the enemy gathered, and +made a rush down upon them; and a desperate hand-to-hand fight took +place, for a few minutes. The men were scattered among the trees, +and each fought for himself.</p> +<p>William Gale had just reloaded his rifle when he saw Captain +Herbert--who commanded his company--fall to the ground, and three +Afghans spring forward to finish him. With a bound, Will reached +the side of the officer. Two of the Afghans had already discharged +their pieces. The third leveled and fired. So close was he that the +flash almost burnt the soldier's face, and he felt a sharp pain, as +if a hot iron had passed across his cheek. In an instant, he shot +his assailant dead; and then, with bayonet, stood at bay as the +other two Afghans rushed upon him.</p> +<a id="PicC" name="PicC"></a> +<center><img src="images/c.jpg" alt= +"Illustration: Captain Herbert saved." /></center> +<p>They had drawn their tulwars, and slashed fiercely at him; but +he kept them off with his bayonet until a Ghoorka, running up, cut +down one of them with his kookerie--a heavy, sword-like knife which +the Ghoorkas carry, and which they always employ in preference to +the bayonet, in fighting at close quarters. The remaining Afghan at +once took to flight. The 29th Punjaubees had now come into action; +and the Afghans, disheartened at the loss of their position, fell +back and withdrew into the woods which cover the plateau.</p> +<p>At half-past seven o'clock the whole force--except the elephant +guns--had reached the plateau; and General Roberts was able to +flash the news, of the successful capture of the enemy's first +position, to Brigadier General Cobbe, who was in command of the +force which was to operate direct against the Peiwar-Khotal. A rest +was given the troops after their long march and, at half-past nine, +they again fell in for the attack upon the pine-covered slopes in +the direction of the Peiwar-Khotal. How strong were the enemy who +might be lurking there, they knew not. But it was certain that he +would fight obstinately and, in so dense a forest, much of the +advantage gained by drill and discipline is lost.</p> +<p>A change was made in the order of the advance. The troops who +had before led the advance, and had done the fighting, were now +placed in the rear; and the 23rd Pioneers led the way, followed by +the 2nd and 29th Punjaubees. The column crossed the plateau without +opposition, and began the ascent towards the enemy's position in +the woods. Considerable caution was needed, as no one had any +knowledge of the country, and all were ignorant of the position and +numbers of the enemy; who might, for aught they knew, be massing in +great numbers for an attack upon the front, or one of the +flanks.</p> +<p>The line of skirmishers entered the pine wood near the rocky +hillside, and a rolling fire of musketry soon told that they were +engaged, from end to end of the line. It was slow work; for fallen +trees, rocks, and bushes everywhere hampered the advance. Still the +skirmishing line--reinforced from behind--pushed forward steadily +and, presently, cleared the Afghans off the hillside.</p> +<p>When the troops reached the top, they found a valley in front of +them and, from the woods on the opposite side, so heavy a musketry +fire was kept up that it was evident the Afghans intended to make a +desperate stand here. The valley--or rather ravine--was a narrow +one: fifty yards wide, at its foot; and scarce three times as much, +from brow to brow. The enemy--hidden among the trees--could not be +made out, except by their continual fire. They did not content +themselves, however, with the mere defense of their side of the +hill but, from time to time, large numbers charged down, and tried +to force their way up that held by the British. Each time, however, +when they attempted this, the Punjaubees drove them back with +slaughter.</p> +<p>It was clear that the Afghans were in great numbers, for their +line extended for a mile and a half along the hillside. Major +Anderson of the 23rd Pioneers, after repulsing one of these +attacks, led four companies to the assault of the Afghan position, +and drove the enemy back for some little distance; but Major +Anderson fell, and the party retired. Colonel Curry--who commanded +the regiment--again led the men forward and, for a time, a +hand-to-hand fight took place. For two hours the rifle contest +continued, without cessation. The storm of bullets was tremendous, +but no very great execution was done, on either side, both parties +lying behind the shelter of trees.</p> +<p>So far, no advantage had been gained by the British; and General +Roberts felt that, with the force under his command, it would be +rash to attempt to carry so strong a position, held by a greatly +superior force.</p> +<p>In the meantime, the attack upon the Peiwar-Khotal from the +valley had commenced. Before daylight Brigadier General Cobbe, with +the 5th Punjaub Infantry and the 8th Regiment, left camp; his +object being to cooperate with the flank attack. The 8th Regiment +moved directly towards the pass, while the 5th Punjaubees climbed +one of the principal spurs between the Peiwar and Spingawi +Khotals.</p> +<p>The ascent was extremely difficult, and it took the troops six +hours to reach the summit. During the last portion of the ascent, +they came under the fire of the enemy. When near the summit, Major +Macqueen of the 5th Punjaubees saw, through an opening in the pine +wood, the Afghan camp, with their baggage animals; which were +placed, for shelter, in the glade behind the Peiwar-Khotal. Two +mountain guns were at once brought up, and a fire opened upon the +Afghan camp. In a few minutes the tents caught fire, the animals +stampeded in all directions; and the enemy in front, seized with a +panic, began rapidly to retreat.</p> +<p>The Afghan troops facing General Roberts' column, when they +found their comrades on their right retreating, began to draw off, +and the fire sensibly diminished. The movement was accelerated by +the four elephant guns--which had, at length, come up--opening fire +into the pine-wood forest. As the fire slackened, a reconnaissance +of the hill was made by General Roberts and his staff; but the +result showed that the mountain was so covered with pines, and +brushwood, that it formed an almost impenetrable barrier to the +advance of troops--for the growth was so thick that it was +impossible to say in which direction any movement should be made. +The experience gained, in the last six hours of hard fighting, had +shown how difficult it was to keep command over troops scattered +along a front of half a mile long, in the forest, where nothing +could be seen beyond a radius of a few yards.</p> +<p>The general, therefore, determined to desist from the attempt to +force his way direct to the top of the Peiwar-Khotal; and to march +to his left and so, by menacing the Afghan line of retreat, to +hasten the movement towards the rear which had evidently begun. The +men were, therefore, brought back to the plateau to the east of the +ravine. Here they were halted for a time, and the contents of their +haversacks furnished them with a meal.</p> +<p>At two o'clock they again drew up on the Spingawi plateau. The +2nd Punjaub Infantry being left on the hill, to oppose the Afghans, +should they again advance in that direction; the rest of the column +entered the defile leading into the Hurriab valley, far in the rear +of the Peiwar-Khotal. As soon as the enemy--who were still opposing +the 2nd Punjaub Infantry--saw the head of the column enter the +defile, they were seized with a panic lest their retreat should be +cut off; and began to retreat with the greatest haste, as they had +to make their way across two mountain ridges, before they could +pass the spot towards which our troops were moving. The advance of +the column, however, was necessarily slow; as the woods and side +valleys had to be carefully examined, lest a flank attack should be +made upon them.</p> +<p>In two hours the head of the column emerged from the forest on +to the open slopes above the highest cultivated point in the +Hurriab valley. It was now four o'clock. The short December day was +drawing to a close. No enemy were in sight, for their line of +retreat was hidden in the bed of the stream, a couple of miles +further on; and no one knew where they were to be found. The troops +were much exhausted with the want of rest, and with their heavy +work--for they had now been marching, and fighting, for eighteen +hours--and they were glad to receive the order to bivouac; although +they had no tents, or food, and the cold--as might be expected on a +winter day, at an elevation of over 9000 feet above the sea--began +to be very severe.</p> +<p>A number of the nearest trees were felled by the pioneers, and +huge fires were soon alight. There was still some uneasiness, as no +one knew where the force under General Cobbe was, or whether the +attack on the Peiwar-Khotal had been successful or not.</p> +<p>While the 5th Punjaub Infantry had been mounting the spur, +halfway between the Peiwar and the Spingawi Khotal, the 8th +Regiment had moved directly upon the pass. The Afghans, who had +expected an attack, had remained under arms until three in the +morning when, hearing no sounds in our camp, they had been +dismissed to rest.</p> +<p>Three guns of the Royal Artillery, and two of the Royal Horse +Artillery took up their post 800 yards in front of our camp; where +their fire, at the crest of the pass, would assist the advance of +the 8th. These, after two hours' march, found themselves at seven +in the morning on the last spur, which is separated from the +Peiwar-Khotal by a deep ravine. When it became daylight, a few +minutes later, the enemy caught sight of our artillery in the +valley, and at once opened fire. Although they had six field pieces +at the top of the hill, only three had been placed in position to +command the valley and the ascent; and the mountain battery, which +had arrived the afternoon before, was not brought to the front.</p> +<p>The three field pieces, and the mountain gun on the spur kept up +a continuous fire on our battery, of five guns. These were, +however, almost beyond their range, and but little damage was done. +On our side, the fire was chiefly directed against the mountain +gun, at the end of the spur; and at any bodies of men who showed +themselves. The artillery duel went on for four hours and, in the +meantime, the infantry were engaged sharply with the Afghans. These +had taken up their position in the woods, on the other side of the +ravine; and kept up a continuous fire upon the 8th. The distance, +however, was too great for much execution on either side, +especially as both parties were sheltered in the woods.</p> +<p>About ten o'clock the Afghans were seen gathering in strength, +as if to come down across the road leading up to the Khotal, to +attack the 8th in the rear. A squadron of the 18th Bengal Cavalry +charged up the valley, and the enemy retired up the hill again and, +seeing that they could not cross the road, without the chance of +being cut up by the cavalry, they did not try to repeat the +experiment.</p> +<p>At eleven o'clock Brigadier General Cobbe was wounded in the +leg, and Colonel Barry-Drew succeeded him in the command; receiving +the orders which had been given to General Cobbe--that the Khotal +was not to be attacked, till there was some evidence that the flank +attack had shaken the enemy's defense, in front.</p> +<p>At twelve o'clock the guns, with the 2nd Punjaub Infantry, +alarmed the Afghans by their fire upon the camp and, although the +Afghan guns in front kept up their fire, the musketry fire +decreased considerably. Seeing this, Colonel Drew ordered the +artillery to be brought up nearer. When--after advancing 300 +yards--they came to a ravine crossing the road, the Afghans--who +had come down the hill to meet them--opened a heavy fire and, the +road being narrow, only the leading gun could come into action. +However, the two companies of the 8th--which were acting as an +escort to the guns--advanced in skirmishing order, and drove the +Afghans up the hill.</p> +<p>The panic among the Afghans on the plateau having now spread to +the troops at the Khotal, their fire entirely ceased; and the 8th +Regiment descended the defile, and began to climb the path to the +Khotal. Not a hostile shot was fired and, at half-past two, they +reached the enemy's camp, which they found deserted.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch11" id="Ch11">Chapter 11</a>: A Prisoner.</h2> +<p>The panic which had seized the Afghans, when they found their +retreat menaced, had been thorough and complete and, when the 8th +Regiment entered the camp, they found that the tents were standing. +Food had been left, ready cooked, and every possession had been +abandoned. In the artillery camp, the gunners had left their +silver-mounted brass helmets and caps, as well as their guns and +carriages. A body of friendly Turis had accompanied the column, +making a demonstration on its flank; and these, arriving upon the +spot, plundered the Afghan camp of everything of the smallest +value.</p> +<p>No one knew what had become of the main body, under General +Roberts. The Bengal Cavalry scouted for some distance in advance, +but found no signs of the enemy. Strong pickets were set, in case +the Afghans should rally and return. The tents were brought up from +the camp below, fires were lit, and the 8th encamped for the +night.</p> +<p>In the morning, communication was established between the two +camps and, it having been ascertained that the enemy had fled, in +the greatest disorder, towards the Shatur-Gardan Pass leading down +to Cabul, there was no prospect of further fighting. The Afghans +had abandoned all their guns, and even thrown away a great quantity +of muskets, in their rapid retreats. Great stores of flour and +other provisions were discovered, in the various villages, and were +divided among the troops.</p> +<p>The winter was now setting in, and the Shatur-Gardan Pass might, +any moment, be closed by deep snow. There was, therefore, no +prospect of a renewal of hostilities before the spring. +Preparations were made for putting a regiment on the top of the +Khotal. The rest of the force were to winter at Khuram. General +Roberts, with an escort of cavalry, rode to the Shatur-Gardan Pass, +and assured himself that the whole of the Afghan army had fled +beyond this point.</p> +<p>The troops were, for some time, kept hard at work lowering the +captured guns and ammunition down to the valley. A portion of the +troops advanced as far as Ali-Kheyl, the principal town of the +plateau. The Jajis--the inhabitants of the country--had hitherto +been extremely hostile but, cowed by the defeat of the Afghans, +they submitted without resistance.</p> +<p>On the 12th, all the preparations for the return were complete. +It was known that there was another pass from Ali-Kheyl into the +Khuram valley, by the south. This had never been explored by any +European; but General Roberts determined to return by it, with a +portion of his force, as the pass might be found valuable in future +operations. The force detailed for the march through the Sappir +defile was composed of the 8th Ghoorkas, a wing of the 72nd +Highlanders, a company of the Norfolk Rangers, the 23rd Punjaub +Pioneers, and a mountain battery.</p> +<p>The country through which the march was to be made was inhabited +by the Mongals, a turbulent robber tribe. The column marched at +nine in the morning and, after their down march, arrived at the +village of Sappir at midday. The road lay down the Hurriab river, +till the Khuram river was reached; and then along the right bank, +passing through the village of Kermana; after which it turned up a +narrow road, for two miles, till an open plateau was reached, at +the farther end of which stood the village of Sappir. It was +reported, here, that the Mongals intended to defend a defile and +hill pass, two miles farther on. The 23rd Pioneers were therefore +pushed on, to occupy the pass and bivouac there. The remainder of +the troops camped in the village.</p> +<p>No signs of the enemy were seen, either by the 23rd Pioneers or +in the vicinity of the camp. The troops were to march at three in +the morning, and the tents were struck an hour after midnight. The +track up the pass was excessively steep, and very difficult for the +camels. The cold was bitter and, in places where water had crossed +the road, there were slippery surfaces of ice--which hindered the +camels considerably--and it was past eight o'clock before the rear +guard arrived at the top of the pass. From a commanding position, +overlooking the defile and surrounding waste of rugged and barren +mountains, not an enemy could be seen; and it was hoped that the +report of the intended attack was a false one.</p> +<p>The troops now began to descend the defile, which was known as +the Manjiar Pass. Troublesome as the ascent had been, the descent +was infinitely more so; and it was with difficulty that the camels +could be made to go down the deep and slippery roads. The gorge was +five miles in length. The track, for the first part, ran through a +deep ravine of perpendicular walls; which narrowed in places to a +few yards, overhanging the path until they seemed to meet, and form +a tunnel, through which it ran. Had an attack been made on the +column, as it struggled with its difficulties through this portion +of the pass, the result would have been disastrous; for it would +have been impossible to place troops on the heights, to cover the +advance. Here and there side ravines broke into the road, in any of +which ambushes might have been laid.</p> +<p>It was not, however, until the difficult part of the road had +been passed, and a comparatively open valley reached, that any of +the natives were seen. Then a few men were observed on the heights +but, as they were supposed to be shepherds, no notice was taken of +them. Believing that all danger of attack was now over, the general +ordered all the troops--with the exception of the baggage guard, +which was composed of the 3rd Ghoorkas, and a few of the 72nd +Highlanders and Norfolk Rangers--to march forward to the camp; +which was to be pitched at a village called Keraiah, in the open +valley.</p> +<p>This, as the result proved, was a very rash move. Before the +head of the column had extricated itself from the ravine, numbers +of the country people were seen collecting, in small detached +parties. By degrees they closed in, and were soon within fifty +yards of the convoy. Captain Goad--in charge of the baggage--was +close to a small guard of 72nd Highlanders when, suddenly, a volley +was fired by the Mongals.</p> +<p>Captain Goad fell, his thigh bone broken by a bullet. Sergeant +Green, with three privates of the 72nd, picked him up and, having +placed him under cover of a rock, turned to defend themselves. They +were but four men against a large number; but they stood steady +and, firing with careful aim, and picking off their man each time, +they kept the enemy at bay until help arrived.</p> +<p>Simultaneously, all along the line of the baggage column, the +Mongals attacked. From the heights on both sides a fire was kept +up, while the more daring swept down in parties upon the rear guard +of Ghoorkas, commanded by Captain Powell. The baggage guard all +behaved with great steadiness; defending the path on both sides, +while the baggage animals continued their way along it.</p> +<p>William Gale was on duty with the party; and was, like the rest, +busy with his rifle. A sergeant next to him was hit in the leg; and +Will--laying down his rifle--stopped one of the camels, and +assisted the wounded man to mount it. The attack of the Mongals +became more furious, as they saw their anticipated prey escaping +them, in spite of all their efforts; but their attempts to close +were in vain, and the convoy made its way down to the village; with +the loss of one killed, and two officers, and eight men wounded. +Captain Powell and Captain Goad both died, from the effects of +their injuries. The enemy's loss must have been considerable, as +the fire of the troop was steady and accurate, and the distance +small.</p> +<p>After a halt, for a day or two, the column marched to Khuram, +where it encamped. Captain Herbert had reported to the colonel the +manner in which Private Gale had defended him, when wounded and +attacked by three Afghans; the incident, too, had been observed by +many of his comrades and, as a reward, the young soldier was +promoted to the rank of corporal; and the colonel told him that, +had not similar acts of bravery been performed in the hand-to-hand +action, on the Spingawi-Khotal, he would have been mentioned for +the Victoria Cross.</p> +<p>The mountain tops were now deep in snow; but in the valley the +temperature was very agreeable, and the troops enjoyed their rest +much. This was not, however, to be of long duration. From the lower +end of the Khuram valley runs off another valley, known as the +"Khost." This was an entirely unknown country to the Europeans, but +it was said to be extremely hostile. Parties had come down and +carried off cattle and, at any time, a formidable raid might have +taken place, and our line of communication been entirely cut.</p> +<p>The country was ruled by an Afghan governor, who sent in to say +that he was willing to hand it over to us. There was, therefore, no +expectation that there would be any resistance; and the expedition +was designed rather to overawe the country, and to obtain +information as to its extent and capabilities, than with any idea +of permanent occupation. The column consisted of a squadron of the +10th Hussars, the 5th Bengal Cavalry, the 21st and 28th Punjaub +Infantry, two mountain batteries, a wing of the 72nd Highlanders, +and two companies of the Norfolk Rangers. This force marched from +Hazir-pir, and halted for the night at Jaji-Midan, at the head of +the valley leading to the Darwiza Pass, through which the track +runs into the Khost valley.</p> +<p>At eight o'clock next morning, the troops moved forward. The +ground was difficult, for the road ran between terraced fields on +the side of the ravine, and obliged men and animals to pass in +single file. It was not, therefore, until twelve o'clock that the +rear guard moved out of the camp. Beyond this point, the road up +the pass was not difficult. From the summit, a wide view was +obtained. At the end of the valley--six miles distant--the plain of +the Khost country was seen. It was seen that--owing to the slow +progress the troops were making--the baggage train, consisting of +1000 camels, would not be able to reach the proposed camping +ground, at the lower end of the valley, before dark. The general, +therefore, ordered it to halt at the top of the pass, where the +ground was open. The 21st Punjaubees, and a mountain battery, were +to stay there for its protection; and bring it on, next day. The +mules, with the regimental baggage, went on with the troops.</p> +<p>The column met with no opposition. It halted near the village of +Bakh, half a mile from the foot of the hills; where the valley +widened into a plain, six miles long and four broad. The force +encamped here on the 4th, to allow the convoy to come up. The +following morning the column marched to the other end of the +valley; and the next day the Afghan governor of Matun--the chief +place of the Khost--rode in to welcome the general.</p> +<p>On the 6th of January the force marched to Matun. They found +that this fort was a square-walled enclosure, 100 yards each side, +with circular corner bastions. There was a central square +enclosure, with round towers at its angles. As the fort was +approached, its garrison--which consisted of 100 local +militia--were formed up, in two lines, at a mosque outside the +fort. The general with his staff rode in, and a long interview took +place between him and the governor. The troops encamped +outside.</p> +<p>In the evening information came in, from the villages in the +plain, that large numbers of the Mongals--who inhabited the +hills--were meditating an attack. Strong pickets were posted, and +the night passed quietly. In the morning large numbers of tribesmen +flocked down into the villages, and gradually surrounded the +camp.</p> +<p>At one o'clock the troops fell in. The cavalry were sent out +against the enemy in the northwest direction, followed by the 28th +Punjaubees and Number 2 mounted battery. The Mongals at once fell +back to the hills.</p> +<p>The squadron of the 10th Hussars were dismounted, and ordered to +skirmish up a small knoll to the west. From this they drove the +enemy, who gathered again on a spur opposite. Here they were +charged by the 5th Punjaub Cavalry, and fell back higher up the +ridge. The mountain guns and infantry now arrived, and speedily +drove them over the crest.</p> +<p>General Roberts, with his staff, rode out to watch the skirmish; +and soon after he had left the enemy, who occupied the village to +the northeast, showed in force. Two of the mountain guns opened +upon them.</p> +<p>On the south they now approached, under the cover of the old +Afghan cavalry lines, to within half a mile before being perceived; +and also occupied a walled village there. The other two guns in +camp shelled the village, and soon drove the enemy out.</p> +<p>When the general returned to camp, at half-past two, he found +the attack driven off in all directions; and ordered the 21st +Punjaubees, the 72nd Highlanders, and the Norfolk Rangers to follow +up the enemy to the east and southeast, with the mountain guns; and +to burn the villages which had sheltered the enemy. The first +village was found deserted. At another, a quarter of a mile behind, +the enemy made a stand; but were shelled out, and the plain beyond +the Matun river was soon covered with fugitives. Major +Stewart--with forty men of the 5th Punjaub Cavalry, who accompanied +the column--charged 400 of them, and cut down many; until checked +by the heavy fire of matchlock men from the high bank.</p> +<p>No more fighting took place. The combination of tribes which had +attacked the camp were estimated at 6000 men. Eighty prisoners were +taken. These, two nights afterwards, took advantage of a night +alarm to attempt to escape, and attacked the guard. The attempt, +however, was frustrated; but only after several of the prisoners +had been shot down.</p> +<p>Some days passed, quietly. Reconnaissances were made up the +valley. While waiting here, the news of the capture of Candahar, by +General Stewart, arrived. Parties of engineers surveyed the +country, and all passed off quietly.</p> +<p>On the 25th, a portion of the force marched back to Hazir-pir On +the 26th of January the general determined to withdraw this force +altogether; as no advantage was gained by its retention, and the +garrison would be constantly exposed to the attacks of the natives, +who were already threatening it. The fort was handed over to Sultan +Jan, a man of good family, who was appointed to govern the Khost, +temporarily. He had under him the guard of the former governor, and +some fresh natives; being, in all, 300 men. The headmen of the +villages were called together, and these promised to obey his +rule.</p> +<p>Some of the chiefs of the Mongals, and other neighboring tribes, +came in. Sheep were given to them, and they were told that, so long +as they desisted from interference in the valley, no steps would be +taken against them. The troops, however, had only made one day's +march when a messenger arrived from Sultan Jan; saying that, +immediately the troops had marched, the Mongals had come down to +attack the fort. A strong party were therefore marched back at +once. After destroying the stores, and setting fire to the fort, +they drew off the governor and marched back to camp; the Mongals, +although in great force, not venturing to offer any resistance.</p> +<p>On the return of the force to the Khuram valley, a wing of the +Norfolk Rangers was sent up to reinforce the troops stationed on +the top of the Peiwar-Khotal; as the Jajis and Mongals had been +gathering in large numbers, and threatening an attack on that +post.</p> +<p>William Gale was, with his company, stationed at Ali-Kheyl. The +enemy abstained from any open attack, but they often harassed the +sentries. One night, Will was corporal in charge of a picket of +eight men, posted at a hut half a mile from the village. The object +of the picket was to prevent any sudden attack being made upon the +company; who were in a small village, a quarter of a mile in the +rear, where a large quantity of grain was stored. Two men were +posted as sentries, some hundred yards in advance of the hut.</p> +<p>Will had visited the sentry to the right and, finding all was +well, here, moved across to the left.</p> +<p>"Is everything quiet?" he asked the sentry.</p> +<p>"I don't know, corporal. Two or three times I have thought that +I heard noises, and twice I have challenged."</p> +<p>"What sort of noise?"</p> +<p>"Once it seemed to be a crack, like a dried stick when some one +treads on it. The other time it was as if a stone had been +dislodged."</p> +<p>"I will wait with you," Will said. "Two pairs of ears are better +than one."</p> +<p>Again there was a slight sound heard.</p> +<p>"I don't like to fire," Will said. "The alarm would spread, and +the whole camp get under arms. There is something moving, I am +convinced; but it may be only a stray bullock. I will go forward, +and see if I can make it out; and do you stand ready to fire, if I +am attacked.</p> +<p>"After doing so, fall back on the picket, at once. If the enemy +are in force, hold the hut to the last. In ten minutes you will +have help from the village, behind."</p> +<p>Holding his rifle advanced, in readiness to fire, William Gale +made his way forward, cautiously, towards the spot whence the noise +seemed to proceed. When he was some forty yards in advance of the +sentry, a number of figures rose suddenly from some bushes, and +fired. Will fired, and saw the man at whom he aimed go down but, at +the same instant, three or four guns were discharged; and he fell +to the ground, shot through the leg. There was a rush of men +towards him. A tulwar was waved, and fell, with a crushing blow, on +his shoulder; and he became insensible.</p> +<p>When he recovered consciousness he was being carried along, a +man holding his arms and another his legs. The pain was +excruciating, and he fainted again; after hearing, during his brief +period of consciousness, a sharp fusilade of musketry, which told +him that his comrades were defending the hut against the enemy.</p> +<p>When again he came to his senses, it was daylight. He was lying +in a small room, and an old woman was applying bandages to the +sword cut on his shoulder. Although he did not know it, he was ten +miles from the spot where the attack had been made.</p> +<p>Among those who had taken part in it was the head of a small +Jaji village, lying behind the hills. This chief was a crafty old +savage, who had been desirous of remaining neutral in the strife. +The determination of his people to join in the attack, by the +tribes, had forced him to consent to their so doing. Before +starting he had, however, made them swear that any wounded men who +fell into their hands should not--in accordance with the Afghan +custom--be instantly despatched; but should be brought back to the +village.</p> +<p>His intention was to have some hostages. If the English repulsed +the attack and, in the spring, again advanced; he would be able to +prove his goodwill to the cause, by handing the soldiers whom he +had protected over to them. Upon the other hand, should the British +fall back and the Afghans advance in the spring, he could hand the +prisoners over to them, or send them down to Cabul, as a proof that +his people had fought against the British. He had himself +accompanied his men and, seeing after Will had fallen that he was +still living, had at once ordered two of his men to carry him off +to the village.</p> +<p>The attack upon the guard house proved unsuccessful. The six +soldiers defended themselves until the company from the village, +behind, came up to the rescue. Several other attacks, at various +points, took place. But the British were on the alert; and the +hillsmen, finding that their enemies were not to be taken by +surprise, scattered again to the village.</p> +<p>The ball had fortunately passed through William Gale's leg, +without either breaking a bone or cutting an artery; but the wound +in the shoulder was more serious, and the effect of the strain upon +it, in carrying him, brought on violent inflammation. Fever set in +with delirium and, for weeks, the lad lay between life and +death.</p> +<p>The old woman who nursed him was, like most of her country +people, skilled in the treatment of wounds. The bandages were kept +bathed with water, snow was constantly applied to his head, and a +decoction of herbs given him to drink. His good constitution was in +his favor and, at last, he recovered his senses; to find himself +convalescent, but as weak as an infant.</p> +<p>In April the snow melted; and the chief, having by this time +found that the English were not likely to advance beyond Ali-Kheyl, +thought that it would best benefit his interest to send his +prisoner down to Cabul. The Ameer was reported to be about to +conclude peace with the British; and the chief thought that he was +more likely to receive a reward, from him, for the care he had +bestowed upon the prisoner, than from the English. Moreover, it +would have been difficult to send him into the English camp, +through the hostile villages; while no unfavorable comment would be +incited, by his sending his prisoner down to Cabul.</p> +<p>Will Gale was far too weak to perform the journey on foot. He +was, therefore, placed on a camel. The chief himself, and four of +his headmen, accompanied him as an escort and, a week after the +pass was open, they started up the valley to the Shatur-Gardan; and +thence descended into the Logan Valley, below, on the way to +Cabul.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch12" id="Ch12">Chapter 12</a>: The Advance Up The +Khyber.</h2> +<p>Nothing has yet been said of the doings of the other columns: +that under General Browne advancing, by the Khyber Pass, upon +Jellalabad; that under General Stewart, by the Bolan Pass, upon +Candahar.</p> +<p>General Browne's force had been gathered at the frontier line, +at the mouth of the pass, awaiting the reply of the Ameer to the +British ultimatum. None having been received, up to the night of +the 20th of November, the advance took place in the morning; at the +same hour at which General Roberts advanced from Thull in the +Khurum valley.</p> +<p>The principal defense of the Khyber Pass was the fort +Ali-Musjid. This fort stands on a most commanding position, on a +rock jutting out from the hillside far into the valley, which its +guns commanded. It was flanked by batteries erected on the +hillsides, and was a most formidable position to capture. It was +situated about six miles up the valley.</p> +<p>The force under General Browne was divided into four brigades. +The first--under General Macpherson--consisted of the 4th battalion +of the Rifle Brigade, the 20th Bengal Infantry, the 4th Ghoorkas, +and a mountain battery. These were ordered to take a mountain road +and--led by a native guide--to make a long circuit, and so to come +down into the pass at a village lying a mile or two beyond +Ali-Musjid.</p> +<p>The second brigade--under Colonel Tytler--consisting of the 1st +battalion of the 17th Foot, the infantry of the Guides, the 1st +Sikhs, and a mountain battery, were also to take to the hills and, +working along on their crests, to come down upon the batteries +which the Afghans had erected on the hillside opposite to +Ali-Musjid.</p> +<p>The third brigade, consisting of the 81st Regiment, the 14th +Sikhs, and the 24th Native Infantry; and the fourth brigade, +composed of the 51st Regiment, 6th Native Infantry, and the 45th +Sikhs, were to advance straight up the valley. With them was a +mountain battery, a battery of Horse Artillery, one of Royal +Artillery, and a battery of 40-pounders, drawn by elephants.</p> +<p>These brigades marched forward until they reached some rising +ground in the valley, whence they could see Ali-Musjid, at a +distance of a mile and a half, in front of them. The enemy at once +opened fire. The gunners in the fort had been practising for some +weeks, and had got the range with great accuracy; and their shot +and shell fell thick along the slope. The column was therefore +marched back behind its crest, and there halted; and the men were +allowed to fall out and eat their dinners, as it was desired that +the flanking columns of Macpherson and Tytler--which had very much +further to go--should reach the positions assigned to them before +the attack began.</p> +<p>The artillery, however, took up their position on the crest, and +opened fire on the fort. The effect of the light guns was but +slight, but the 40-pounders produced considerable effect on the +face of the fort.</p> +<p>After a halt for some time, the troops were ordered to advance. +The 45th Sikhs were first thrown out upon the hillside and, working +their way along on the right of the valley, opened a heavy musketry +fire against the Afghans in the batteries there. Presently the 51st +and 6th Native Infantry joined them; while the 81st, the 24th, and +14th Sikhs worked along on the left.</p> +<p>The scene was one of the most picturesque ever witnessed in +warfare. From the fortress, standing on the perpendicular rock in +the center of the valley, the flashes of the great guns came fast +and steadily; while the edges of the rock, and fort, were fringed +with tiny puffs of musketry. From the rising ground in the valley, +the smoke of the British guns rose up in the still air as, steadily +and fast, they replied to the fire of the fort. Both sides of the +steep hill slopes were lined with British infantry--the quick flash +of the rifles spurting out from every rock and bush; while +continuous lines of light smoke rose from the Afghan entrenchments +which faced them.</p> +<p>Gradually the British skirmishers advanced, until they were +close to the Afghan entrenchments on the hillsides abreast of the +fort. So far, there was no sign that Macpherson's brigade had +reached the post assigned to it, high up on the hill; or that +Tytler had worked round to the village in the enemy's rear. Some +attacks which were made upon the Afghans were repulsed, with loss. +Major Birch and Lieutenant Fitzgerald were killed, and Captain +Maclean wounded; and between thirty and forty of the rank and file +were killed, or wounded. As the fort and its defenses could not +have been carried by direct attack, without immense loss of life; +it was determined to cease operations until morning, in order to +give the flanking columns time to reach the positions assigned to +them. A wing of a regiment, from each brigade, was ordered to +remain on the hillside facing the Afghan entrenchments. The rest of +the troops fell back a short distance, and lay down as they were, +for the night.</p> +<p>In the meantime, the brigades of Macpherson and Tytler had +encountered enormous difficulties on the line of march. The roads +they had taken were mere tracks, and there were many places where +it was almost impossible to get the mountain guns along. From +daybreak until late at night the troops labored, unceasingly. They +knew, by the dull roar echoed and re-echoed among the mountains, +that their comrades below were engaged; and the thought that a +failure might ensue, owing to their absence from the contest, +nerved them to continued exertions.</p> +<p>Late at night, however, Macpherson with his brigade arrived on +the top of the hill facing Ali-Musjid; and Tytler, with his column, +came down into the Khyber valley in rear of the fort. But, though +unopposed, their march had not been unnoticed and, late in the +evening, the news reached the Afghans that the British were +marching down into the valley behind them. A wild panic instantly +seized them. Clothes, ammunition, guns, everything that could +impede their flight were thrown away; and the garrison of +Ali-Musjid, and the Afghans in the hillside entrenchments fled, a +herd of frightened fugitives, up the valley. Hasty as was their +retreat, they were not in time. Tytler, with his column, debouched +into the valley before they had passed the spot where the mountain +path descended into it; and large numbers were taken prisoners.</p> +<p>As at the Peiwar-Khotal, the Afghans proved themselves capable +of defending a strong position, valiantly; but were converted into +a mob of panic-stricken fugitives, by their line of retreat being +threatened. A European army, under like circumstances, would have +fallen back in good order. Their force was amply sufficient to have +swept aside the little column which barred their retreat, and they +would have occupied a fresh position farther to the rear, and +renewed the conflict. Not so the Afghans. The capture of Ali-Musjid +brought with it the entire demoralization of the Afghan army which, +a few hours before, had been fully confident in its power to +repulse any attack which might be made upon it.</p> +<p>The British continued their advance, passed through the Khyber +Pass, and entered the broad valley near whose head stands the town +of Jellalabad. Beyond a few shots, fired at them by tribesmen high +up on the mountain side, they experienced no opposition, whatever +and, a week after the fight in the Khyber, entered Jellalabad and +encamped around it.</p> +<p>Further than this it was not intended to go, for the present. +Winter was now close at hand. Between Jellalabad and Cabul were a +series of most difficult passes. An army advancing up them would +have immense difficulty to encounter, and might find itself cut off +from India by the snows. In the Jellalabad valley the weather is +mild, large stores of provisions were obtainable, and here it was +determined to remain, through the winter; and to recommence the +campaign, in the spring, with the advantage of the Khyber Pass--one +of the keys of Afghanistan--being in our hands.</p> +<p>But a day or two after reaching Jellalabad--having defeated and +dispersed one of the two Afghan armies--the news arrived of the +capture of the Peiwar-Khotal--the second key of Afghanistan--and +the utter rout of the army defending it. Thus, in little more than +a week after the commencement of the campaign Sheer-Ali, the Ameer, +saw the entire overthrow of the army which he had, for so many +years, been occupied in organizing and training. The positions +which he had deemed impregnable had both been taken, after a single +day's fighting; and his capital lay virtually at the mercy of his +conquerors. In one short week, his hopes and plans had been +scattered to the winds.</p> +<p>Sheer-Ali was not wholly to be blamed. He had for many years +received an annual present of money and arms, from the British +government; but upon the other hand, he saw Russia marching with +giant steps towards his northern frontier and, contrasting the +energy and enterprise of the great northern power, with the +inactivity which he may have supposed to prevail among the men who +governed England, he became more and more anxious; and asked the +English definitely to state whether he could rely upon them for +assistance, should he be attacked by the Russians.</p> +<p>He received a reply from the Duke of Argyle--the British +minister for India--of a doubtful nature, couched in terms which +seem to have aroused his resentment. From this moment, there can be +no doubt that the Ameer's course was decided upon. He was between +the hammer and the anvil and, as he could obtain no guarantee of +assistance from England, he determined to throw himself into the +arms of Russia.</p> +<p>Letters were exchanged between him and General Kaufmann--the +Russian viceroy in Turkestan--and the latter gave him the warmest +promises of support, if he would ally himself with Russia. Although +he had, for years, declined to accept a British resident at Cabul, +or to allow Englishmen to enter the country; he now, believing in +the power and willingness of Russia to help, received the visit of +a Russian general and staff, at Cabul.</p> +<p>Unfortunately for the Ameer, the government of England had now +changed hands; and the ministry at once sent to Sheer-Ali, to +demand that he should receive a British resident. It was late in +the year, and the Ameer--acting, no doubt, on the advice of his +Russian friends--sought to gain time by evasive answers. The +British government--who saw through the ruse--ordered the envoy to +advance, with a strong escort. This obliged the Ameer to come to a +final decision; and the die was cast by the escort being stopped, +by force, on its arrival at Ali-Musjid.</p> +<p>There is no doubt that the Ameer, and his friends, calculated +that it was already too late in the season for the English to +gather a sufficient force, on the frontier, to force the passes +held by the Afghan army before the snows. The promptness of action +of the English government, the valor of their troops, and the +unusually late setting in of the winter combined to overthrow the +Ameer's plans. Had the campaign been delayed till the spring, there +can be little doubt that the British, in their advance, would have +found themselves opposed--if not by a Russian army--at least by an +army led and officered by Russians, with Russian engineers and +artillerymen. The promptness of their advance, and the capture of +the passes and the dispersion of the Afghan armies, within a week +of the opening of the campaign, altogether altered this +position.</p> +<p>Sheer-Ali found himself a king without an army. The plains of +Cabul were thronged with the panic-stricken fugitives from the +Khyber and Peiwar; and Sheer-Ali started at night from his capital +with his Russian friends, and made for the north; sending letter +after letter ahead of him to General Kaufmann, imploring the +promised aid of Russia. The rapid course of events, however, had +entirely disconcerted the Russian plans.</p> +<p>In the spring, a Russian army might have advanced and cooperated +with that of the Ameer; but the winter had set in, the distance was +immense, and the Russians unprepared for instant action. The +appeals of the unfortunate prince were responded to with vague +generalities. He was no longer a powerful ally, but a broken +instrument and, heartbroken with disappointment and failure, the +unfortunate Sheer-Ali was seized by fever and died, in an obscure +village, almost alone and wholly uncared for.</p> +<p>His son Yakoob Khan--who had, in his youth, proved himself a +brave and able soldier; but who, having incurred his father's +displeasure, had been for years confined as a prisoner at +Herat--was now liberated, and took his place as his father's +successor. He saw at once that, with a broken and disorganized +army, he could not hope to resist the advance of the three British +armies which, coming from Jellalabad, from the heights of the +Shatur-Gardan, and from Candahar, would simultaneously advance upon +his capital, as soon as the snows melted. He therefore opened +negotiations and, early in May, himself descended from Cabul and +had an interview with General Browne, at Gundamuk; when the +preliminaries of peace were arranged, and signed.</p> +<p>The terms insisted upon by the British were not onerous. Yakoob +was recognized as the Ameer of Afghanistan, the annual subsidy paid +to his father was to be continued. The Khyber Pass and the Khurum +valley, as far as the Peiwar-Khotal, were to remain in the hands of +the British; and a British minister was to be stationed at Cabul. +When peace had been signed, the greater portion of the British army +retired to India; and the Khurum column, leaving two or three +regiments in that valley, also fell back.</p> +<p>While the first and second divisions had been gaining victories +in the Khyber and Khurum valleys, the column under General Stewart +had met with difficulties of another kind. Between the Indus, and +the foot of the range of mountains through which the Bolan Pass +leads to the lofty plateau land above, a great waste of sand +stretches. In the wet season, this tract of country is overflowed +by the Indus. In the dry season it is a parched and bare desert, +with its wells few and far apart. There were great difficulties met +with in crossing this inhospitable plain, and the losses among the +baggage animals were great; but the labors up to this point were as +nothing, to those which had to be undergone on the way up the Bolan +Pass.</p> +<p>This pass--whose ascent occupies three days--is in fact the mere +bed of a stream, covered deeply with boulders and stones of all +sizes, in which the baggage and artillery horses sank fetlock deep. +The difficulties encountered were enormous, and vast numbers of +camels, horses, and bullocks died by the way. Even with a double +complement of horses, it was almost impossible to drag the guns up +the deep, shingly pass; and great delays were experienced, before +the force intended for operations against Candahar were assembled, +at Quettah. So far, the advance had taken place through British +territory, as Quettah has long been occupied by us.</p> +<p>When the advance began, it was rapid. No opposition was +experienced by the way, until the column arrived within a few +hours' march of Candahar; and then the enemy's attack was feeble, +and easily repulsed. On the 9th of January, General Stewart entered +the city.</p> +<p>Candahar, though not the capital, is the chief town of +Afghanistan. It stands in a slightly undulating plain; and was, at +one time, a city of great importance and wealth. Its position is +the most important in Afghanistan. It bars the road to an enemy +advancing from the north, through Herat; and threatens the flank +and rear of one advancing against India, through Cabul. The country +around is extremely fertile and, were irrigation properly used, and +a railway constructed to India, Candahar and the surrounding +country would again become one of the gardens of the world.</p> +<p>The authorities of the city made their submission, as the column +approached it, and the army settled down to quiet occupation; +broken only by isolated attacks, upon individual soldiers, by +fanatical Ghazis. When peace was concluded, one of the conditions +distinctly insisted upon by the British general, and agreed to by +the Ameer, was that Candahar should remain in our possession. The +alleged advantage thus gained, and the territory thus acquired, +were afterwards abandoned by the British government succeeding that +which had so vigorously carried out the war.</p> +<p>The occupation of Candahar by the British had been insisted on, +at first, on the ground that, if Russia should make an advance +against India, the British nation would have ample cause to rue the +cession of Candahar; for it was declared that with this city +strongly fortified, and surrounded by outlying works, 10,000 +British troops there could arrest the progress of an invading army, +however large, until England had had full time to put forth all her +strength, and to assemble an army amply sufficient to secure the +safety of the most valuable of our possessions--the empire of +India.</p> +<p>It was said that, whatever allies Russia might have prepared for +herself, by intrigues among the princes of India, these would not +think of moving, so long as they knew that the fortress of Candahar +remained as a British bulwark against an invading force. It was +represented that, so long as this place held out, England would be +able to devote her whole force towards repelling the foreign +invader--instead of being obliged, simultaneously, to oppose him +and to put down a formidable rising in India, itself.</p> +<p>It was, however, not the universal opinion that the best policy +of England was to occupy this territory by an armed force; and +subsequent events, with the change of government in England, led to +a different determination.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch13" id="Ch13">Chapter 13</a>: The Massacre At +Cabul.</h2> +<p>At each village through which William Gale and his escort +passed, the inhabitants turned out, and hooted and yelled at the +prisoner; and it was with the greatest difficulty that the chief +protected him from personal violence. William himself was scarce +conscious of what was passing. The swinging action of the camel +added to his great weakness, and he would not have been able to +keep his seat on its back, had not his captors fastened him with +ropes to the saddle. Although the snow had only just melted on the +Shatur-Gardan Pass, in the valleys below the heat of the sun was +already great and, often as it poured down upon him, he lapsed into +a state of semi-consciousness; and drowsily fancied that he was +again in his canoe, tossing on the tiny waves, in the shelter of +the reef.</p> +<p>On the sixth day after the start, a shout from his guard aroused +him, as they emerged from a steep ascent amongst some hills. Before +him an undulating ground, dotted with villages, stretched for three +or four miles. At the foot of some steep hills, to the left of a +wide valley, was a large walled town which he knew to be Cabul. On +the hillside above it was a strong building: half fort, half +palace. This was the Bala-Hissar, the abode of the Ameer, and the +fortress of Cabul. In addition to the king's residence it contained +barracks, store houses, magazines, and many residences. Towards +this the cavalcade made its way.</p> +<p>They halted two miles from the town, and the chief sent his son +forward to the Ameer, to inform him that he had brought in an +English prisoner; and to request that an escort might be sent out, +lest he should be killed by the people on approaching the town. An +hour after the man had left, a troop of cavalry sallied out from +the gate of the Bala-Hissar, and rode rapidly to the spot where the +party had halted. Surrounding the camel on which William Gale was +mounted, they conducted it to the fortress.</p> +<a id="PicD" name="PicD"></a> +<center><img src="images/d.jpg" alt= +"Illustration: William Gale in the hands of the Afghans." /></center> +<p>When he was lifted down from his camel, Will was unable to +stand. Fever had set in again, and he was conveyed to an apartment +in a house near the royal residence. The Ameer was already +negotiating with the British, and orders were consequently given +that the prisoner should receive every attention. The king's own +doctor was ordered to attend him, and two attendants were told off +to take charge of him. The old chief received a recompense, for the +care which he had taken of the prisoner, which fully answered to +his expectations; and he returned home well satisfied with the +success of his policy.</p> +<p>For weeks, Will lay between life and death; and he was a mere +skeleton when, two months after his arrival, he was able for the +first time to sit up at the window, and look across the valley. +Very gradually, he recovered strength. He was well supplied with +food, and especially enjoyed the delicious fruits for which Cabul +is celebrated.</p> +<p>His attendants were a old man and his son, the latter a lad of +some fifteen years of age. The father did his duty, because ordered +to do so; but his scowling face often showed the hatred which he +felt of the Kaffir. The lad, however, took kindly to his patient. +He it was who for hours together would, while Will was at his +worst, sit by his bedside, constantly changing the wet cloths +wrapped round his head, and sometimes squeezing a few drops of the +refreshing juice of some fruit between his parched lips; and as his +patient turned the corner and became slowly convalescent, his +pleasure over the life he had saved, by his care, was very +great.</p> +<p>Like most soldiers in the expeditionary force, Will had picked +up a few words of Afghan; and had greatly increased his stock, +during the time he lay in the hut in the mountains. Alone now all +day with the boy, with nothing to do but to look out on the town +below, and the wide valley beyond, he made rapid progress; and was, +by the time he was strong enough to walk alone across the room, +able to hold some sort of conversation with his friend--for so he +had come to regard his devoted attendant.</p> +<p>One morning the boy came into the room in a state of great +excitement.</p> +<p>"English officers are coming," he said, "with soldiers."</p> +<p>"But I thought it was peace," Will exclaimed, delighted. "You +told me peace had been signed, at Gundamuk, two months ago."</p> +<p>"Yes, it is peace," the boy said. "The officers are coming in +friendship, to be here with the Ameer."</p> +<p>Will was greatly moved at the news. When he had heard, six weeks +before, that peace was signed, he had begun to hope that, some day +or other, he should again be able to return to India; but the news, +that some of his countrymen were close at hand, almost overcame +him.</p> +<p>The next day, which was the 24th of July--although Will had lost +all account of time--he saw vast numbers of people out on the +plain; and presently, far away, he beheld a large body of horsemen. +These, the lad told him, were the Ameer and his bodyguard, +accompanied by the English officers. Cannon were fired in salute, +and the garrison of the Bala-Hissar stood to their arms and, +presently, Will saw a cavalcade riding up from the gate of the +fortress. First came some Afghan cavalry; then rode a tall and +stately man, whom the boy told him was the Ameer. But Will had no +eyes for him. All his thoughts were centered on the white officer +who rode beside him: Major Sir Lewis Cavagnari, the English envoy. +Behind, among the chiefs of the Ameer's suite, rode two or three +other English officers; and then came a detachment of some +twenty-five cavalry, and fifty infantry of the Guides, a frontier +force consisting of picked men.</p> +<p>As they passed near his window, Will stood up with his hand to +his forehead, in salute. Major Cavagnari looked up in surprise, and +spoke to the Ameer. The latter said a few words in reply, and then +the cavalcade rode on to the palace. Ten minutes later two of the +Ameer's attendants entered, and told Will to follow them.</p> +<p>He had that morning, for the first time since his arrival in +Cabul, put on his uniform. He was still very weak but, leaning one +hand upon his attendant's shoulder, he followed the messengers. He +was conducted to a large room in the palace, where the Ameer and +his adviser, and the British officers were sitting.</p> +<p>"Well, my lad," Major Cavagnari said, kindly, "I hear you have +had a bad time of it. The Ameer tells me that you were taken +prisoner near Ali-Kheyl, that you were badly wounded, and that +after the snow melted you were brought down here. He says he gave +orders that everything should be done for you, but that you have +been very ill, ever since."</p> +<p>"I have been treated very kindly, sir," Will said, "and I am now +getting round. I owe my life chiefly to the care and attention of +the lad, here, who has watched over me like a brother."</p> +<p>Will's words were translated to the Ameer, who expressed his +satisfaction, and ordered a purse of money to be given to the boy, +in testimony of his approval of the care he had taken of his +patient. As Major Cavagnari saw that the young soldier was almost +too weak to stand, he at once told him to retire to his room, +adding kindly:</p> +<p>"I will ask the Ameer to assign you quarters in the same house +with us. We will soon bring you round, and make you strong and well +again."</p> +<p>The same evening Will was carried over--for the fatigue he had +undergone had been almost too much for him--to the large house +assigned to Major Cavagnari, his officers and escort. It was built +of wood, surrounded by a courtyard and wall. A room was assigned to +Will, on the same floor as that occupied by the officers. The +Afghan lad had received orders to accompany his patient, and remain +with him as long as he stayed in Cabul.</p> +<p>Will's progress towards recovery was now rapid. He had no longer +any cause for anxiety. He was carefully attended to by Doctor +Kelly, the surgeon of the Guides, who had accompanied the mission +as medical officer. The escort was commanded by Lieutenant +Hamilton; and Sir Lewis Cavagnari was accompanied by Mr. William +Jenkyns, of the Indian Civil Service, as his secretary. The care of +Doctor Kelly, and the influence of quinine and tonics quickly added +to Will's strength; but his best medicine was the sound of English +voices, and the kindness which was shown to him. In a fortnight he +was able to get about, as usual; and the doctor said that, in +another month, he would be as strong as ever.</p> +<p>For two or three weeks after Major Cavagnari's arrival in Cabul, +all went well; and it appeared as if the forebodings of those who +had predicted trouble and danger to the little body who had gone +up, as it were, into the lion's den, were likely to be falsified. +That the mission was not without danger the authorities, and Major +Cavagnari himself, were well aware; but it was important that the +provision in the treaty of Gundamuk, by which England secured the +right of maintaining a resident at Cabul, should be put into +operation. Besides, the Ameer had himself given the invitation to +Major Cavagnari, and had pressed the point warmly, giving the most +solemn promises of protection.</p> +<p>At any rate, for the first two weeks the soldiers of the escort +moved freely in the city, without molestation or insult; and it +appeared as if the population of Cabul were content with the terms +of peace which, indeed, imposed no burdens whatever upon them, and +was supposed to have inflicted no humiliation on their national +pride.</p> +<p>On the 5th of August, several regiments marched in from Herat. +These troops--which were considered the flower of the Afghan +army--had, in consequence of the distance of Herat from the seat of +war, taken no part whatever in the struggle. Upon the very day +after their arrival they scattered through the town, and were loud +in their expression of hostility to the terms of peace. Had they +been there, they said, the Kaffirs would have been easily defeated. +Why should peace have been made at the very first reverse, and +before the best fighting men had come to the front?</p> +<p>That evening Will Gale's young attendant came to him in his +room, looking very serious.</p> +<p>"What is the matter, Yossouf?"</p> +<p>The lad shook his head.</p> +<p>"Trouble is coming," he said. "The Heratee men are stirring up +the people, and the Budmashes are threatening that they will kill +the English."</p> +<p>"But the Ameer has promised his protection," Will said. "He has +sworn a solemn oath to stand by them."</p> +<p>"Yakoob Khan is weak," the boy said. "He was a great warrior, +once; but he has been in prison for many years and he is no longer +firm and strong. Some of the men round him are bad advisers. Yakoob +Khan is no better than a reed to lean upon."</p> +<p>The next day there were riots in the town. The Heratee men +taunted the people of Cabul with cowardice, and the excitement +spread in the city. The soldiers of the escort could no longer +stroll quietly through the bazaars; but were hooted at, and abused, +although of the same religion and race as the people around +them--for the Guide regiments were recruited from Pathans, and +other border tribes.</p> +<p>Day after day the position became more threatening. The men of +the escort were ordered no longer to go down into the town, where +their presence was the occasion of tumults. A native officer of one +of our cavalry regiments, who was spending his furlough at a +village near Cabul, came into the Bala-Hissar and told Major +Cavagnari that he feared, from rumors that reached him, that the +Heratee regiments would break into mutiny, and attack the +embassy.</p> +<p>The officer, who was a man of immense courage and coolness, +replied quietly:</p> +<p>"If they do, they can but kill the three or four of us here, and +our deaths will be revenged."</p> +<p>He, however, made representations to the Ameer as to the +threatening behavior of the Heratee troops; but Yakoob assured him +that he could rely thoroughly upon his protection, and that--even +should the Heratee troops break out in mutiny--he would at once +suppress the movement, with the Cabul regiments.</p> +<p>Yossouf became daily more anxious. Going into the town, to buy +fruits and other necessaries, he heard more of what was going on +than could the members of the embassy.</p> +<p>"Things are very bad," he said, over and over again. "It would +be better for you all to go away. Why does your officer stop here, +to be killed?"</p> +<p>"It is his duty to stay at his post," Will said. "He has been +sent here by the commander-in-chief. He is like a soldier on +outpost duty. He cannot desert his post, because he sees danger +approaching; but I wish, with all my heart, that an order would +come for his recall; not only because of the danger, but because I +am longing to be back again with my regiment and, although I am +strong enough to ride down to the Punjaub, now, I cannot go except +with Sir Lewis and his escort. Although it is peace, a single +Englishman could not travel down to Jellalabad, through the +passes."</p> +<p>Will had, from the first week after the arrival of the mission, +fallen into the position of an orderly-room sergeant. His duties +were little more than nominal, but he acted as assistant to Mr. +Jenkyns, and made copies and duplicates of reports and other +documents which were, from time to time, sent down to Jellalabad. +Being the only Englishman there, with the exception of the four +officers, these greatly relaxed the usual distance prevailing +between an officer and a corporal; and treated him as a civilian +clerk when in office, and with a pleasant cordiality at other +times. Except, indeed, that he messed alone, and kept in his own +room of an evening, he might have been one of the party.</p> +<p>Each day, he reported to Sir Lewis the rumors which Yossouf had +gathered in the town. In his reports to headquarters, Major +Cavagnari stated that trouble had arisen from the conduct of the +Heratee troops; but he scarcely made enough of the real danger +which threatened the little party. Had he done so, the embassy +would probably have been recalled.</p> +<p>"What have you got there, Yossouf?" Will asked one day, when his +follower returned with a larger bundle than usual.</p> +<p>"I have brought the uniform of an Afghan soldier," the boy +replied, "which I have purchased from the bazaar. It is for you. I +am sure that soon you will be attacked. The English are brave, but +there are only four of them. Their soldiers will fight, but what +can they do against an army? When the time comes, you must dress +yourself in these clothes, and I will try to conceal you."</p> +<p>"But I cannot do that, Yossouf," Will said. "It is very good of +you to try and aid me to escape; but I am a soldier, and must share +the fortunes of my officers, whatever they may be. If they fight, I +shall fight. If they are killed, I must be killed, too. I cannot +run away and hide myself, when the danger comes."</p> +<p>The lad hung his head.</p> +<p>"Then Yossouf will die, too," he said quietly. "He will not +leave his white friend."</p> +<p>"No, no, Yossouf," Will said, warmly; "you have nothing to do +with the business. Why should you involve yourself in our fate? You +can do me no good by sacrificing your life."</p> +<p>Yossouf shook his head.</p> +<p>"If," he said presently, "the time comes, and you see that it is +of no use any longer to fight, and that all is lost, would you try +to escape then?"</p> +<p>"Yes," Will said, "certainly I would. When all hope of further +resistance is gone, and fighting is useless, my duty would be at an +end; and if I could manage to escape, then, I should be justified +in trying to save my life."</p> +<p>Yossouf looked relieved.</p> +<p>"Very well." he said, "then, at the last, I will try and save +you."</p> +<p>"Still, Yossouf," Will said, "we must hope that it is not coming +to that. The Ameer has sworn to protect us, and he can do so. The +Bala-Hissar is strong, and he can easily hold it, with one or two +of his Cabul regiments, against the Heratee men. He has three or +four of these regiments here. He cannot be so false to his oath as +to allow his guests to be massacred."</p> +<p>Yossouf made a gesture which expressed his utter disbelief in +the Ameer, and then again went about his duties.</p> +<p>On the 2nd of September, on his return from the town, he +reported that there was great excitement among the people; and that +he believed that the night would not pass off, without trouble. +Major Cavagnari, to whom Will reported the news, sent in a message +to the Ameer--whose palace was within two or three hundred +yards--and begged him to take measures to secure the Bala-Hissar +against any attack by the Heratees.</p> +<p>The members of the escort, available for the defense of the +residency, were but about fifty men. Most of the cavalry were away. +Some were down the pass with despatches. The rest were stationed a +short distance off in the plain, as forage was difficult to obtain +in the fort.</p> +<p>The Ameer returned a curt message to Major Cavagnari, saying +that there was no cause for uneasiness. The latter, however, +doubled the sentries at the gate of the little enclosure.</p> +<p>Just as the officers were about to retire to rest, Yossouf--who +had, a short time, before gone out again, telling Will that he +would bring back news of what was going on, ran in.</p> +<p>"The Heratees are coming," he said. "The gates of the fort have +been left open. The Cabul men are all in their barracks. They are +pouring in at the gates. Do you not hear them?"</p> +<p>William Gale ran to the window, and could hear a loud and +confused noise of yelling and shouting. He ran in to the envoy's +room, and warned him that the Heratees were at hand. Without the +loss of a moment's time, Lieutenant Hamilton got his men under +arms; and posted them at the upper windows of the house, where +their fire would command the approaches to the gate.</p> +<p>Quickly as this was done, the Afghans were close at hand by the +time that each man was at his post; and instantly opened a +scattering fire at the residency, shouting to the soldiers to come +out and join them, and to bring out the Kaffir officers to be +killed. The Pathans were, however, true to their salt and, in +reply, opened a steady fire upon the mass of the enemy. With wild +yells the Afghans rushed at the gate but, so steadily and rapidly +did the defenders shoot, from the upper windows and loopholes cut +in the gate, that the assailants were forced to fall back.</p> +<p>"That's right, my lads," Major Cavagnari said cheerfully to his +men; "we can hold the place for some time, and the Ameer will bring +the Cabul regiments down in no time, and sweep away these +rascals."</p> +<p>The Afghans, now some thousands strong--assisted by all the +Budmashes, and turbulent portion of the population of +Cabul--surrounded the house on all sides, and kept up a heavy and +incessant fire; which was coolly and steadily returned by the +Guides. After an hour's fighting, there was a sudden roar above the +rattle of musketry; followed by another, and another. +Simultaneously came the crash of shells. One burst in the house, +the other tore through the gate. Still there was no sign of the +Cabul regiments.</p> +<p>Eight or ten guns were brought to play on the little garrison. +The gate was broken down, and nearly half the force of the house +were already killed, or wounded, by the musketry and shell fire. +Still they continued the defense Over and over again, the Afghans +swarmed up close to the gate; only to fall back again, before the +steady fire of the Snider rifles of the Guides. Major Cavagnari +went from room to room, encouraging the men; while the other +officers and Will Gale, taking rifles which had fallen from the +hands of men no longer able to use them, set an example of cool and +steady firing to their men.</p> +<p>For four hours the unequal contest continued; then a cry arose, +from the men, that the house was on fire. It was but too true. A +shell had exploded in the lower part of the house, and had ignited +the woodwork; and the fire had already obtained so firm a hold that +it was impossible to extinguish it. A few of the men continued +their fire from the windows, to the last; while the rest carried +their wounded comrades out into the courtyard. As the flames shot +out from the lower windows, the yells of the Afghans rose higher +and higher; and a fearful storm of lead and iron swept down upon +the little band, who were now plainly visible in the light of the +flames. Even now the enemy did not dare, although numbering +hundreds to one, to come too close upon them, though they flocked +up close to the gate.</p> +<p>"Now, lads!" Major Cavagnari exclaimed, "let us rush out, and +die fighting hand to hand; better that than to be shot down +defenseless, here."</p> +<p>Thus saying he led the way, and charged out upon the crowded +foe. There were but Lieutenant Hamilton and eight men to follow +him. All the rest had fallen. Doctor Kelly had been shot in the +house, while dressing the wound of one of the soldiers. Mr. Jenkyns +had fallen outside.</p> +<p>Will Gale had twice been wounded, but was still on his feet and, +grasping his musket, he rushed forward with his comrades. A figure +sprang out just as he reached the gate and, with a sudden rush, +carried him along for some paces. Then he stumbled over a fragment +of the wall, and fell just at the corner of the gate--which had +swung inward, when burst open by the enemy's shell. Confused and +bewildered, he struggled to regain his feet.</p> +<p>"Keep quiet, master!" Yossouf's voice said, in his ear. "It is +your only chance of safety."</p> +<p>So saying, he dragged Will into the narrow space between the +gate and the wall; then, as he rose to his feet, he wrapped round +him a loose Afghan cloak, and pressed a black sheepskin cap far +down over his face.</p> +<p>In a minute there was the sound of a fierce struggle, without. +The shots of the revolvers of the two English officers rang out, in +quick succession, mingled with the loud report of the Afghan +muskets. The savage yells rose, high and triumphant. The last of +the gallant band, who had for hours defended the embassy, had +fallen. Then there was a rush through the gate, as the Afghans +swarmed into the courtyard, till the space around the burning house +was well-nigh full.</p> +<p>Unperceived, Will Gale and Yossouf stepped from behind the gate +and joined the throng and, at once, made their way into the +stables, where several of the Budmashes were already engaged in +their work of plunder. Yossouf caught up three or four horse rugs, +and made them into a loose bundle; and signed to Will to do the +same. The young soldier did so, and lifted them on his shoulder, so +as to partly hide his face. Then he followed Yossouf into the +courtyard again.</p> +<p>Already there was a stream of men with saddles, rugs, muskets, +and other plunder making their way out, while others were still +thronging in. Joining the former, Will and his guide were soon +outside the enclosure At any other time, his disguise would have +been noticed, at once; but in the crowd his legs were hidden, and +all were too intent upon plunder, and too excited at their success, +to notice him.</p> +<p>Once outside the wall, he was comparatively safe. The light +thrown over the courtyard, by the blazing house, made the darkness +beyond all the more complete. Keeping carefully in shadow, Yossouf +led him along to a clump of bushes, in a garden a hundred yards +from the house. Stooping here, he pulled out a bundle.</p> +<p>"Here," he said, "is the uniform. Put it on, quickly!"</p> +<p>It was but the work of a minute for Will to attire himself in +the uniform of the Afghan soldier. He had still retained the +musket, which he had in his hand when Yossouf had leaped upon him; +and as he now went on with his guide he had no fear, whatever, of +being detected. He still carried the bundle of rugs on his +shoulder.</p> +<p>As they walked round towards the lower gate of the Bala-Hissar, +they met numbers of villagers and townspeople thronging in. These +had waited to hear the issue of the attack before leaving their +homes but, now that the arrival of the plunderers from the +residency, and the cessation of the fire, told of the successful +termination of the assault, they flocked up to join in the +rejoicings over the annihilation of the Kaffirs.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch14" id="Ch14">Chapter 14</a>: The Advance Upon +Cabul.</h2> +<p>Throughout the long hours of the night of the 2nd of September, +while the roll of musketry and the roar of cannon had gone on, +without a moment's pause, just outside the walls of his palace, +Yakoob Khan had made no movement, whatever, to protect his guests +or fulfil his own solemn promises. Silent and sullen, he had sat in +his council chamber.</p> +<p>The disgrace of a broken promise is not one which weighs heavily +upon an Afghan's mind, and it is not probable that the thought of +his tarnished honor troubled him, in the slightest degree; but he +knew that the massacre which was being perpetrated at his door +would be avenged, and that the English troops, which had so easily +beaten the army which his father had spent so many years in +preparing, would be set in movement against Cabul the moment the +news reached India. He cannot but have dreaded the consequences. +But he apparently feared, even more, to incur the hostility of the +Heratee regiment, by interfering to save their victims.</p> +<p>Again and again during the night, his wisest councilors besought +him to call upon the loyal Cabullee regiments to act against the +Heratees, but in vain. It is doubtful whether Yakoob was previously +informed of the intended massacre, but there is strong reason to +believe that he was so. The proofs, however, were not clear and +definite. His conduct cost him his throne, and condemned him to +remain to the end of his life a dishonored pensioner, and +semi-prisoner, in India.</p> +<p>Many eager questions were asked of Will and his companion, as +they made their way down to the gate of the Bala-Hissar. Yossouf +took upon himself to answer them, and they passed through the gate +without the slightest suspicion.</p> +<p>"Which way now?"</p> +<p>"I think it will be safest to go into the city. We might lie hid +for a few days in some deserted hut but, sooner or later, our +presence there would excite comment. It will be best, I think, to +go into the city. In the quarters of the Parsee merchants there are +assuredly some who would give you shelter. Domajee--who was the +contractor for the supply of the mission--would, I should think, be +best to go to. There is little danger, for none will suspect your +presence there. His servants are all Hindoos."</p> +<p>"That is the best place, Yossouf. I have been down several times +to Domajee, and he is certainly devoted to the English. We can but +try him."</p> +<p>The first dawn of morning was breaking, when Will and his +faithful friend arrived at the door of the Parsee trader, in the +Hindoo quarter of Cabul. The doors were fastened and barred, for it +was impossible to say whether the attack upon the mission--which +had been heard going on, all night--might not be followed by a +fanatic outbreak against the Hindoo and Parsee traders, in the +Hindoo quarter. Therefore, there was little sleep that night.</p> +<p>Yossouf knocked gently at the door.</p> +<p>"Who is there?" a voice at once inquired, from within.</p> +<p>"I come on urgent business with Domajee," Yossouf replied. "Open +quickly, there are but two of us here."</p> +<p>There was a slight pause, and then the door was opened; and +closed, immediately the two visitors had entered. A light was +burning in the large anteroom, as they entered it; and several +Hindoos--who had been lying, wrapped up in cloths, on the +floor--rose to their feet to inspect the newcomers. A moment later +the trader, himself, came down the stairs from an apartment +above.</p> +<p>"What is it?" he asked.</p> +<p>He did not pause for an answer. The light from the lamp he +carried fell upon Will's face, now white as a sheet from loss of +blood. With the one word, "Follow," the Parsee turned on his heel, +and led the way upstairs.</p> +<p>"Has the mission been captured?" he asked, as they entered an +empty room.</p> +<p>"Yes," Will replied, "and I believe that I am the only +survivor."</p> +<p>The fatigue of climbing the stairs completed the work caused by +prolonged excitement and loss of blood and, as he spoke, he +tottered; and would have fallen had not Yossouf seized him and, +with the assistance of the Parsee, laid him on a couch. In a few +words, Yossouf informed the trader of what had happened; and +satisfied him that no suspicion could arise, of the presence of one +of the British in his house. As the residency had been burnt down, +and the bodies of those who had fallen within it consumed, no one +would suspect that one of the five Englishmen there had effected +his escape; and it would be supposed that Will's body, like that of +Doctor Kelly, had been consumed in the flames.</p> +<p>The Parsee was sure that Cabul would soon be reoccupied by the +British and--putting aside his loyalty to them--he felt that his +concealment of an English survivor of the massacre would be greatly +to his advantage, and would secure for him the custom of the +English, upon their arrival at the town.</p> +<p>He first descended the stairs; and warned his Hindoo followers, +on no account, whatever, to breathe a word of the entry of +strangers there. Then he again returned to the room, where Yossouf +was sprinkling water on Will's face, and was endeavoring to recover +him to consciousness.</p> +<p>"There is blood on the couch," the trader said. "He is wounded, +and is suffering from its loss. See! The sleeve of his coat is +soaked with blood, but I see no mark on the cloth."</p> +<p>"No," Yossouf replied; "he has put on that uniform since the +fight."</p> +<p>"Go downstairs," the trader said; "my wife and daughter will see +to him."</p> +<p>As soon as Yossouf left the room, Domajee's wife and daughter +entered, with many exclamations of surprise and alarm. They were at +once silenced by the trader, who bid them cut off the wounded man's +uniform, and stanch his wounds.</p> +<p>Will had been hit in two places. One ball had passed through the +left arm, fortunately without injuring the bone. The other had +struck him in the side, had run round his ribs and gone out behind, +inflicting an ugly-looking but not serious wound--its course being +marked by a blue line on the flesh, behind the two holes of entry +and exit.</p> +<p>The wounds were washed and bound up, some cordial was poured +between his lips and, ere long, he opened his eyes and looked +round, in bewilderment.</p> +<p>"You are safe, and among friends," the Parsee said. "Drink a +little more of the cordial, and then go off quietly to sleep. You +need have no fear of being discovered, and your friends will be +here, ere long."</p> +<p>Four of the Hindoo servants now, at the order of the trader, +came upstairs and, lifting the couch, carried Will to a cool and +airy chamber, in the upper story of the house. Here a soft bed of +rugs and mattresses was prepared, and Will was soon in a quiet +sleep, with Yossouf watching by his side.</p> +<p>It was but twenty-four hours after the massacre that a +well-mounted native, from Cabul, brought the news over the +Shatur-Gardan Pass into the Khurum valley. Thence it was +telegraphed to Simla and, in a few hours, all India rang with it. +Not an instant was lost in making preparations for avenging the +murder of the British mission. On the same day, orders were sent to +Brigadier General Massy--at that time commanding the field force in +the Khurum valley--to move the 23rd Punjaub Pioneers, the 5th +Ghoorkas, and a mountain battery to the crest of the Shatur-Gardan +Pass, and to entrench themselves there.</p> +<p>A day or two later, the 72nd Highlanders and the 5th Punjaub +Infantry ascended the Peiwar-Khotal, to Ali-Kheyl, to secure the +road between the Khotal and the pass. The 72nd then moved forward, +and joined the 23rd Pioneers and 5th Ghoorkas on the Shatur-Gardan; +and on the 13th General Baker arrived there, and took the command, +but some time was needed before the advance could commence.</p> +<p>As is usual with the British, the great transport train--which +had, with such pains, been collected and organized for the war--had +been dispersed, immediately peace was signed; and the whole work +had now to be recommenced. Vast numbers of animals had been used +up, during the campaign; and there was the greatest difficulty in +obtaining the minimum number which was required before the troops +could move. At last, General Roberts managed to collect, in the +Punjaub, 2000 mules and 700 camels and bullocks. The tribes in the +Khurum valley, too--who had been kindly treated, and were well +satisfied with the change of masters--furnished many animals for +the transport of stores, as far as the Shatur-Gardan.</p> +<p>The news had thrown the Gilgis, and other tribes among the +mountains beyond the Peiwar-Khotal, into a state of ferment; and +several determined attacks were made, by them, upon convoys on +their way up to the head of the pass. These, however, were always +successfully repulsed by the baggage guards, with considerable loss +to the assailants and, on the 26th September--three weeks from the +date of the massacre--General Roberts joined the troops at +Ali-Kheyl, and moved forward to the Shatur-Gardan.</p> +<p>During this time two or three letters had been received from the +Ameer, who wrote to General Roberts deprecating any advance of the +British troops, and saying that he was trying to restore order, to +put down the mutinous Heratee troops, and to punish them for their +conduct. As, however, the details which had been received of the +massacre showed that the Ameer had behaved in a most suspicious--if +not in a most treacherous--manner, at the time of the massacre; and +that if he possessed any authority, whatever, over the troops, he +had not attempted to exercise it, no attention was paid to his +letters.</p> +<p>The advanced party of the invading force moved down from the +Shatur-Gardan Pass. It consisted of the 12th and 14th Bengal +Cavalry, two guns of the Royal Horse Artillery, two companies of +the 72nd Highlanders, and the 5th Punjaub Native Infantry. The road +was found to be extremely steep and difficult, and much labor was +necessary before it could be made practicable for guns and wheeled +carriages. No enemy was encountered, and the little force encamped +at night in the Logan valley; over which the cavalry skirmished, +far ahead, but found no foes awaiting them.</p> +<p>On the following day they made another march forward, the +brigades of Generals Baker and Macpherson from the pass into the +valley. The advance force halted at Zerghun-Shah and, soon after +they had done so, some of the cavalry rode in, with the surprising +news that the Ameer was close at hand.</p> +<p>Half an hour later Yakoob Khan, attended by some of his +principal nobles, rode into camp. He was received with the honor +due to his rank but, personally, General Roberts greeted him with +great coldness. The Ameer stated that he came into camp because he +could not control the soldiery of Cabul; and that, therefore, he +had left the place and come in, to show his friendship for the +English. Whatever may have been the motives for his coming, they +were never fully explained. Circumstances which afterwards occurred +strongly confirmed the suspicion that he meditated treachery.</p> +<p>He was treated honorably; but the guard of honor which was +assigned to him was, in fact, a guard over him and, from that time, +he was virtually a prisoner. General Roberts declined, altogether, +to discuss with him the events of the massacre of Cabul; saying +that this was a matter which could not now be entered into, but +would be fully investigated on the arrival at the Afghan +capital.</p> +<p>The following day, the brigades of Generals Baker and Macpherson +joined the advance at Zerghun-Shah. The amount of transport +available was only sufficient for half the baggage of the army; and +it was necessary, therefore, to move forward in two divisions--the +one advancing a day's march, and then halting; while the animals +went back to bring up the baggage of the second division, on the +following day.</p> +<p>A proclamation was now issued by the general, and sent forward +among the people of the valley; saying that the object of the +expedition was only to punish those concerned in the massacre at +Cabul, and that all loyal subjects of the Ameer would be well +treated.</p> +<p>On the 3rd of October Macpherson's brigade, with the cavalry, +reached Suffed-Sang. Here they halted, while the baggage animals +went back to bring up General Baker's brigade. The attitude of the +people of the valley had now become very threatening. Great numbers +of hill tribesmen had come down; and on this day an attack was made +upon the rear guard, but was beaten off with loss.</p> +<p>That the natives were bitterly hostile was undoubted; but they +were, for the most part, waiting to see the result of the +approaching fight. The Heratee and Cabul regiments were confident +that they would defeat the approaching column. They had a great +advantage in numbers, had been drilled in European fashion, were +armed with Enfields, and had an enormous park of artillery at their +disposal. They were able to choose their own fighting ground, and +had selected a spot which gave them an immense advantage. They +were, therefore, confident of victory.</p> +<p>Had the British troops been beaten, the inhabitants of the Logan +valley were prepared to rise, to a man. The Ghilzais and other hill +tribes would have swept down upon the line of retreat; and few, if +any, of the British force would have returned to tell the tale.</p> +<p>The next day Baker's division had the post of honor, and made a +short march to Chaurasia. Beyond this village, the enemy had taken +up their position. Three miles beyond the village the valley +ends--a mass of hills shutting it in, with only a narrow defile +leading, through them, to the plain of Cabul beyond. Upon both +sides of the defile the enemy had placed guns in position, and +lined the whole circle of the hills commanding the approach to +it.</p> +<p>Mountaineers from their birth, they believed that--although the +British infantry might possess a superiority in the plain--they +could be no match for them on the steep hillside; and they no doubt +thought that no attempt would be made to storm so strong a +position, but that the British column would march straight up the +valley into the defile, where they would be helplessly slaughtered +by the guns and matchlock men on the heights.</p> +<p>Judging from their own tactics, they had reason for the belief +that their position was an impregnable one. In their hill fights +the Afghans never come to close quarters. Posted behind rocks and +huge boulders, the opposing sides keep up a distant musketry +duel--lasting, sometimes, for days--until one side or the other +becomes disheartened with its losses, or has exhausted its +ammunition. Then it falls back, and the other claims the victory. +The idea that English soldiers would, under a heavy fire from their +concealed force, steadily climb up the broken mountainside, and +come to close quarters, probably never entered into their +calculations.</p> +<p>At daybreak on the 6th, a working party were sent forward to +improve the road towards the defile. But they had scarcely started +when the cavalry patrol in advance rode in, and announced that the +enemy were in great strength on the hills, and had guns in position +to command the road.</p> +<p>General Roberts had now a choice of two courses--he could either +attack the whole Afghan force, with the one division at hand; or he +could wait until joined by Macpherson's brigade, next morning. The +feat of carrying such a position in face of an immensely superior +force, with only half of his little command, was a very serious one +but, upon the other hand, every hour added to the number of hillmen +who swarmed upon the flanks of the army, just beyond musket range. +A delay of twenty-four hours would bring the whole fighting force +of the tribesmen into the valley and, while attacking the enemy's +position in the front, he would be liable to an assault upon his +rear, by them.</p> +<p>Confident in the valor of his soldiers, he chose the first +alternative and, at eleven o'clock, his little force marched out +from the camp to attack the Afghan army. By this time the enemy's +position had been reconnoitered, and it was found to be too strong +for a direct attack. It was therefore resolved to ascend the hills +on both flanks, and so to drive their defenders back beyond the +defile. This, in any case, would have been the best mode of +assault; but against semi-savage enemies, flank attacks are +peculiarly effective. Having prepared for an assault in one +direction, they are disconcerted and disheartened by finding +themselves attacked in a different manner; and the fear of a flank +being turned, and the line of retreat thereby menaced, will +generally suffice to cause a rapid retreat.</p> +<p>General Baker, himself, took the command of the left attack. His +force consisted of four guns of Number 2 Mountain Battery, two +Gatling guns, the 7th company of Sappers and Miners, a wing of the +72nd Highlanders, six companies of the 5th Ghoorkas, 200 men of the +5th Punjaub Infantry, and 450 of the 23rd Pioneers. This was the +main column of attack.</p> +<p>The right column--under the command of Major White, of the 72nd +Highlanders--consisted of a wing of that regiment, 100 men of the +23rd Pioneers, three guns of the Royal Artillery, and two squadrons +of cavalry. This attack was intended only as a feint, and to +distract the attention of the Afghans from the main attack. A +strong reserve was left in Chaurasia, to guard the baggage and to +overawe the tribesmen.</p> +<p>As General Baker's column reached the foot of the hills, the +23rd--who led the advance, thrown out in skirmishing line--began to +climb the ascent. The enemy were armed with Sniders and Enfields, +and their fire was rapid and continuous; fortunately it was by no +means accurate, and our losses were small. The Afghans, in their +hill fighting, are accustomed to fire very slowly and +deliberately--taking steady aim, with their guns resting on the +rocks--and, so fighting, they are excellent shots. It is probable, +however, that the steady advance of our men towards them flurried +and disconcerted them; and that they thought more of firing +quickly, than of taking a correct aim.</p> +<p>The 72nd, pressing up the hill, were assisted by the fire of the +mountain guns and Gatlings, and by that of the Punjaubees in their +rear. Gradually the upper slopes of the hills were gained; and the +British troops, pressing forward, drove the Afghans back along the +crest. Several times they made obstinate stands, holding their +ground until the 72nd were close to them.</p> +<p>These, however, would not be denied. The massacre of the mission +at Cabul had infuriated the soldiers, and each man was animated +with a stern determination to avenge our murdered countrymen. For +an hour and a half the fight continued; and then the Afghans +abandoned the ridge, and fled in confusion. They rallied upon some +low hills, 600 yards from the rear; but the mountain guns and +Gatlings opened upon them and, the whole line advancing to the +attack, the enemy fell back.</p> +<p>Major White's column had been doing excellent service, on the +right. Although the attack had been intended only as a feint, it +was pushed forward so vigorously that it met with a success equal +to that which had attended the main column, on the left. The enemy +were driven off the hills on the right of the defile. Twenty guns +were captured, and the direct road cleared of the enemy.</p> +<p>Unfortunately, our cavalry was in the rear. The road through the +pass was difficult and, before they could get through into the +plain on the other side, the masses of Afghans had fallen back into +the strong villages scattered over it; and could not be attacked by +cavalry, alone. The enemy had from 9000 to 10,000 men upon the +ridge, including thirteen regiments of regular troops. They left +300 dead upon the field and, besides these, carried off large +numbers of killed and wounded, during the night. Upon our side only +20 were killed, and 67 wounded.</p> +<p>Had General Roberts had his whole force with him, he +could--after capturing the hills--have at once pushed forward, and +have attacked the enemy on the plain; and the Afghans, disheartened +and panic stricken, would have been completely crushed. With so +small a force in hand, and the possibility of a serious attack by +the tribes on his rear, General Roberts did not think it prudent to +advance farther; and the regiments which had taken the principal +part in the massacre of Cabul marched away, unmolested.</p> +<p>Enormously superior as they still were in numbers, they had no +thought of further resistance. The capture of positions which they +deemed impregnable, by a force so inferior in number to their own, +had utterly disheartened them; and the Heratee regiments which, but +the day before, had been so proudly confident of their ability to +exterminate the Kaffirs, were now utterly demoralized and panic +stricken. In the night the whole of the Afghan troops scattered, +and fled. Our cavalry--under General Massy--swept along the plain +of Cabul and, skirting the town, kept on as far as the Ameer's +great entrenched camp at Sherpur, three miles further along the +valley. Here 75 guns were captured.</p> +<p>In the morning, Macpherson arrived. General Roberts now advanced +with his whole force of infantry, and found that he had no longer a +foe before him. The Afghan army had disappeared.</p> +<p>There was no longer any occasion for haste, and the column +halted until all the baggage had been brought up through the +difficult defile. The total defeat of the Afghan army had overawed +the tribesmen, and these at once retired to their hills again. The +villagers, however, were bitterly hostile; and seized every +opportunity of firing at small bodies of troops, on cavalry +patrols. This continued for some time; and General Roberts, at +last, was obliged to punish it with severity and, in such cases, +all found with arms in their hands were at once shot.</p> +<p>On the 11th of October Sir Frederick Roberts and his staff, with +a cavalry escort, rode into the Bala-Hissar and, the next morning, +the British troops marched into the fort. The gates of Cabul stood +open, and a column was marched through the town, and formal +possession taken of it.</p> +<p>During the first five weeks which elapsed, after the massacre of +the mission, William Gale remained almost prostrate in the house of +the friendly Parsee trader. He had barely recovered his strength, +after his prolonged illness, when the attack was made; and the +events of that night, and the great loss of blood which he had +suffered, had reduced his strength to that of an infant. Under the +care of the Parsee and his family, however, he slowly but steadily +regained strength.</p> +<p>For the first month, but little news reached him from without. +Then a report came that the British had assembled, in considerable +force, on the crest of the Shatur-Gardan; and were going to move on +Cabul from that direction. Then, day by day, the tidings came in of +the advance of the force. It was reported, generally, that the +Ameer had gone out to meet them; with the intention of leaving +them, when the decisive moment, arrived and taking command of the +tribesmen, who would fall upon and annihilate them.</p> +<p>On the 6th the town was unusually quiet, and Will heard that the +Afghan army had moved out, to occupy the hills commanding the +approach through the defile; and that, with the aid of the +tribesmen, the British army was to be exterminated there.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch15" id="Ch15">Chapter 15</a>: The Fighting Round +Cabul.</h2> +<p>All day long, on the 6th of October, William Gale sat at an open +window in the upper story of the Parsee's house--facing west--and +listened to the distant roar of the battle; while all Cabul was in +a state of wild excitement, in the sure anticipation of victory. +Will felt equally confident as to the result of the battle. He knew +that--well led--a British force could be trusted to carry any +position held by the Afghans; and he felt sure that, even should he +fail to carry it by direct attack, the English general would, +sooner or later, succeed in turning it by flank movements.</p> +<p>About two o'clock in the afternoon, William noticed a change in +the character of the sounds in the town. In the Hindoo quarter all +had been quiet--for the inhabitants greatly feared that, in a burst +of fanaticism following a victory achieved over the British, the +Afghans might sack the Hindoo quarter, and murder its inhabitants. +Yossouf, however, had been all the morning out in the town; and +had, from time to time, brought in a report of the rumors current +there.</p> +<p>At first it was said that the British were being utterly routed, +that they were being exterminated by the Afghan fire, that the hill +tribes were sweeping down upon their rear, and that not a man would +escape. Presently the reports became more contradictory. The firing +was still heard, but it was no longer one continuous roll. Some +said that the British were annihilated; others that, repulsed in +their attack, they had fallen back to their camp but, soon after +two o'clock, Yossouf rushed up to William's room with the news that +the Afghans had been driven from the heights, and that the British +were in possession of these, and of the defile through them.</p> +<p>Yossouf had, throughout the morning, been swayed by conflicting +emotions and wishes. At one moment he hoped that his countrymen +might conquer; then the fear that, after victory, the Hindoo +quarter might be sacked, and his English friend discovered and +killed, overpowered his feeling of patriotism.</p> +<p>It must be remembered that Afghanistan has, for centuries, been +rather a geographical expression than a country. Its population is +composed of a great number of tribes, without any common feelings +or interest, and often engaged in desperate wars and conflicts with +each other. The two leading tribes--the Ghilzais and Duranees--had +long struggled for ascendency in the cultivated portion of the +country. For a long period the Ghilzais had had the supremacy, but +the Duranees were now lords of the country.</p> +<p>The mountain tribes, for the most part, held themselves entirely +independent; and although, in time, they gave a nominal allegiance +to the Ameer of Cabul, yet--as had been shown in the Khurum +valley--they hated their native masters, with an animosity far +exceeding that which they felt towards the British. That throughout +the war the tribesmen were ready, when they saw an opportunity to +attack English convoys and small columns, is true; but they were +animated by a love of plunder, rather than of country and, over a +considerable area of Afghanistan--notably at Candahar--the people, +in general, would have infinitely preferred the mild and just rule +of the English, to the military tyranny of Cabul.</p> +<p>Thus, Yossouf had grown up without understanding the meaning of +the feeling which we call patriotism. He had, it is true, been +taught to hate the unbelievers; but this feeling had disappeared, +on his acquaintance with Will Gale, and he now ranked the safety +and happiness of his friend far before any national consideration. +How weak is the feeling of patriotism, among the Afghans, is shown +by the fact that most of the British frontier troops consist of +Afghan hillmen; who are always ready, when called upon, to fight +desperately against their countrymen and co-religionists. Examples +of treachery, such as that exhibited by the two Pathans who fired +their guns, to warn their countrymen of the British advance up the +Spingawi Pass, are almost unknown.</p> +<p>It was, then, with a feeling of joy that Yossouf related, to his +English friends, the news of the defeat of the Afghan army. +Throughout the Hindoo quarter there was deep, but suppressed, +gladness at the news of the British victory; and this increased +when, as the night went on, it was known that the Afghan army was +totally dispersed, that the troops remaining in Cabul had fled, and +that the city was virtually open for the entrance of the +English.</p> +<p>When, on the 12th--with bands playing, and colors displayed--the +British troops marched through Cabul, Will would fain have gone out +and joined his countrymen. But the Parsee pointed out, to him, that +this would draw the attention of the Afghans to the fact that he +had been concealed by him; and that in case, at any time, the +British should evacuate Cabul and return to India, he would be a +marked man for the vengeance of the Afghans. Will therefore wrapped +up in a long cloak and, accompanied by Yossouf and the Parsee, left +the house after dark and, proceeding to the gate, walked out to the +Bala-Hissar.</p> +<p>Explaining who he was, Will was soon passed through the sentries +which had been set, at nightfall; and was conducted to the quarters +of the general. The latter was greatly surprised when he was told +that an English soldier, who had been present at the attack upon +the mission, wished to speak to him; and at once ordered Will to be +brought before him. Great was his surprise when he learned, from +the young soldier, that he had fought under him at the taking of +Peiwar-Khotal and, having been made prisoner near Ali-Kheyl, had +been brought to Cabul; and had joined the party of Sir Lewis +Cavagnari, on its arrival at that city. Still more that, having +been in the residency when the attack upon it was commenced by the +Heratee soldiery, he had managed to escape from the massacre of +that night.</p> +<p>After having first heard a complete outline of Will's story, the +general called in several of his staff--who had just finished +dinner--and then requested Will to give a full and detailed +description of his adventures. After he had concluded, Yossouf and +the Parsee were called in, and the general warmly expressed his +gratification at the kindness that they had shown to a wounded +English soldier, at the risk of their lives. He ordered that a +handsome present should be made to Yossouf, and told the Parsee to +call again in the morning, when the quartermaster general would be +told to arrange, with him, for the supply of such articles as the +country afforded for the use of the troops.</p> +<p>"Your regiment," he said to Will, "is, at present, at +Jellalabad. Whether it will come up here I do not yet know but, in +the meantime, you will be promoted to the rank of sergeant--which +is the least we can do, after what you have gone through--and you +will take your place with my staff orderly sergeants."</p> +<p>He then sent for one of the sergeants and gave Will into his +charge, telling him he would speak further with him, when he had +arranged the pressing business which the occupation of Cabul +entailed upon him.</p> +<p>Yossouf remained with Will, being--at his urgent request--placed +upon the roll as a native follower, of whom a considerable number +accompany each regiment in India. His duties were but nominal for, +when Will's story was well known, Yossouf became a most popular +character among the sergeants of the staff. The money which he had +received--in the first place from the Ameer, and now from General +Roberts--would secure his future. In Afghanistan animals are cheap; +and the owner of a small herd of oxen, sheep, or even goats is +regarded by his neighbors as a wealthy man. Therefore Yossouf +would, on the departure of the British, be able to settle down in a +position of comparative affluence.</p> +<p>Two days later General Roberts, being one evening disengaged, +sent for William Gale. He had been much struck with the bearing and +manner of the young soldier, and now requested him to give him a +full history of his antecedents.</p> +<p>"You have had a curious and eventful history," he said, when the +young sergeant had finished, "and appear to have conducted yourself +with great discretion, readiness, and courage. From what you tell +me of your conversation with Colonel Shepherd, I have no doubt that +he formed the same impression that I do, from your manner and +appearance--that you are of a respectable, if not of good +family--and I trust that you will some day discover a clue to your +parents. It seems to me that, had the authorities of the place +where you were left properly bestirred themselves, they ought to +have been able to find out who you are.</p> +<p>"However, that is not to the point, now. It is sufficient for me +that, from your manner and address, you would not be out of place +in any position. I shall, of course, report the fact of your having +fought by Major Cavagnari's side, in the attack upon him here; and +shall strongly recommend that a commission be granted you. I am +sure that, from your conduct hitherto, you will never do discredit +to any position in which you may find yourself.</p> +<p>"Say nothing to your fellow sergeants of what I have told you. +It is possible--although not probable--that my recommendation may +not be acted upon and, at any rate, some months must elapse before +an answer can be received."</p> +<p>William Gale returned to his quarters in a state of extreme +delight. The communication which General Roberts had made to him +was altogether beyond his hopes. He had, indeed, from the very day +that he enlisted, often hoped that, some time or other, he might +win for himself a commission; and take his place in the rank to +which he had, from his childhood, believed that he was, by birth, +entitled. The words and manner of his colonel had encouraged this +hope, but he had never dreamed that his promotion might be attained +so soon. It was but a year since he had enlisted, and five was the +very earliest at which he had even dreamed that a commission might +possibly be gained.</p> +<p>The next day he had been sent from the orderly room with a note +to the colonel of the 67th, which was the regiment now in quarters +in the Bala-Hissar; the rest of the force being encamped in the +plain, below. As he was walking across the open, he was suddenly +hurled to the ground with tremendous violence and, at the same +moment, a roar as loud as that of thunder sounded in his ears. +Bewildered and half stunned, he rose to his feet; while showers of +stones, beams, and other debris fell around him.</p> +<a id="PicE" name="PicE"></a> +<center><img src="images/e.jpg" alt= +"Illustration: One of the Gunpowder Magazines had Exploded." /></center> +<p>One of the gunpowder magazines had exploded. It had been known +that very large quantities of powder were stored in various +buildings at the Bala-Hissar and, at the moment of the explosion, a +body of engineers, under Captain Shafto, were examining the +buildings in which it was stored, and making preparation for the +removal of the powder. Singularly enough, no soldiers of the 67th +were killed but, of the Ghoorkas, who were on guard at the arsenal +at the time, twelve were killed and seven wounded. Shafto was, +unfortunately, killed.</p> +<p>The 67th were at once called out, and set to work to extinguish +the flames which had been kindled by the explosion--great damage +being done. The southern wall of the arsenal had been blown down, +and several buildings set on fire. Explosion followed explosion, +and the work of extinguishing the flames was an extremely dangerous +one.</p> +<p>In the afternoon another magazine blew up. Fortunately, no +troops were in its neighborhood at the time; but four Afghans were +killed, and several soldiers hurt, at a distance of three or four +hundred yards from the spot. Although it was never proved, it was +strongly believed that these explosions were caused by the Afghans +and--as large quantities of powder still remained in the +Bala-Hissar--it was determined that, for the present, the place +should be evacuated. The general therefore, with his staff and the +regiment in garrison, left the place and joined the camp in the +plain.</p> +<p>The little force at Cabul was now isolated. Troops were slowly +coming up the Khyber Pass to Jellalabad; where a division was to be +formed, destined in the spring to join the force at Cabul, should +it be necessary to carry on further operations.</p> +<p>Between Cabul and the Shatur-Gardan the natives were in a +restless and excited state. Two attacks, by 3000 men, had been made +on the garrison holding the crest of the latter position--three +hundred in number. These bravely sallied out, attacked the enemy in +the open, and killed large numbers of them. Still, great numbers of +the tribesmen were gathered round; and General Gough, with the 5th +Punjaubee Cavalry, the 5th Punjaubee Infantry, and four guns, was +therefore sent from Cabul to bring down, from the Shatur-Gardan, +the garrison and all the stores accumulated there. The pass, which +would shortly be closed by snow, was then to be deserted.</p> +<p>Several executions now took place, at Cabul, of men who were +proved to have shared in the attack on the embassy. Some of the +leading men of the place, who had instigated the troops to the +attack, were among those executed. Many of the villagers were also +hung, for shooting at detached bodies of our troops. A proclamation +had been issued by the general, on his first arrival, warning the +people that any attempt against our authority would be severely +punished; forbidding the carrying of weapons within the streets of +Cabul, or within a distance of five miles of the city gates; and +offering a reward for all arms belonging to the Afghan troops which +should be given up, and for the surrender of any person, whether +soldier or civilian, concerned in the attack on the embassy.</p> +<p>The position of the British force, at Cabul, was that of a body +holding only the ground they occupied, in the midst of a bitterly +hostile country. The Ameer was powerless and, indeed, his goodwill +was more than doubtful. He had, from his arrival in the camp, been +regarded as a prisoner--although treated with courtesy--and after +the battle of Chaurasia--feeling his own impotence, and being +viewed with hostility by both parties--he resigned his position as +Ameer, and asked to be sent to India, which was done. The +abdication of the Ameer really took place on the day the troops +entered Cabul, but it was not publicly known until the end of the +month; as nothing could be done, on the subject, until his desire +was communicated to the Indian authorities, and their views +concerning it ascertained.</p> +<p>From the moment of his arrival at Cabul, General Roberts had set +to work to prepare for the winter. He would, for four or five +months, be entirely cut off; and would have to rely upon himself, +alone. He had before him the terrible catastrophe which had, on the +same ground, befallen General Elphinstone's army; and knew that it +was possible--and indeed probable--that, with the memory of that +success before them, the Afghans would unite in another great +effort to annihilate the little force shut up in the heart of their +country.</p> +<p>Fortunately he had, in the Ameer's barracks at Sherpur, a +position which he was confident he could hold against any attacks +that could be made upon him. These extensive barracks had been +erected by Sheer-Ali for the use of his cavalry, but had never been +used. They consisted of a large square, three sides of which were +surrounded by a lofty wall--an isolated and rocky, steep hill +rising at the back, and closing the fourth side. The buildings were +amply large enough to contain the whole of General Roberts' force; +and there was abundant room for the stores, baggage animals, and +wagons.</p> +<p>The only fault was, indeed, that the extent of wall to be +defended was too long for the force at his disposal. Round two +sides the outer wall was complete but, on the third, it had not +been taken to its full height, nor had it been continued so as to +join the hill behind it.</p> +<p>Great efforts were made to bring in sufficient provisions and +forage for the winter; and expeditions were made up the Logan, +Maidan, and other valleys for the purpose. Winter was fast setting +in. Snow had begun to fall upon the hills, and ice formed on the +pools, every night. The natives of the valleys near were ready +enough to sell their grain, straw, and fuel; but few supplies came +in from a distance, as armed bands stopped all supplies on their +way. However, a sufficient amount of food and fuel was obtained, +and stored in Sherpur. Grain, too, was procured for the winter; and +the only article of which the supply was insufficient was chopped +straw, of which a very large quantity was required.</p> +<p>The attitude of the natives grew daily more hostile. Their +priests were preaching a revolt to the death, and recalling to the +people how their fathers had annihilated a British force, thirty +years before. Urged alike by fanaticism and a desire for plunder, +the natives over the whole country were seething with excitement; +and General Roberts saw that a crisis was approaching. The Afghans +could assemble at least 100,000 men; and among these would be +included all the troops of the Ameer's disbanded armies, armed with +weapons equal to our own, and burning to revenge the defeats which +had been inflicted upon them. To oppose them the English general +had less than 6000 men.</p> +<p>But though prepared for trouble, the storm, when it came, burst +suddenly upon the English. The enemy were known to be collecting in +great numbers, in the Maidan valley, and two columns were sent out +to attack them. One was commanded by Macpherson, the other by +Baker. Although they were to strike simultaneously at the enemy, +their route of march lay up different valleys--with a lofty +mountain range between them--so they could in no way cooperate with +each other. After they had started, General Massy was directed to +move out, with a small force of cavalry and a battery of horse +artillery, and cooperate with General Macpherson.</p> +<p>An hour after the cavalry had started General Roberts, himself, +rode out. He was accompanied by his usual escort, and by two +mounted orderly sergeants. One of these was William Gale. They had +only proceeded a short distance when they heard, some distance +ahead of them, the guns of the Royal Horse Artillery--with +Massy--at work; and the general at once rode forward, at a +gallop.</p> +<p>General Macpherson had found Mahomed Jan--one of the principal +leaders of the Afghans--with 10,000 men, near Chardeh. A fight +ensued. The guns shelled the enemy, but the water courses prevented +the cavalry with Macpherson acting; and Mahomed Jan, moving across +the hills, placed himself between Macpherson and Cabul. Shortly +afterwards General Massy--who had with him three troops of the 9th +Lancers, and forty-four men of the 14th Bengal Lancers, with four +guns under Major Smith-Wyndham--came in sight of a portion of +Mahomed Jan's force. It was clear that these had, in some way, +interposed themselves between the little force and Macpherson's +column; and Massy supposed that they were a party of fugitives, +flying before the force of Macpherson or Baker.</p> +<p>As they came streaming down the hill, he got his guns into +action. After a few shells had been fired, the enemy advanced in +full force. Four thousand men were extended in the shape of a +crescent, advancing in fairly good order; while behind was an +irregular mob, of some six thousand men.</p> +<p>The ground upon which General Massy found himself, at this time, +was singularly unfitted for the action of artillery. It was cut up +by deep water courses, and anything like rapidity of movement was +impossible. It would have been prudent had Massy--when he saw how +large was the force opposed to him--at once retired, until he came +to ground where his guns could be rapidly maneuvered but, relying +upon the effect of the shell, he remained in the position in which +he had first discovered the enemy. The shell pitched rapidly into +the thick of the Afghans, but no effect was produced in checking +their advance. They did not waver for a moment, but came steadily +on. The enemy's bullets were now dropping fast among the cavalry +and guns. Thirty of the 9th Lancers were dismounted, and opened +fire with their Martini carbines; but the enemy were too numerous +to be checked by so small a body of men.</p> +<p>At this moment, Sir Frederick Roberts arrived upon the spot. The +position was serious and, to retire the guns in safety, it was +absolutely necessary to check the advance of the enemy. General +Roberts therefore ordered Massy to send his cavalry at the enemy. +Colonel Cleland led a squadron of the 9th full at the advancing +mass, the Bengal Lancers following; while Captain Gough, with his +troop of the 9th, charged the enemy's left flank--but even the +charge of Balaclava was scarcely more desperate than this. Two +hundred and twenty men, however gallant, could not be expected to +conquer 10,000.</p> +<p>The three bodies of cavalry charged, at full speed, into the +midst of the enemy's infantry; who received them with a terrible +fire, which killed many horses and men. The impetus of the charge +bore down the leading ranks of the Afghans, and the cavalry tore +their way through the mass, until their progress was blocked by +sheer weight of numbers. A desperate melee took place--the troopers +fighting with their sabers, the Afghans with knives, and clubbed +muskets. Many of the soldiers were struck from their horses. Some +were dragged to their feet again, by their comrades; others were +killed upon the ground.</p> +<p>The chaplain of the force--the Reverend Mr. Adams--had +accompanied the troopers in the charge and, seeing a man jammed +under a fallen horse, he leaped from his saddle and extricated him; +and brought him off, in spite of the attack of several Afghans. For +this act of bravery he received the Victoria Cross, being the first +chaplain in the army who had ever obtained that decoration.</p> +<p>When the dust raised by the charging squadrons had subsided, it +was seen that the enemy were still advancing. The Lancers had +fallen back and, as the men galloped in, they rallied behind +Captain Gough's troop; which had kept best together, and had formed +up again between the guns and the enemy. Lieutenants Hersee and +Ricardo, and sixteen of their men, had been left dead upon the +ground. Colonel Cleland, Lieutenant Mackenzie, and seven of the +troopers were wounded. A second charge was ordered; but this time +it was not pushed home, as a wide water course checked the +advance.</p> +<p>Under cover of the first cavalry charge, Major Smith-Wyndham had +ordered two of the guns to be taken off and, as he now fell back +with the other two, one of them stuck in the water course. The +greatest efforts were made, with the horses which still remained +uninjured, to get the gun out; but the enemy were pressing close +on. Lieutenant Hardy was killed, by a shot through the head, and +the gun was abandoned. The other three guns were retired 400 or 500 +yards farther; but here they became hopelessly bogged in a channel, +deeper than any that had hitherto been met with. They were spiked, +and left in the water; and the drivers and gunners moved off with +the cavalry, just as the enemy poured down upon them.</p> +<p>Seeing the danger of the situation, and the large force of the +enemy, General Roberts had, on his first arrival, sent off a +trooper at full gallop to General Gough--who commanded at +Sherpur--ordering him to send out two hundred men of the 72nd +Highlanders, at the double, to hold the gorge leading direct from +the scene of conflict to Cabul. There was but a very small garrison +of British troops in the city and, had the enemy made their way +there, the townspeople would have risen, and a serious disaster +taken place.</p> +<p>After leaving the guns behind them, the cavalry retired steadily +towards the village at the head of the gorge; keeping up a hot +fire, with their carbines, on the enemy who pressed upon them.</p> +<p>"Ride back, Sergeant Gale," the general said, "and meet the +72nd. Hurry them up at full speed--every minute is precious."</p> +<p>William Gale rode back at full speed. Until a fortnight before, +he had never been on a horse; but the animal which he rode was well +trained and steady and, hitherto, he had had no difficulty in +keeping his seat, as he trotted along with the escort. It was a +different thing, now; for the ground was rough, and the horse going +at a full gallop, and he clung on to the pummel of the saddle, to +steady himself. As he passed through the village, he saw the +Highlanders coming along at a trot, half a mile further on; and was +soon beside Colonel Brownlow, who commanded them.</p> +<p>"The enemy are pressing the cavalry back, sir," he said as, with +difficulty, he pulled up his horse. "The general desires you to use +the greatest possible speed, as every moment is precious."</p> +<p>Panting and out of breath as the Highlanders were, they +responded to Colonel Brownlow's shout and, rushing forward almost +at racing speed, reached the village while the Afghans were still +100 yards beyond it. They instantly opened such a fire upon the +enemy that the latter ceased their advance, and soon fell back; and +Cabul was, for the moment, safe.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch16" id="Ch16">Chapter 16</a>: The Fight In The +Pass.</h2> +<p>The Afghan force, after half an hour's effort to carry the +village held by the Highlanders, moved off to their left and, +working along the hills, took post on the heights beyond +Bala-Hissar. In the meantime General Macpherson, having dispersed a +strong body of the enemy up the valley, marched back towards Cabul +and, coming across the scene of the late action, brought in the +bodies of the dead officers. The guns had already been carried off +for, as the enemy advanced, Colonel Macgregor--collecting a handful +of lancers and artillery men--worked round to their rear +and--dispersing a small body of the enemy, who had lingered at a +village near the guns--succeeded in extricating the cannon from the +swamp, and carried them off to Sherpur.</p> +<p>From the signal post established above Bala-Hissar, an order was +flashed to General Baker--who was many miles away--to inform him of +what had occurred, and to order him to march back, with all speed. +Late that evening he arrived, with his column; and the British +force was again united.</p> +<p>The next day, 560 men of Macpherson's brigade--composed of +portions of the 67th, the 72nd, the 3rd Sikhs, and 5th +Ghoorkas--were sent out to attack the enemy; who had established +themselves upon a lofty peak, south of Cabul. The Afghans occupied +the crest in strength and, hidden behind the hill, had 5000 or 6000 +men lying in wait, to attack the assailing party in the rear as +they pressed upwards.</p> +<p>The position was, however, too strong to be carried. After +several hours of fighting, the little British force had driven the +Afghans from the lower part of the hill; but were unable to mount +towards the crest, for ammunition was running short, and the enemy +were too strongly posted. General Roberts therefore ordered +Macpherson to hold the ground which he had gained, until next +morning, when more troops would be sent.</p> +<p>At eight o'clock in the morning, accordingly, General Baker +moved out from Sherpur, with a strong force, and attacked the +enemy's position in flank; while Macpherson continued his advance +in front. The Afghans fought desperately, and clung to their +position until the British were close up; when a desperate +hand-to-hand struggle took place, and the British became masters of +the position.</p> +<p>While the fighting had been going on, great masses of the enemy +had come down from the end of the valley, and threatened the road +between Sherpur and Cabul. The 9th Lancers made a magnificent +charge among them, broke them, and drove them back. Several other +brilliant charges were made, and the plain was kept clear of the +enemy. Captain Butson, however--who commanded--was killed, and two +other officers wounded.</p> +<p>With each hour that passed the position grew more serious, as +immense bodies of the enemy were seen, advancing from all sides. +The city was now in open revolt, and the small garrison there with +difficulty held their own.</p> +<p>One more effort was made to drive the enemy off the hills. Early +on the 15th General Baker, with 1200 infantry and eight guns, left +the cantonment. After very severe fighting, the enemy were driven +from their lowest positions but, as Baker advanced, a body of from +15,000 to 20,000 of the enemy marched out across the plain, towards +the position just captured. Steadily they advanced, and the shells +which our mountain guns sent among them, and the volleys poured +down from the face of the hill, did not suffice to check them in +the slightest. Reassured by their own enormous numbers, and feeling +that success was in their grasp, they pressed forward; and +desperate fighting took place. A position held by the 5th Punjaub +Infantry was carried by their attack, and two guns were lost; but +the rest of the positions were maintained.</p> +<p>Seeing that it was impossible to hold the Bala-Hissar and Cabul, +in the face of the hordes opposed to him--which were estimated, by +the general himself, as numbering 80,000 men; but which the +Afghans, themselves, afterwards acknowledged were between 100,000 +and 120,000--General Roberts determined to concentrate his troops +at Sherpur. Baker was ordered to maintain the position he held, at +all costs, until the troops from the Bala-Hissar were withdrawn. +This he did; and although, as he fell back, the Afghan hordes +swarmed round him, he fought his way back to Sherpur and, by +nightfall, all the British force were safely gathered in the +cantonments there.</p> +<p>Two days previously, General Roberts had telegraphed for the +regiments most advanced in the passes, below, to come forward. They +arrived on the morning of the 16th, and the general had no longer +any anxiety as to his ability to hold the cantonments--for months, +if necessary--against the attacks of the Afghans.</p> +<p>Had these attacked on the morning following what was virtually a +victory--whilst still flushed with triumph and excitement--it would +have needed all the efforts of the English to hold their position, +against so formidable an attack. The Afghans, however, contented +themselves with occupying several walled villages near the +cantonment, and keeping up an incessant fire upon it. Meanwhile, +their main body indulged in wild excesses in Cabul--sacking the +Hindoo quarter, and plundering all the shops, without much +distinction of nationality.</p> +<p>Thus, three days elapsed; the British making the most of the +time afforded them, by strengthening the weak points of their +defenses Lines of wagons were placed in the gap between the +unfinished wall and the foot of the hill. Wires were stretched in +all directions, and chevaux-de-frise erected beyond.</p> +<p>On the 18th the enemy came down in force and, for some hours, a +tremendous musketry fire was kept up at the position; but the fire +of the musketry and guns, from the walls, was so hot that they did +not venture upon an attack.</p> +<p>The following day General Baker sallied out and attacked a +fortified post, a few hundred yards from the wall. From this place +the enemy had greatly annoyed the garrison. After some severe +fighting the Afghans were driven out, and the place blown up.</p> +<p>On the evening of the 22nd the general received news that the +Afghans, having prepared a great number of ladders for the assault, +intended to attack that night. There had been several similar +warnings but, this time, the news proved correct. A signal fire was +lit upon one of the heights at four in the morning and, at five +o'clock, the plain was covered with the enemy. Quietly they crept +up in the darkness, towards the walls; and at six o'clock a +prodigious shouting was heard, and from the villages, orchards, and +enclosed ground upon all sides, the enemy dashed forward to the +assault.</p> +<p>As they approached, they opened fire on all sides; pressing +chiefly towards the weak point, near the foot of the hills. But, +tremendous as was the roar of the Afghan fire, it was drowned by +the roll of musketry which broke from the whole circuit of the +walls; where the British troops, rifle in hand, had been lying for +three hours, waiting the attack. So terrible was the storm of lead +that swept the plain that the Afghans paused, in their advance. For +two hours they remained around the walls--yelling, shouting, and +firing heavily--but all the efforts of their leaders could not +induce them to rise from the ground, and hazard a charge. Many +dropped within eighty or ninety yards of the wall but, beyond that, +the bravest dared not advance.</p> +<p>When morning broke, the welcome news was brought down--from the +outlook on the top of the hill--that far across the plain could be +seen the tents of the force of General Gough; who was coming up +through the passes, to the relief of the garrison. The news had +reached the assailants, also. Considerable bodies of the enemy were +observed moving out from Cabul, as if with the intention of +attacking the relieving force.</p> +<p>The assailants of the British position--finding their inability +to produce the smallest impression--were now beginning to waver; +and General Gough ordered the cavalry and horse artillery to go +out, by the road which led through a gorge in a hill behind, and to +sweep round and take them in the rear.</p> +<p>This they did, with immense success. At the moment that they +fell upon the enemy, the British infantry sallied out from the +cantonment and attacked them in front. A panic seized the Afghans. +In a few minutes the whole plain was covered with flying fugitives; +among whom our cavalry swept backward and forward, cutting them up +in all directions; while the fire of our infantry, and of the guns +on the walls, searched them through and through, whenever they +attempted to gather in a knot, and make a stand.</p> +<p>By nightfall, the whole of the Afghans had either fled to the +hills, or were driven into Cabul. Upon the following day General +Gough's force marched in but, before their arrival, it was found +that the enemy had again evacuated the city; and the British were, +as before, masters of the position. After the decisive defeat which +had been inflicted upon them, and the dispersion of the great force +which had gathered, confident of victory, there was little fear of +any further attempt on the part of the enemy. They had brought +their whole force into the field and, as this was defeated and +dispersed, before the arrival of General Gough with his +reinforcements, it was evident that success could not be hoped for +against the united strength of the English.</p> +<p>The time passed quietly, now. The Bala-Hissar and Cabul were +reoccupied and, as the natives were cowed by the crushing defeat +they had experienced, there was no longer any repetition of the +insolent and defiant manner which they had, before, manifested.</p> +<p>On the 3rd of January a message was brought to the orderly room +that the general wished to see Sergeant Gale. Upon his presenting +himself at the general's quarters, Sir Frederick Roberts--to his +surprise--at once advanced, and shook him warmly by the hand.</p> +<p>"Mr. Gale," he said, "I am very happy to inform you that the +Horse Guards have acted upon my recommendation, seconded by that +which was sent in by your colonel--who wrote at once, upon +receiving a notification from me of the step I had taken, saying +that you had distinguished yourself very highly, in the attack upon +the Peiwar-Khotal, and that he was convinced that you would make, +in all respects, an excellent officer. With my despatches that have +just come in, I have received a notification that my request has +been attended to; together with a copy of the Gazette, in which you +are appointed to the 66th Regiment.</p> +<p>"I have to congratulate you, sir. You are now an officer; and +will, I am quite sure, do every credit to my recommendation."</p> +<p>The young soldier was, for a moment, too moved at the tidings to +speak coherently; but he murmured his thanks to the general for his +kindness.</p> +<p>"Do not say anything about that," the general said, heartily. +"It is a pleasure, to me, to have been able to advance a promising +young soldier.</p> +<p>"I am only sorry that you are not gazetted to a regiment in my +own division. The 66th are at Candahar; and unfortunately they will +not, I understand, form part of a column with which General Stuart +will advance, in the spring, up the valley through Ghuzni to this +place. Had it been so, it would have been best for you to wait +their arrival here but, as it is, you had better go down the pass +to India, and work round and join your regiment. It is a long road, +but it is always best for a young officer to be with his +regiment--especially when in the field--and it is possible that +they may have their share of fighting, round Candahar.</p> +<p>"And now, there is one thing more. You will have to get an +outfit, and there will be the expense of your travel, until you +join your regiment. There will be no difficulty about an outfit. +This you can procure easily, on the sale of some officer's +effects.</p> +<p>"By the by, poor young Thompson, who died yesterday, was about +your size; and you had better bid a lump sum for the whole of his +kit. I shall be happy to be your banker for that, and the needful +sum for your traveling expenses. When you join your regiment you +will, of course, be able to draw your pay, from the date on which +you were gazetted."</p> +<p>Will thanked the general very heartily for his offer, but said +that he had 100 pounds standing at his account at the bank of +Hindostan, which had been presented to him by the owners of the +vessel in which he arrived there; and that this would be more than +sufficient for all his needs, if the genera] would kindly authorize +the staff paymaster to cash his drafts upon the bank.</p> +<p>This request was at once granted. The paymaster of Lieutenant +Thompson's regiment estimated that the effects of the young officer +would sell, at auction, for about 20 pounds; and this sum William +Gale gladly paid, thereby obtaining a complete outfit of regimental +and civilian clothes, and under linen of all descriptions. Another +30 pounds bought him a horse and saddlery while, for 5 pounds, he +obtained a rough pony for the use of Yossouf--who steadily refused +to leave him, although Will pointed out to him that, glad as he +should be to have him with him, it would be far more to his +advantage to remain among his people at Cabul, where he had means +of settling comfortably.</p> +<p>Upon the following day--having obtained his new uniform, which +he found required no alteration to fit him fairly--William Gale +dined with General Roberts; who had kindly invited him in order to +introduce him, in his new position, to the officers of his staff He +was obliged to remain three or four days longer at Sherpur, until a +strong escort, with sick, was going down through the passes to +Jellalabad. His baggage was stowed upon a camel and, after a kind +adieu from General Roberts, and a very cordial one from the staff +sergeants--among whom he had worked for three months--he started +with the convoy for the lower valleys.</p> +<p>The escort consisted of a hundred men of the infantry of the +Guides. The way down the pass was difficult; but no snow had fallen +for three weeks, and the roads were fairly beaten down by passing +parties. Still, their progress was slow and, late on the afternoon +of the second day after starting, they were still four miles from +the fort of Jugdulluk; which was held by a British force, and where +they were to halt for the night.</p> +<p>The Guides were on the alert. A party of four men were 200 yards +ahead of the little column, which was commanded by Captain Edwards. +Presently a shot rang out from the front, followed by a scattered +discharge. William Gale was, at the moment, riding by the side of +Captain Edwards. He had already placed himself under that officer's +orders, in case of any emergency.</p> +<p>"Mr. Gale," Captain Edwards said, "will you ride forward at +once, with six men, to the advanced party. When you get there, take +such measures as you may think fit; and send me back word as to the +strength and position of the enemy."</p> +<p>With six of the Guides, Will at once rode forward; while Captain +Edwards halted, until the little column was gathered closely +together: the camels and dhoolies, with sick men, in the center; +the soldiers, in readiness for action, around them.</p> +<p>A soldier now ran up with a slip of paper, upon which Will had +scribbled, in pencil:</p> +<p>"The enemy are apparently in considerable force. The defile +opens here. They are disposed among rocks and boulders, on either +side."</p> +<p>Will, on arriving at the advanced party, had found at once that +the force of the enemy was too strong for him to attempt to move +forward, at present. He had posted the men behind boulders by the +wayside, ordering them to pick off any man that showed himself; and +they were soon engaged in a sharp musketry skirmish with the enemy. +One of their number had fallen at the first discharge; and Will, +taking his rifle, used it with effect, until the head of the convoy +arrived.</p> +<p>It was now fast becoming dark, and the flashes of the enemy's +fire, from behind the rocks, showed how numerous were the +assailants.</p> +<p>"There must be a couple of thousands of the scoundrels," Will +said to Captain Edwards, as the latter came up to ascertain the +state of affairs. "Hampered with the convoy, the position is an +awkward one. It is fortunate they attacked where they did; for we +can hold our own here while, if they had waited till we got fairly +down into this comparatively open valley, and then attacked us on +both flanks, it would have been very awkward.</p> +<p>"We must try and clear them out. We cannot stop here all night. +It is freezing very sharp, now; and the cold will be intense, in an +hour or two."</p> +<p>"I will take thirty men," Captain Edwards said, "and skirmish +along among the rocks on the left. Do you take as many more, and +move along the right of the path. The remaining forty shall stay +here, under my sergeant, to guard the convoy from an attack in +rear, in case any of the enemy should come down the defile behind +us."</p> +<p>The fight soon became exceedingly hot. Making their way along +the rocks, on either side of the path, the Guides slowly drove the +enemy before them. It was hard work, however, for the tribesmen +fought steadily and, as those in front fell back upon those lower +down the valley, their resistance became every moment more +obstinate. Eight of Will's party had already fallen; but although, +sword in hand, he was leading them, encouraging them with voice and +gesture, not a bullet had as yet struck him.</p> +<p>Presently Captain Edwards, having crossed the valley, stood by +his side.</p> +<p>"We are at a standstill," he said. "Nine of my men are killed or +wounded, already; and the fellows are as thick as peas. I am afraid +we shall never be able to force our way through.</p> +<p>"There," he exclaimed, as a sound of firing was heard in the +rear, "they have come down on the convoy from behind. We had +better, I think, fall back a bit; and take post near the mouth of +the defile. We must defend ourselves, as best we can, till +morning."</p> +<p>The movement was steadily executed, the wounded men being +carried with them as they retired. The tribesmen advanced as they +fell back--not venturing to press them, however; for the rear guard +kept their faces towards them, and any who ventured to show +themselves instantly paid the penalty of their rashness.</p> +<p>For an hour the fight went on. It was night now, and dark as +pitch in the deep valley in which the fight was going on; the +position of the combatants being only indicated by the flickering +flashes of the muskets. The Afghans were gradually creeping nearer, +as the Guides could see, by the flashes.</p> +<p>"If the fellows only make a determined rush at us," Captain +Edwards said to Will, "it will go hard with us. Fortunately, they +are as much in the dark as we are, and will find it difficult to +gather for a rush."</p> +<p>"I think we may hold out till morning but, by that time, news +that we are blockaded here will spread throughout the hills, and we +may have 10,000 of them down on us. I think, if you will give me +leave, the best plan will be for me to try and make my way down to +Jugdulluk, to bring up help from there."</p> +<p>"You would never get through," Captain Edwards advised. "It is a +brave offer, Gale, but could not be done."</p> +<p>"I think it might be done," Will said. "It is as dark as pitch. +I will take my lad with me, and will borrow a native cap and cloak +from one of the bearers--there are some Afghans among them. I will +take off my patrol jacket, and leave it behind me, and my boots. We +will crawl along in the dark.</p> +<p>"If--as is likely enough--we stumble against some of them, we +will say we are wounded, and are making our way to the rear. They +cannot see us in the dark, and my Afghan will pass muster; and +Yossouf will certainly not be suspected. If I am discovered and +killed, he will go forward and deliver the message."</p> +<p>The plan seemed to offer every possibility of success; and +Captain Edwards, seeing how serious the position was, consented to +allow Will to attempt it.</p> +<p>A few words to Yossouf sufficed to inform him of the task Will +was about to undertake, and he at once agreed to share the danger. +A rough sheepskin cap was obtained for Will from one of the camel +men. His tunic was thrown off, and a posteen--or Afghan sheepskin +coat--was put on, in its place. He took a long matchlock, which the +camel man carried, slung over his shoulders; took off his boots, +and thrust a pair of loose Afghan shoes into his belt. Yossouf +needed no preparations, beyond borrowing a matchlock.</p> +<p>Wringing Captain Edwards' hand, Will stooped on his hands and +knees and, with Yossouf a pace or two ahead, began to crawl down +the path. Before starting, the orders had been sent round to the +soldiers to fire at the rocks on either side of the path, but on no +account to fire down the road, itself. As he expected, Will found +this clear of Afghans, for a considerable distance. A heavy fire +had, previous to their starting, been directed down this path; to +prevent the Afghans from gathering there in the darkness, +preparatory to making a rush. They came across several dead bodies, +but the enemy were all behind rocks, on one side or other of the +road.</p> +<p>When they had crawled a hundred yards, they were past the front +line, from which the Afghans were keeping up a heavy fire; but Will +knew that, from their numbers, they must extend far back down the +valley and, indeed, from almost every rock the flashes of the +matchlocks blazed out, as the lurking tribesmen fired in the +direction of the mouth of the defile.</p> +<p>They were nearly a quarter of a mile down when an Afghan--who +had been crouching behind a rock, close to the path--advanced into +the road to fire, when he stumbled against Yossouf.</p> +<p>"What are you doing?" he exclaimed.</p> +<p>"We are both wounded, by the Kaffirs," Yossouf answered; "and +are making our way back, to bind up our wounds. I think my arm is +broken; but I mean to come back again, to have a few more shots at +the infidels."</p> +<p>"Good!" the Afghan replied. "How goes it in front?"</p> +<p>"Their fire is lessening," Yossouf said. "We must have killed +many. We shall finish with them in the morning, if not before."</p> +<p>The Afghan fired, and then retired behind his rock to load +again; while Will and Yossouf continued their way.</p> +<p>A few hundred yards farther, they rose to their feet. Will +slipped on the Afghan shoes; and they then proceeded, at a rapid +pace, down the pass. Several times they withdrew from the road, and +hid beside it, as they met parties of tribesmen hurrying up to join +in the attack but, in an hour after starting, they heard the +welcome challenge of the sentry, at Jugdulluk.</p> +<p>Saying who he was, Will was at once passed forward into the +fort, and taken to the quarters of the officer in command.</p> +<p>"I am Lieutenant Gale, of the 66th," Will said, "and was on my +way down the pass with the convoy of wounded, and 100 men of the +Guides, under Captain Edwards. They have been attacked at the lower +end of the defile, some four miles above, by a very strong body of +tribesmen. They are attacked front and rear.</p> +<p>"I have made my way through to ask you if you can despatch a +force to their rescue. Were the tribesmen attacked in their rear, +now, they might be scattered easily enough; but they are assembling +very fast and, in the morning, it will be a difficult matter to +reach them."</p> +<p>"We have fancied," the officer said, "for the last two hours +that we heard distant firing; but we could not be sure, for any +noise echoes so, in these mountains. I will set out at once with +you, with as many men as I can spare."</p> +<h2><a name="Ch17" id="Ch17">Chapter 17</a>: At Candahar.</h2> +<p>The garrison of Jugdulluk consisted only of 220 Sikhs. The +officer in command left seventy of these in charge of one of his +subalterns, with the injunction to exercise the most extreme +vigilance, in his absence. Then with 150 men, a subaltern, and Will +Gale, he started up the path to effect the rescue of the +beleaguered convoy.</p> +<p>The road wound and turned frequently among the spurs of the +lofty hills, which had cut off the sound of firing from the +garrison; and only a faint and distant murmur was audible, when +they started. After marching two miles, however, the rattle of the +musketry became clear and distinct. Upon the way the officer in +command learned, from Will, the exact position of things in front, +and the situation of the Afghans.</p> +<p>When within half a mile of the scene of action, fifty men were +thrown out on either side of the road; while the other fifty +advanced, very slowly, along the center The orders to the flankers +were to search among the rocks, as they advanced, and to bayonet or +shoot every Afghan they found among them.</p> +<p>It was not long before they came upon the enemy. Then the rifles +cracked out; and the wild shouts of the Afghans betokened their +astonishment at being thus, unexpectedly, assailed in rear. +Numerous as they were, they offered but a light resistance. Their +one thought was to effect their escape; and they hurried rapidly +away as the relief advanced, climbing the steep sides of the valley +by paths only known to themselves; and then, from the hillside far +above, opening a scattered fire, at random, down into the +valley.</p> +<p>In five minutes, all resistance had ceased. The flanking parties +were ordered to shelter themselves behind the rocks, and to return +the fire of the natives on the hillsides; to retain the position +until the convoy passed through, and then to close behind it, as a +rear guard. With the fifty men in the road, the officer then pushed +forward; and was soon greeted by a shout of welcome from the +defenders of the defile.</p> +<p>There was not a minute to be lost; for the Afghans, when they +recovered from their first scare, would renew the attack; and the +party pressing down the defile on their rear--ignorant of what had +taken place below--were still keeping up an incessant fire. +Twenty-eight of the Guides were already killed, or wounded.</p> +<p>Several of the sick men, in the dhoolies, volunteered to walk +down to the fort, and to give up their places to those of the +wounded men who were unable to walk and, in a few minutes, the +convoy moved forward. The fifty men of tho relieving party placed +themselves in their rear and, as the tribesmen who had been +attacking them from behind rushed down through the defile, with +exulting shouts--believing that they were now secure of their +victims--the Sikhs opened so heavy a fire on them that they fell +back up the defile, in disorder.</p> +<p>As the convoy wound down the valley, the enemy again assembled +on the hills and pursued them hotly. But the Sikhs and Guides kept +up so steady a fire that they did not venture to approach to close +quarters and, with a loss of eighteen more men, the convoy reached +the shelter of the fort. Conscious of their inability to attack +this position, the Afghans drew off.</p> +<p>On returning to his friends, Will had resumed his uniform; and +now, on reaching the fort, Captain Edwards expressed to him his +warmest thanks for the hazardous adventure that he had +undertaken.</p> +<p>"I shall, of course," he concluded, "furnish a full report of +the affair to the general; and I should think he would recommend +you for the Victoria Cross. If any fellow ever deserved it, you do +so; for it seemed, to me, almost certain death to venture through +the pass. I never expected to see you again; and I was never more +glad, in my life, than I was when the firing began down below in +the valley, and knew that help was at hand for, had you failed, it +would have been all up with us. I doubt if we should have seen the +morning and, at any rate, few of us would have been left, by that +time."</p> +<p>The convoy reached Jellalabad without further adventure, and +Captain Edwards reported to the general the events of the march. He +was requested to give a full written report of the affair; and the +general stated that, in forwarding it, he should certainly append a +recommendation that Lieutenant Gale should receive the Victoria +Cross, for his gallantry in venturing through the Afghans to fetch +assistance for the convoy.</p> +<p>Will himself, as soon as he reached Jellalabad, hurried away to +the cantonment of the Norfolk Rangers; who were in a village, a +mile distant from the town. He was not recognized, as he passed +through the soldiers scattered about the village street; and was +soon at the principal house, where the colonel had his quarters. On +sending in his name, he was at once shown into the room where the +colonel was at work.</p> +<p>"I am indeed glad to see you," the latter said, rising and +shaking him heartily by the hand; "and I congratulate you, most +warmly, on your promotion. I promised to do what I could for you, +when you joined; but I did not expect that it would be so +soon."</p> +<p>"I am indeed obliged to you, colonel, for your kindness," Will +said; "and am conscious how much I owe to you."</p> +<p>"Not at all, my boy, not at all. It was General Roberts, +himself, who recommended you for your commission; and I was only +too glad to back up his recommendation, to the best of my power. We +all thought you were gone, when you were reported as missing at +Ali-Kheyl, and we heard from the sentry that--having gone forward, +to investigate the origin of a noise he had reported to you--you +were suddenly fired upon; and that he saw no more of you, as he ran +back to the picket. I was glad, indeed, when the report was +received from poor Cavagnari that, upon his arrival at Cabul, he +had found you there, just recovering from your wounds.</p> +<p>"Then, of course, we gave you up again, when we heard of the +massacre of the mission; and it seemed like a resurrection from the +dead when I got a letter from Roberts, saying you were found again, +and that he was recommending you for a commission.</p> +<p>"I see by the Gazette you are appointed to the 66th, and we were +expecting to see you on your way down. Had you any difficulty in +getting through the passes?"</p> +<p>"The convoy was attacked, sir, by the tribesmen, when near +Jugdulluk; but the garrison came out to our rescue, and we got +through safely. But we had thirty men killed or wounded."</p> +<p>"A smart affair!" the colonel said. "And now, of course, you +will take up your quarters with us, for a day or two, before you go +on. The officers will all be glad to see you; and you will be able +to tell us all about the attack on the mission, and the recent +fighting. Roberts has been having some hot work, there.</p> +<p>"We have been grumbling horribly at our bad luck. We thought, at +the time, we were fortunate at being sent back to India, when peace +was signed, instead of being kept in the Khurum valley. But the +consequence has been that we have been out of it all. However, we +must look upon you as our representative."</p> +<p>Will hesitated about staying, but the colonel overruled his +objection; saying that, as there would be no fighting until the +spring, there could be no particular hurry for him to join his +regiment. A spare room was placed at his disposal, in the colonel's +quarters, and Will was soon made at home. The officers flocked in, +upon hearing of his arrival; and all congratulated him, most +warmly, upon his promotion. An hour later, a mounted orderly rode +up to the colonel's quarters.</p> +<p>"Is Lieutenant Gale here?" he asked.</p> +<p>Will went forward.</p> +<p>"A note from the general," the orderly said and, handing it to +him, "also one for Colonel Shepherd."</p> +<a id="PicF" name="PicF"></a> +<center><img src="images/f.jpg" alt= +"Illustration: Letters from the General." /></center> +<p>Will's note was simply an invitation to dine, that evening, with +the general. The colonel's letter was as follows:</p> +<p>"Colonel Shepherd,</p> +<p>"As Lieutenant Gale was promoted from your regiment, I think it +is likely that he has found his way to you. I have written to ask +him to dinner; please spare him to me. I hope you will do me the +pleasure of accompanying him. He has performed a most gallant +action; and I have just had the pleasure of writing a dispatch, +recommending him for the V.C."</p> +<p>Will and the colonel at once wrote notes, accepting the +invitation. When these had been sent out to the orderly the colonel +read aloud, to the officers present, the note he had received from +the general.</p> +<p>"Now," he said, turning to Will, "what is that you have been +doing? You told us the convoy had been attacked, and sharply +pressed; but you said nothing of your share in the affair. What was +it?"</p> +<p>"It was simple enough, sir," Will answered, coloring hotly. "We +were surrounded, just at the mouth of the defile. The enemy held +the valley in front in great force, and another party were pressing +on our rear. Things looked awkward; and so I volunteered, with my +faithful Afghan boy, to get through the fellows in front, and make +my way down to Jugdulluk--which was four miles away--to bring the +garrison up on their rear.</p> +<p>"It was simple enough and, in fact, there was less danger than +in remaining with the convoy, to be popped at by the Afghans. The +night was very dark and, down in the bottom, one could hardly see +one's hand. The Afghans had been cleared pretty well off the road, +by our fire; so there was no difficulty, whatever, in making our +way down. We were, in fact, only questioned once; and my boy's +statement, that we were wounded and were going to the rear, was +accepted at once."</p> +<p>"The fact that you succeeded," the colonel said, "does not +detract from the pluck required to attempt such an adventure. To my +mind, there is more courage required in venturing, alone, through +the midst of the Afghans, at night, than there would be in charging +any number of them, in hot blood, in the light. You have earned the +V.C. well, Gale; and I am sure we all feel proud of you, though you +do not belong to us, now."</p> +<p>There was a chorus of approval from the officers around.</p> +<p>"I don't belong to you now, sir, but," Will said, earnestly, "I +shall always feel, whatever regiment I may be with, that the +Norfolk Rangers are my corps. It is the kindness which was shown +me, here, which has put me in the way of rising; and I shall never +forget it."</p> +<p>It was now time to dress for dinner; and Will, for the first +time, arrayed himself in full-dress uniform. The buttons and +facings he would, of course, get altered when he joined the +regiment.</p> +<p>The general received Gale with great kindness. He had a large +party to dinner. Among them was Captain Edwards; and after the +table was cleared the latter--at the general's request--gave a full +account of the attack upon the convoy; and Will was then called +upon to relate the part which he had taken in it, which he did very +modestly and quietly.</p> +<p>For two days longer he stopped at Jellalabad; and then, with a +hearty farewell to the officers of the Rangers, he started down the +pass. He again journeyed with a convoy for, although the tribes +below Jellalabad were cowed into submission, many attacks were +made, by the mountaineers, upon small parties going up or down the +passes; and stringent orders had been issued that no officer should +go down, except when accompanied by an escort.</p> +<p>After a week's traveling Will arrived, with Yossouf, at +Peshawur. Then he rode, by easy stages, until he reached the Indus +where, taking his place on a steamer, he traveled down the river to +Sukkur; where he disembarked, and started for the weary march, +across the desert, to the foot of the Bolan.</p> +<p>Along the road large numbers of coolies were at work, +constructing a line of railway, which was now almost complete to +the foot of the pass. It did not ascend this but, turning to the +right, wound up the hills to the plateau. It was intended to be +taken on to Candahar, and its completion would have been an immense +boon, both to that city and to India; as it would have opened a +great trade to the north, and have enabled the inhabitants of the +fertile plain, around Candahar, to send their corn, fruit, and +other products down to India. Unhappily, with the subsequent +abandonment of Candahar the formation of the railway was stopped; +and the whole allowed to go to ruin. The work has, however, been +recently taken in hand again.</p> +<p>Will and his follower ascended the Bolan; stopped a day or two +at Quettah, to rest their horses; and then proceeded on through the +fertile plains of Pisheen, and over the Kojak Pass, and thence on +to Candahar. Here Will joined his new regiment, and was well +received by its officers.</p> +<p>In every regiment in the service, an officer risen from the +ranks is invariably received with special courtesy, and kindness. +Every endeavor is made to place him at his ease, in his new +position. This is specially so when--as in Will's case--the +promotion has been earned by distinguished services in the +field.</p> +<p>In most instances, officers promoted from the rank of sergeant +are a good deal older than the young lieutenants among whom they +find themselves. Being often married men, and having nothing but +their pay to depend upon, they find themselves, therefore, unable +to take much part in the pleasures and gaieties of the regiment. In +India, however, as the rate of pay is much higher, an unmarried +officer can live very comfortably on his pay; and as, in the field, +the expenses are far less than when a regiment is in cantonments at +a large station--where there is much gaiety--Will found that he was +able to live very comfortably, on his pay, in the same style as +that of his comrades.</p> +<p>They, on their part, were pleased to find in Will a young fellow +of the same age as the other junior lieutenants and, withal, a +pleasant, gentlemanly young man. The fact, too, that he had seen so +much service, had gone through stirring adventures, and had fought +by the side of Cavagnari in the Bala-Hissar, made him quite a hero +among them; and Will was soon thoroughly one of themselves.</p> +<p>When it was known that the regiment was likely to remain at +Candahar for some time, many luxuries had been brought up from +India; together with means of passing away the time, such as the +necessary appliances for cricket, racket, and other games. Among +these, too, were several boxes of books; and Will--who had, at +first, a little amused his comrades by his absolute ignorance of +cricket, but who soon became a promising recruit at that +game--steadily devoted three hours a day to reading, in order to +improve his mind, and to obtain a knowledge of the various matters +which were topics of conversation among his comrades. Above all he +diligently studied the newspapers--great parcels of which arrived +every week--in order to obtain some knowledge of the political +state of affairs in England, the position of parties, and the +various matters occupying public attention.</p> +<p>He had, at first, found his ignorance of these matters a great +drawback to him, in general conversation; but he discovered that +newspapers, rather than books, are useful in enabling a man to mix +with his fellows in social talk; and that the current events of the +day form ninety-nine hundredths of the subjects of conversation. +The fact that all his mess mates had been thoroughly posted in the +history of Rome and Greece, that they could read these languages +almost a well as English, that they had been coached in high +mathematics, and had a knowledge of French and German, gave +them--Will found--very little advantage in general conversation; +and he was surprised to discover how entirely useless, from a +practical point of view, is much of the instruction which must be +mastered by young men, before obtaining a commission.</p> +<p>Many times, when talking with the young officers with whom he +was most intimate, he inquired of them what good they found the +learning they had obtained, during their many years of schooling; +and was surprised at the universal reply: "No good, whatever!" He +found, however, that some of the more thoughtful of them admitted +that they had gained increased powers of thought, and reasoning, +from their training.</p> +<p>"That is the good of education, Gale," Captain Fletcher--who +commanded Will's company--said to him one day. "A certain time must +be spent upon education, and the course of study is intended to +strengthen and improve the mental powers. As far as soldiers are +concerned, it would certainly be of more practical use if the time +we spent at school on Greek, and mathematics, had been expended in +acquiring three or four European and Indian languages. But you see, +boys educated at the same school must all work together, and study +the same books, whatever the profession for which they are intended +is. Our practical--that is, our professional education--only begins +when we go to Woolwich, or Sandhurst.</p> +<p>"Perhaps, some day, a different system will be employed. There +will be special schools for lads intended for various professions, +and careers. Till that is done, we must all work upon a common +basis; which has at least the advantage of forming the mind, for +the after work of acquiring the special branches of knowledge +required, by us, in the careers we may adopt.</p> +<p>"If you ask my advice I should not, at your time of life, dream +of setting to to learn the dead languages, or to study mathematics. +Read the histories of Rome and Greece, and study that of your own +country. Read books of travel and the biographies of great men, and +keep yourself well posted--as you are doing--in current public +events. You will then find yourself able to take part, on equal +terms, in any conversation which may be going on. You will, indeed, +be considered by strangers an exceptionally well-informed young +fellow; and you may pass through life without any person having a +suspicion that Latin, Greek, and mathematics--the cardinal points +of an ordinary education--are wholly unknown to you."</p> +<p>Will was cheered by the advice and, henceforth, directed his +studies only in the direction which Captain Fletcher had +indicated.</p> +<p>At the beginning of April, a large diminution had taken place in +the force stationed at Candahar; as General Sir Donald Stewart +marched, with the greater portion of the force, for Cabul. The +route led through a country which was the stronghold of the +fanatical party--the important town of Ghuzni containing the most +fanatical population in all Afghanistan. This had been the center +whence the attacks on General Roberts had been organized, and it +was deemed necessary to march a strong force through the country, +to overawe the tribesmen, and break up their organization.</p> +<p>The march was uneventful as far as Shahjui, the limit of the +Candahar province. At this point the Taraki country begins. The +Mollahs here had been actively preaching a holy war, and several +thousand men were reported as having collected. The villages were +found to be deserted, and everything betokened an active opposition +to the advance.</p> +<p>When the head of the column arrived at Ahmed-Khel, a body of the +enemy--estimated at from 12,000 to 15,000--were seen clustered on a +semicircle of hills, beyond the village. The baggage of the column +stretched far along the road, and it was all important to prevent +the enemy from falling upon this long line. General Stewart +therefore determined to attack them.</p> +<p>The two batteries of artillery opened fire upon the enemy; who +at once, in reply, rushed down to the assault. The charge was led +by some 3000 or 4000 Ghazis--as they were called--fanatics, who had +sworn to give their lives in carrying out their object, of +exterminating the hated infidel. Some of these men were armed with +rifles and matchlocks; some with heavy swords, knives, and pistols; +others, again, with pikes made of bayonets, or pieces of sharpened +iron fastened upon long sticks. Some were on foot, and some on +horseback.</p> +<p>With wild yells, the mass rushed down upon our troops; and so +sudden and unexpected was the attack, so swiftly did they cross the +400 or 500 yards of intervening ground, that they came upon the +British before preparation could be made for their reception. At +the moment when they charged, some of the cavalry were moving +across in front of the infantry; and these, before they could be +got into a line for a charge, were surrounded by the enemy.</p> +<p>In an instant they were lost to sight, in the cloud of dust and +smoke. It was a hand-to-hand struggle and, in the confusion, a +troop charged to the right, in rear of the main line of the +infantry, and burst into the midst of the 19th Punjaub Infantry; +who were in reserve, in rear of the position occupied by the +general and his staff.</p> +<p>In a moment, all was confusion. The ammunition mules were +stampeded, riderless horses dashed hither and thither and, close +behind the cavalry, the Ghazis--with a furious rush--dashed in +among the broken infantry. Upon the left flank, too, the Ghazis +swept round in the rear of our infantry line and, for a time, it +seemed as if the whole British formation was broken up--in which +case the numbers of their foes must have prevailed. Colonel Lister, +V.C. however--who commanded the 3rd Ghoorkas--threw his men +rapidly into company squares, and poured a tremendous fire into the +fanatics.</p> +<p>All along the line the attack raged; and so hurriedly had the +battle commenced that many of the men had not even fixed bayonets. +Desperate was the hand-to-hand fighting, and valor more conspicuous +than that of the Ghazis was never shown. Furiously they threw +themselves upon the line of their opponents; clutching their +muskets and trying to wrench them from their hands, while they +strove to cut down their holders. Many of them threw themselves +upon the fixed bayonets, and died in the endeavor to cut down the +soldiers with their swords; but the three regiments which formed +the line--one British (the 59th), one Ghoorkas, and one +Sikhs--alike held their own, and poured rolling volleys into the +ranks of the enemy.</p> +<p>Desperately the Ghazis strove to capture the guns; which were +firing case and shrapnel into them, at a distance of thirty yards, +mowing them down in hundreds. Not even would this terrible +slaughter have checked them, had not the 2nd Punjaub Cavalry most +gallantly charged them, again and again.</p> +<p>The general, surrounded by his escort, was in the midst of the +fight--the enemy having burst in between the guns and the 59th +Foot--and officers and troopers had, alike, to fight for their +lives; several of the escort being killed and wounded. At last, +however, the Ghazis fell back from the terrible fire.</p> +<p>The 1st Punjaub Cavalry, coming up from the rear, joined the 2nd +in a hot pursuit; and our native allies the Hazaras, seeing the +Afghans in retreat, also rushed out after them, and the rout of the +enemy was complete. The fighting had lasted about an hour, and the +enemy left over a thousand dead on the field, besides the bodies +which had been carried off Their wounded, of course, were far more +numerous. Ghuzni surrendered without opposition, when the column +reached it; the fighting men having been engaged in the battle of +Ahmed-Khel, and having had enough of hostilities.</p> +<p>On the 23rd of April, a force under Brigadier General Palliser +advanced against a large body of natives, who had assembled near +the village of Ghalez--again led by the Ghazis. These rushed to the +attack, with a courage and desperation equal to that shown by the +fanatics in the previous battle. Our men however were, this time, +prepared; and were able to inflict very heavy losses upon the +enemy, without allowing them to get to close quarters.</p> +<p>This was the end of the Afghan resistance. General Stewart moved +on to Cabul without further fighting, and effected a junction there +with the force under General Roberts.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch18" id="Ch18">Chapter 18</a>: On The Helmund.</h2> +<p>With the junction of the forces of Generals Stewart and Roberts, +what may be called the second period of the Afghan war came to an +end. All opposition had ceased, and it appeared probable that there +would be no more fighting.</p> +<p>Abdul-Rahman, a prince of the royal house who--after for some +time fighting against Sheer Ali--had been defeated, and obliged to +fly the country; had, for a long time, been a resident among the +Russians. Upon the abdication of Yakoub he had crossed the +frontier, and had entered at the north of Afghanistan; assuming the +title of Ameer. He had been well received in that part of the +country, and as no other competitor for the throne appeared to have +chances equal to his, and as the British government were most +anxious to withdraw their forces from the country, his authority +was recognized by us. Negotiations were opened with him; and it was +arranged that, as he approached Cabul, the British force would +retire.</p> +<p>The summer had passed not unpleasantly, at Candahar. The country +was peaceful. Cricket matches were got up between the various +regiments, and horse races established. Candahar was governed by a +protege of the British, named Wali Shere Ali. He had organized a +native army, to support his authority upon our withdrawal.</p> +<p>The only circumstances which occurred to mar the pleasing time +were isolated attacks, upon British officers and men, by Ghazis. +These attacks were sometimes made in broad daylight, in the streets +of Candahar, where the escape of those who perpetrated them was +impossible. These fanatics regarding their own life with +indifference, so that they could but kill one or more of the +British, before being cut down.</p> +<p>One day, as William Gale was walking in the principal street of +Candahar, at a short distance behind Colonel Ripon--an Indian +official of very long standing and experience, who had come up on a +special mission to arrange, with the Wali, the details of the civil +government of the province--he saw three Afghans, who were +loitering in the road, draw their long tulwars and dash upon that +officer.</p> +<p>The first who reached him delivered a sweeping blow; which the +colonel, taken by surprise, partly received on his uplifted +arm--but was struck to the ground. Another of the Ghazis raised his +sword; but before it could fall Will Gale--who saw at once that he +was too far behind to interpose between the assailant and the +victim--drew his revolver from his belt and, taking a hasty aim, +fired. The shot was an accurate one; the bullet striking the Afghan +on the forehead, just as he was about to strike. He fell forward on +the colonel; receiving, as he did so, a tremendous blow which the +third Ghazi was aiming at the prostrate man.</p> +<a id="PicG" name="PicG"></a> +<center><img src="images/g.jpg" alt= +"Illustration: Will saves Colonel Ripon." /></center> +<p>Before the blow could be repeated, Will had bounded forward and, +sword in one hand and revolver in the other, faced the two Afghans. +Another shot freed him of one of his assailants; just as the other, +rushing recklessly forward, aimed a blow at him--which he was not +quick enough to parry. His right arm fell to his side but, in an +instant, he threw himself upon his foe; and the two fell heavily to +the ground, the Afghan striving desperately to shorten his sword, +so as to use the point; while Will strove to liberate his left +arm--which was under the man--and so use his revolver, which he +still grasped.</p> +<p>At this moment some soldiers of the 66th ran up; and one of +them, with his bayonet--which, since these attacks began, were +always carried at the belt--brought the conflict to a conclusion, +by running it through and through the Ghazi's body.</p> +<p>Will soon rose to his feet. Colonel Ripon had already freed +himself from the body of the dead Ghazi, and had struggled to his +feet; the blood streaming from his head and arm.</p> +<p>"I have to thank you for my life, sir," he said, warmly. "Had +your aid come but two seconds less promptly, they would have +finished me.</p> +<p>"But I fear you are severely wounded."</p> +<p>"Oh, no!" Will answered. "It is only a flesh wound, from my +shoulder to my elbow. Luckily, my sword partly caught the blow. I +was aiming at the other fellow, and had not time to parry fairly. I +shall be none the worse for it, in a week's time. My wound is less +severe than yours, sir."</p> +<p>"We are both bleeding pretty freely," the colonel said. "My +quarters are close at hand and, as the principal medical officer +lives in the same house, you cannot do better than come in with +me."</p> +<p>In a few minutes their wounds were bandaged, the doctor saying +that no serious harm had been done, in either case; but that care +and quiet, lest fever should supervene, would be necessary for a +week or two. As the house was much more airy, and commodious, than +that in which Will was quartered, the colonel begged him so +strongly to move his quarters thither, until able to return to +duty, that Will agreed to do so; and was soon installed, with +Yossouf in attendance, in the colonel's quarters. He was greatly +pleased with the old officer, whose manner was most kind and +courteous; and who, from his long experience in India, was full of +anecdotes and information concerning the country.</p> +<p>Ten days after the struggle, the doctor told them that there was +no longer any occasion for his services. Their wounds were healing +favorably, and all fear of fever had passed. At the same time, it +would still be some time before either could take their arms from +their slings.</p> +<p>The following day, in honor of his convalescence, Colonel Ripon +invited several friends to dinner; among them General Burrows, and +Colonel Galbraith of the 66th. All had, of course, heard the +details of the attack on Colonel Ripon; and Will was congratulated, +warmly, upon the promptness that he had showed.</p> +<p>"Do you know, colonel," General Burrows said, as they were +smoking their cigars after dinner, "there is a wonderful likeness +between you and Lieutenant Gale. I should have taken you for father +and son, anywhere."</p> +<p>The other officers agreed with the remark.</p> +<p>The likeness was certainly strong. Both were men of six feet in +height. The colonel's hair and mustache were grizzled, and his face +bronzed with the sun of many Indian summers. He was thin and spare +of habit; but his shoulders were broad, and it was evident that, in +his youth, he must have possessed much of the muscular strength +which was apparent in Will's more rounded limbs. But it was in +their eyes that there was the greatest similarity. Both were gray, +and of nearly the same shade; both had a simple, straightforward, +and kindly expression; both were shaded by straight, and rather +heavy eyebrows.</p> +<p>The men looked at each other.</p> +<p>"I suppose he is like me," Colonel Ripon said; "still more like, +I fancy, what I remember myself, at his age; but curiously enough +he has--ever since I met him--been recalling some one else to my +mind;" and a shade passed over his face.</p> +<p>Seeing that Colonel Ripon was not disposed to talk further on +the subject, a fresh topic of conversation was started. There was +news that Ayoub Khan--the brother of Yakoob, who was governor at +Herat--was marching south, at the head of a large force, with the +intention of opposing Abdul-Rahman, and again reseating Yakoob on +the throne. He had also preached a holy war against the +British.</p> +<p>"I fear that the trouble is serious," General Burrows said. "The +troops Ayoub is bringing with him have not yet met us in the field. +The population on the road is wild and fanatical, in the extreme; +and will, no doubt, join him to a man. On the other hand, the +troops of the Wali are not to be depended upon, and the brunt of +the fighting is sure to fall upon us."</p> +<p>Three days later, the order was issued by General Primrose that +the 66th Regiment, the Bombay Grenadiers, and Jacob's Rifles; +together with the 3rd Scinde Horse and 3rd Bombay Cavalry, with a +battery of artillery; were to move out with the Wali's army towards +Girishk, on the river Helmund, which formed the boundary between +the province of Candahar and that of Herat.</p> +<p>After the long period of inactivity at Candahar, Will was +delighted at the thought of taking part in an expedition, with his +regiment; but when they reached the Helmund life was, for some +time, exceedingly monotonous. The news of Ayoub's advance greatly +excited the population--who had been further worked up by agents, +widely distributed through the country; and by the exhortations of +the Mollahs and Ghazis. Consequently, rambling at any distance from +the camp was forbidden; and the shooting parties, which had been +one of the great resources of their life at Candahar, were +peremptorily put an end to.</p> +<p>Colonel Ripon had accompanied the force, as the Wali's adviser. +Both he and Will had recovered completely from their wounds. When +the regiment first marched, indeed, the surgeon had strongly +recommended Will to remain behind, until his wound had completely +healed; but the young officer had so strongly begged to be allowed +to accompany the regiment that the surgeon had consented. His +colonel had, for a time, relieved him from all duty, and he rode in +rear of the regiment; but within a fortnight of their arrival at +the Helmund, he was able to lay aside his sling, and to take his +turn of regular duty.</p> +<p>The officers did all that they could to make existence +tolerable, on the sandy shores of the Helmund. They got up foot +races and athletic sports for the men, played cricket on the sands, +and indulged in a bath--twice a day--in the river. Will often spent +the evening in Colonel Ripon's tent. A warm friendship had arisen +between the two officers, and each day seemed to bring them closer +together.</p> +<p>All this time, Ayoub's army was known to be approaching. It had +been delayed by want of transport, and by the difficult nature of +the country over which it had to pass. The guns, too--of which it +was reported to have a large number--had greatly hampered it but, +by the second week in July, it was near at hand.</p> +<p>For some time, the Wali's troops had been showing signs of +insubordination; and little doubt was entertained that they had +been tampered with, by Ayoub's emissaries. The question of +disarming them was several times discussed; but the Wali maintained +his faith that they would remain true to their salt, and the +British force was so small that it was deemed imprudent to take any +step to diminish their strength, by dispensing with the services of +a strong body of men who might, after all, be faithful at the +critical moment. Moreover, it was doubtful whether they would +submit to be disarmed, by a force so inferior to their own. Should +the attempt to disarm them succeed, they must either be escorted +back to Candahar, by a strong detachment of the British; or be +permitted to disperse, in which case they would assuredly swell the +advancing army of Ayoub.</p> +<p>One day Will arranged to start, the next morning at daybreak, +for a day's shooting with four other young officers--Hammond and +Fortescue of Jacob's Rifles, and Plater and Lowther of the +Grenadiers. The country round the camp had been already shot over, +so they were to go some miles out. Will's colonel--in giving him +leave off parade for the day--had asked him to endeavor to +ascertain, at any village he might enter, the state of the feeling +of the natives respecting Ayoub, and their disposition towards the +British; points on which a deplorable ignorance existed, in the +camp.</p> +<p>The party started before daybreak, putting their wiry little +tats--or native ponies--into a gallop, so as to reach the +spot--eight miles distant--where they were to begin to shoot as +early as possible; so as to get two or three hours' sport, before +the heat of the day really set in. After an hour's ride, they +overtook their servants; who had gone on ahead, with the guns and +luncheon. The sun was but just above the horizon, and the morning +air was cool and pleasant.</p> +<p>Dismounting, they handed over the ponies to the servants and, +taking the guns and ammunition, set out on foot. The servants were +to go on, with the ponies and lunch, to a village in the hills, +four miles distant; and to get tiffin ready, by eleven o'clock.</p> +<p>The young officers set out on foot, keeping a short distance +apart. Two of their servants accompanied them, to carry the game; +the other three went with the two Syces, who looked after the +ponies The ground was broken and stony, and altogether +uncultivated, except in the neighborhood of the villages. They had +better sport than they expected, for hares darted out in numbers +from behind the rocks. Some of these were bowled over, while others +escaped; and there was much bantering and laughter among the young +men, none of whom were first-class shots.</p> +<p>As the sun rose higher the game became more scarce and, by ten +o'clock, the party turned their faces towards the village where +they were to lunch; and which lay, they calculated, a mile or two +away on their right. The sun was now blazing down upon them; and +they were glad, indeed, when they came in sight of the +village--which was not perceived until they were close to it, as it +lay in a deep and rocky valley.</p> +<p>Yossouf met them, as they entered the village.</p> +<p>"Well, Yossouf, where have you laid the tiffin?"</p> +<p>"I have spread it, sahib, on a level piece of ground, in the +shade of the chief's house. He did not seem disposed to be civil +and, indeed, I thought that it would be more pleasant out of doors, +in the shade, than inside."</p> +<p>"Much more pleasant, Yossouf; and these forts, as they call +them, are generally stuffy places, with small windows. What is the +feeling of the people here?"</p> +<p>"They are looking forward to Ayoub's coming, sir, when they say +a holy war will be preached, and every man will rise against the +infidels. When they found I was a countryman, they talked freely +enough before me; especially as I led them to believe that I had +been taken prisoner, at Cabul, and forced to accompany you as a +sort of slave.</p> +<p>"I should recommend that, as soon as tiffin is over, you should +start for the camp; for I don't think it is quite safe, here."</p> +<p>"They would never think of attacking us, Yossouf, with our force +within an easy day's march."</p> +<p>"I don't know, sir," Yossouf said, doubtfully. "They say that +the Wali's men are all with them; and that these, alone, are quite +sufficient to eat up the three British regiments."</p> +<p>"They will find out their mistake, if they try it. However, +Yossouf, I will let the others know what you think."</p> +<p>By this time, they had arrived at the spot where the lunch was +laid out; and very tempting it looked, to hungry men. A great dish +of curry--made with some fowls purchased in the village--was the +principal dish; but there were some fish--which Yossouf had caught +in the Helmund, on the previous day--a roast of young kid, and +several dishes of fresh fruit. A large vessel of porous clay, +containing the drinking water, stood close by; and the necks of +some bottles of claret peeped, out from a tub full of water; while +a pitcher of cold tea was ready, for those who preferred it. The +young men set to with a vigorous appetite and, when the meal was +over, pipes and cigars were lighted; and they prepared to enjoy a +rest, until the heat of the day was past.</p> +<p>Will now told them what Yossouf had said.</p> +<p>"Oh, nonsense, Gale!" Hammond said. "Your boy is an Afghan, and +these fellows are always dreaming about treachery.</p> +<p>"They are scowling, sulky-looking brutes," he said, looking at a +group of natives, who stood watching them, with lowering eyes, "and +of course, they hate us as infidel dogs but, as to attacking us, +it's all nonsense."</p> +<p>"Well, you know, Hammond, these Ghazis do attack us, in all +sorts of places--as I have found, to my cost--and these villages +abound with these fanatics."</p> +<p>"Oh, yes," Fortescue said, lazily, "of course they do; but we +have got our revolvers handy, and our guns are within reach of our +hands. We should make precious short work of any Ghazis who were to +run amuck among us.</p> +<p>"Well, I for one don't mean to move, till it gets a bit cooler. +If these fellows want to attack us, they have got the chance, now; +and there is no more reason they should do it, three hours hence, +than when we are having our breakfast, quietly."</p> +<h2><a name="Ch19" id="Ch19">Chapter 19</a>: The Battle Of +Maiwand.</h2> +<p>The servants were squatting in a circle near their masters, and +enjoying their share of the breakfast. The two Syces were +Beloochees, the others were men from the Deccan--the regiment +having been stationed at Poona, before going up into Afghanistan. +Of these, the Syces alone understood the Afghan language.</p> +<p>After the men had finished their meal, Yossouf strolled away by +himself into the village. When he returned, Will saw that he wished +to speak to him so, rising carelessly from the ground, he walked to +the ponies--which were tied up near--and called Yossouf, as if to +give him some instructions respecting them.</p> +<p>"Well, Yossouf, what is it? Have you learned anything?"</p> +<p>"No, sir, nothing. But the people no longer speak to me freely. +They must have guessed, when they saw me speaking to you, that I +was warning you; but I don't think things are right. The children +are all in the houses, instead of playing about in the street. A +few of the women are standing at their doors, but most of them are +inside, too."</p> +<p>"But if the men are thinking of attacking us why shouldn't they +do so, at once?"</p> +<p>"There are not above twenty or thirty men here, sahib. They may +not think they are strong enough. Perhaps they have sent to some of +the villages, for help."</p> +<p>"Likely enough, Yossouf; I did not think of that. Do you go up +above the village, and have a good look round. I will try and +persuade my friends to be moving."</p> +<p>Yossouf moved off at once; and Will stood for a minute or two, +thinking what was the best to do. The position was not pleasant. +Yossouf's suspicions might be altogether unfounded; but Will had +found him to be so uniformly right, on former occasions, that he +did not like to neglect his advice, now. After a little further +thought, he joined his companions.</p> +<p>"Come," he said, "we had really better be moving. I believe we +are in real danger."</p> +<p>The earnestness with which he spoke roused the others, who were +all lying at full length on the ground.</p> +<p>"But as we said before, Gale," Fortescue urged, "why shouldn't +they now attack us, if they wanted to? We have been here more than +an hour."</p> +<p>"Perhaps they may think we shall all take a nap, after our +tiffin," Will replied; "perhaps--as Yossouf thinks--they have sent +off to some other villages, for assistance. He has gone up the +hillside to look out. Anyhow, I can assure you, I think we had +better be moving."</p> +<p>"It is beastly hot," Hammond said, getting up and stretching +himself; "but as you are so earnest about it, Gale, perhaps we had +better make a move. As you say, you know no end more of these +fellows than we do; and you certainly ain't a fellow to get into a +funk about nothing.</p> +<p>"Come on, boys, we had better do as Gale tells us."</p> +<p>"That's right," Will said, cheerfully. "And look here, if we get +away from here without any disturbance, and find it all right, we +can halt again, at the first shady place we come to; and stop there +for two or three hours, till it gets cool."</p> +<p>"Wait a moment," he went on, as Hammond was about to order the +ponies to be saddled. "Just let us settle what we had best do, +should they attack us; which, if they mean it, they will do when +they see we are moving off.</p> +<p>"I have been thinking it over. We have all got bullets in our +pockets, to drop into our guns over the shot, in case of necessity. +But these smooth-bore fowling pieces are of no good, except at +close quarters; while the Afghan matchlocks will carry straight, a +long way. Therefore, if we had to make a running fight of it, we +should get the worst of it; for these fellows could keep up with +us, easily--besides, there are the servants. Therefore, if a shot +is fired, my advice is that we should make a dash at the chief's +house. Seize that, and hold it."</p> +<p>"Yes, that would be a good plan," Fortescue said, for they were +all sobered now, by Will's gravity; and convinced that there must +be good grounds for his belief in danger.</p> +<p>"Look here, Gale, we are all senior to you in the date of our +commissions, but you have seen no end of service and adventure; +therefore I vote that you shall be commanding officer, until we get +back to camp."</p> +<p>The others willingly agreed.</p> +<p>"Very well," Will said, "I will do my best.</p> +<p>"Hammond, will you tell your servant to get ready for a start, +at once. Speak to him quietly and carelessly. Then, as the men move +up more towards the ponies, tell them--in Hindustanee--to go about +their work quietly but, in case of any trouble with the Afghans, to +out with their swords, and join us in a rush at the chief's +house."</p> +<p>Hammond carried out his instructions. The two Beloochees were +not taken by surprise; for they, as well as Yossouf, had been +feeling uneasy at the disappearance of all women and children from +the scene. The other men looked startled; but they were stout +fellows and, as all the native servants, were armed with swords, to +enable them to resist sudden attacks by the country people; and as +they had unbounded faith in their masters, they went about the work +of packing up the plates and dishes, and preparing for a start, +quietly enough.</p> +<p>As the Syces began to put the saddles on the tats, the Afghans +spoke quickly and angrily together. Two or three minutes later, +Yossouf arrived. He had evidently been running, for his breath came +quick; but he now walked forward in a leisurely way.</p> +<p>"Two large parties are coming, master; one down the valley, and +the other across the hills. They have got flags with them, and I am +sure they are going to attack us."</p> +<p>Just at this moment an Afghan lad joined his seniors, and spoke +rapidly to them. Will judged at once that he also had been placed +on the watch. The chief of the village, accompanied by two or three +of his men, now stepped forward.</p> +<p>"Ask the sahibs," he said to Yossouf, "why they are in such a +hurry--why they want to start in the heat of the day? They had +better wait till it is cooler."</p> +<p>Will did not wait for Yossouf's translation, but answered +direct:</p> +<p>"We have duties at the camp, and must return at once."</p> +<p>The chief was surprised that one of the young officers should +speak his tongue so fluently.</p> +<p>"It looks as if you were not pleased with the hospitality of our +village," he said, "that you should hurry away so quickly."</p> +<p>"We are content with it--so far--but we must be off, now.</p> +<p>"Bring up the ponies quickly," he said to Yossouf. "Never mind +those things, there is not a moment to be lost."</p> +<p>Yossouf and the servants brought up the ponies. The chief laid +his hand on one of the bridles, and drew a pistol.</p> +<p>"Kaffir dogs," he said, "you shall not leave us, at all."</p> +<p>Will's hand was already on his revolver and, before the chief +could level his pistol, he fired; and the Afghan fell dead.</p> +<p>There was a shout of rage from the others, and their long +matchlocks were leveled It was well the party were prepared, or all +might have been shot down, at once; but the instant Will fired, his +friends raised their double-barreled guns to their shoulders and +let fly the contents among the Afghans who--thrown into confusion +by the sudden and unexpected attack--fired wildly, several of them +dropping, from the effects of the shot.</p> +<p>"Now," Will shouted, "to the house, everyone of you!"</p> +<p>There was a rush and, before the Afghans knew what had happened, +the little party had burst through those standing at the door of +the house, and had barred and bolted it within. There were but two +men inside; and these, running upstairs, leaped from the windows. A +wild screaming was heard from the women and children.</p> +<p>"Yossouf, tell these women that we don't want to hurt them; but +that they must be silent, and keep the children quiet, We have got +enough to think about without this frightful row, inside. Then, +when you have got them quiet, put them all in one room together, +upstairs, and keep guard at the door. See that none of them leave +the room; for they might steal down and open the door, to admit +their friends, while we are busy.</p> +<p>"What! Fortescue, are you hit?"</p> +<p>"I am done for!" the young officer replied, faintly; "one of +their bullets has gone through my body; but never mind me, +now."</p> +<p>As he spoke he tottered, and would have fallen; had not the +others supported him, and gently laid him down on a heap of skins, +which served as an Afghan bed. Then--leaving his servant to attend +to him, for a minute--the others ran upstairs, to see what was +going on, without.</p> +<p>"Be careful!" Will exclaimed. "Don't show a head above the roof, +or at a loophole, or you will get a bullet in your brain, to a +certainty. Stand well back, so that they can't see you."</p> +<p>Already a pattering fire of musketry had broken out, round the +house; but not an Afghan was to be seen, every man having taken his +position in shelter.</p> +<p>"There is nothing to do, at present," Will said. "When the other +parties arrive, they may make an attack; but I don't think they +will do so, till night.</p> +<p>"Hammond, you had better go down to Fortescue, at present. One +of the Syces can take Yossouf's place on guard over the women, and +he can help you. The lad is a good nurse, but I fear there is +nothing to be done for the poor fellow."</p> +<p>A few minutes later a wild outburst of shouts and yells, and a +great firing of guns, announced that the other parties had arrived; +and the cracking fire of the matchlocks around the fort became +incessant. The defenders did not attempt to return it. It would +only have been throwing away lives, uselessly, to approach any of +the loopholes. In a quarter of an hour, Hammond rejoined his +companions.</p> +<p>"He is gone, poor fellow!" he said. "He never spoke again. The +bullet went close to the heart. I think he has bled to death, +internally.</p> +<p>"I have handed his revolver to one of the Syces, and his gun to +the other. Your man, Yossouf, has a revolver."</p> +<p>"What on earth are we to do now, Gale?" Plater asked. "You have +been right thus far and, if it hadn't been for you putting us up to +make a rush here, we should have been done for, long ago. But we +are not much better off; for here we are, cooped up, and the +betting is a hundred to one against our being rescued, in time. No +one will know where to look for us and, though we may beat them off +two or three times, in the end it is likely to go hard with +us."</p> +<p>"Couldn't we send a messenger, with the news of the fix we are +in?" Lowther asked; "though I don't see how any one is to get +through."</p> +<p>"That's what I have been thinking about, ever since I first +planned coming here," Will said; "but I am sure no one could get +through. The Afghans know the importance of it and, when it gets +dark, they will be so thick round the place that a mouse couldn't +make its way through them, unobserved."</p> +<p>The situation was gloomy enough; but there was no lack of good +spirits among the young officers, the danger causing their blood to +course rapidly through their veins. Will sat on the floor, apart +from the others. They had made him their commanding officer, and +the responsibility of thinking for them devolved upon his +shoulders.</p> +<p>Suddenly a thought struck him, and he leaped to his feet, with a +shout.</p> +<p>"I've got it!"</p> +<p>"You will get it, if you don't mind," Hammond said, dryly; as a +bullet passed through one of the loopholes, and struck the wall an +inch or two from Will's head. "But what is it?"</p> +<p>"When it gets quite dusk we will call a parley, and tell them we +don't want to keep the women here. They are only in our way, and +eat up the food; so we will open the door, and let them go."</p> +<p>"But what will you do that for, Gale? You were saying, a short +time ago, that the women could be kept as hostages."</p> +<p>"So they might, Hammond; but it will be more useful to us to let +them go. There are seven women here. Six of them shall go out; and +with them, in the clothes of the seventh, Yossouf."</p> +<p>"Capital! Capital!" the others exclaimed. "Don't you think they +will notice him?"</p> +<p>"No," Will said, "we won't do it till dusk, and some of these +women are as tall as he is. They will hurry them away as quickly as +possible, so as to recommence the attack and, wrapped up as these +Afghan women are, no one could see the difference. Once fairly +away, we can trust Yossouf for finding an opportunity of slipping +away, and bringing us help."</p> +<p>Will now laid the plan before Yossouf, who at once agreed to +attempt it. The day passed slowly, the fire of the enemy being kept +up, without intermission.</p> +<p>"Now," Will said at last, "it is getting dark enough, let us put +the plan into operation. In the first place the women must be +separated, and taken into separate rooms; the one Yossouf has fixed +upon, as nearest his height, into a room by herself. Then Yossouf +must tell the old mother of the chief that they are to be released; +and that she must show herself on the roof, and make them stop +firing, till they have gone out. While she is doing that, he can +slip down and dress himself in the robes of the woman. She must be +gagged, to prevent her screaming, or making a row, as her +companions go out."</p> +<p>Greatly surprised was the old woman, at being told that she was +to be released. These Kaffirs must be mad, she thought, to give up +their hostages. However, she at once proceeded to carry the orders +into effect.</p> +<p>Before raising her head above the roof, she uttered a loud +quavering cry--the cry of welcome of the Afghan women. The firing +without instantly ceased. Again raising the cry, she stepped out on +to the roof; and shouted that the English did not want to keep the +women, and that the door would be open for them to come +out--providing the Afghans promised that no attempt to enter should +be made, and that none should move from their present places, until +the women had fairly left.</p> +<p>There was a shout of surprise and satisfaction; and one of the +chiefs rose to his feet, and gave the promise in the name of his +companions.</p> +<p>"How many are there of you?" he asked.</p> +<p>"Seven," the woman answered.</p> +<p>"Are the children to come?"</p> +<p>"We may take away the babies, but the three boys are to remain +behind."</p> +<p>Five minutes later the door of the fort opened, and seven +figures came out. Not a shot was heard, until they had passed down +the street of the village, and had entered a house at the further +end; then the rapid fire commenced again. Twice, during the +evening, did the Afghans attempt to storm the little fort, but were +each time repulsed, with loss; the fire of the five double-barreled +guns--loaded with shot and bullets--and of the revolvers proving +too much for them.</p> +<p>The second attack was made about eleven. A quarter of an hour +later, wild shouts were heard outside. There was an instant +cessation of the enemy's fire; and then, in the silence, the deep +thundering sound of galloping horses was heard.</p> +<p>"Hurrah!" Will shouted, "here they are."</p> +<p>A minute later, the Third Bombay Cavalry dashed up to the fort. +The door was thrown open, and the little garrison ran out.</p> +<p>"All safe?" the officer in command asked.</p> +<p>"All safe, except Fortescue--who was killed at the first +attack."</p> +<p>"So we heard, from your boy," the officer said. "He has ridden +back with us, as guide.</p> +<p>"Now, lads, dismount and clear the village. Shoot every man you +find, turn the women out of the houses, and then set them on fire. +Don't waste any time over it, for the rascals are swarming round +the place.</p> +<p>"Captain Lawson, you take your troop and dismount it as +skirmishers, round the place; and keep them off, till we have done +here.</p> +<p>"Here, you four men who brought the powder kegs, carry them +inside this fort. We are going to blow it up, to give them a +lesson."</p> +<p>Ten minutes later, the cavalry were again in their saddles. +Spare horses had been brought for the four officers; and the +servants mounted the tats, which would be able to keep up with the +cavalry. The flames were already bursting out brightly from the +houses.</p> +<p>The yells of the Afghans rose high, and their bullets flew +thickly over the village; but they kept at a respectful distance. +The officer in command gave the word, and the party set off at a +trot. Before they had left the village a deep roar was heard, and +they knew that the Afghan fort was destroyed. Two hours later they +arrived safely in camp; where the four rescued officers were warmly +congratulated, on their narrow escape, by their friends.</p> +<p>On the 14th of July, the conspiracy among the Wali's troops came +to a head. They openly mutinied; and marched out, with their cannon +and arms, from the camp. This was situated at a short distance from +that of the British, and Colonel Ripon was the first to gallop in +with the news.</p> +<p>Unfortunately, the British commander was not a man endowed with +promptness of decision; and no steps were taken, until the +mutineers had proceeded a considerable distance. Then the cavalry +and artillery were despatched, in pursuit. Had the order been given +at once, there can be no doubt that the Wali's force would have +been completely cut up; and those who escaped would have arrived a +mere horde of fugitives, for the most part without arms, at Ayoub's +camp.</p> +<p>Late as was the pursuit it was not ineffectual. Six British guns +opened fire upon the Wali's artillery--which was in rear of the +retreating column--with such effect that the gunners were seized +with a panic and, cutting the traces, fled for their lives. A good +many were cut down by the British cavalry, and the six guns +deserted by them were brought into camp.</p> +<p>Colonel Burrows' little force now stood alone; for he had with +him but 1500 infantry, 500 cavalry, and six of his own guns, +besides those taken from the mutineers--a force altogether +disproportioned to that with which Ayoub was advancing; swelled, as +it was, by the accession of the Wali's army. A message was sent to +General Primrose at Candahar, asking for reinforcements; but that +officer, although he had a considerable force at his disposal, +declined to despatch any reinforcements, whatever.</p> +<p>News now arrived that Ayoub, instead of marching direct upon +Girishk, had crossed the Helmund higher up; and was moving across +the country, by a line parallel with the road from Candahar to +Girishk. By this movement he would have the option of placing +himself either between Colonel Burrows' force and Candahar; of +marching direct upon the latter city; or of keeping to the north, +and coming down upon the road between Candahar and Shahpur, and +then marching direct for Cabul. Under these circumstances General +Burrows determined to fall back, at once, to a spot where he might +oppose Ayoub's advancing force. Accordingly, the brigade marched +from the Helmund to a village called Khusk-I-Nakhud, and there +encamped. General Nuttal, with the cavalry, made reconnaissances in +the direction of the enemy.</p> +<p>The people of the country held altogether aloof, and no accurate +information was obtained as to the strength of Ayoub's army; which +was believed, by General Burrows, to be very much smaller than it +really was. Early in the morning of the 26th, it was known that +Ayoub was marching upon Maiwand--a village farther to the +north--and at half-past six, the troops moved out to intercept +him.</p> +<p>It was at this time believed that it was only the enemy's +cavalry with whom we should have to deal. Upon arriving near +Maiwand, however, news was brought in, by spies, that the whole of +the enemy were at hand. The force was at once halted, in a position +singularly ill-adapted for a fighting ground. Deep ravines ran both +to the right, and to the left, of the ground occupied by the +British. By these, the enemy could advance under shelter, until +within a short distance. On either side were ranges of hills, +completely commanding the position.</p> +<p>It is difficult to imagine a more unsuitable position than that +which General Burrows prepared to hold, with a mere handful of +troops, against an enormously superior force. What was the total +strength of Ayoub's army was never exactly known--as it was swollen +by enormous numbers of Ghazis, and tribesmen from the villages. +These were, in fact, far more formidable opponents than the regular +Afghan troops; as their tremendous rushes, and indifference to the +loss inflicted upon them, were trying in the extreme for even the +best-trained troops to withstand.</p> +<p>The morning was thick, and but little could be seen of Ayoub's +army. His cavalry, indeed, were found to be moving about in large +masses; but these fell back, at our advance. Lieutenant +Maclean--with two horse artillery guns, and a small cavalry +escort--galloped out on the extreme left, and opened fire on the +Afghan cavalry. His infantry at once appeared in force, swarming +down towards the guns; and these were withdrawn, to a position +nearer to our line.</p> +<p>The British infantry were formed in the following order: the +66th were on the right, the Bombay Grenadiers in the center, and +Jacob's Rifles on the left. Two guns were placed in position to +support the 66th, on the right. The remaining four British guns, +and the six smooth-bore guns--captured from the Wali's +mutineers--were placed between the Grenadiers and Jacob's Rifles. +The 3rd Scinde Horse and 3rd Bombay Light Cavalry were formed in +the rear of the line.</p> +<p>As the enemy advanced, our guns opened a heavy fire upon them; +but it was fully an hour before their artillery replied. Then +thirty guns were unmasked, and opened fire upon the British line. +Under cover of this heavy fire, swarms of the enemy's irregulars +advanced towards our position. When within 600 or 700 yards of the +66th, the British opened with their Martini rifles; and the shower +of lead, at such an unexpected distance, checked the advance of the +enemy.</p> +<p>For some time the artillery duel continued; but the enemy's guns +were then moved on to the hills, on either side of the British +position, and a terrible crossfire was opened from both flanks. At +about two o'clock, the smooth-bore guns began to get short of +ammunition. Only sixty rounds had been captured with them and, +there being no reserve of ammunition fitting them, they ceased +fire.</p> +<p>The position now became most serious. From the ravines on either +side the Ghazis swarmed up, in vast numbers. The artillery +thundered from the heights upon our troops. Some of their batteries +were brought up to within very short distances; and great numbers +of the enemy, keeping along the ravines sheltered from our fire, +came up in the rear and seized the villages there.</p> +<p>The companies of Jacob's Rifles on the left; after resisting, +for some time, the furious attacks of the Ghazis, began to waver. +The enemy's cavalry swept down in heavy masses; while our +cavalry--for some reason which has never been explained--remained +inactive. The general has stated that he ordered them to charge, +but that they would not do so; the cavalry affirm that they never +received orders. Anyhow, at this critical moment the 3rd Scinde +Horse and the 3rd Bombay Cavalry remained inactive.</p> +<p>The confusion amid Jacob's Rifles rapidly grew, in spite of the +efforts of the officers to rally them. The Ghazis swept down upon +them; and the Rifles broke in confusion, and rushed among the +Bombay Grenadiers who--hitherto fighting steadily--also fell into +confusion, as the Rifles and Ghazis burst into their ranks.</p> +<p>"This is hot work," Will Gale said to his captain, when the +enemy's guns, on the heights on either side, began to play on the +line of the 66th with their flank fire.</p> +<p>"It is, indeed," the officer answered, "and the fire of the +enemy, from the edge of that ravine, is very trying. I wish to +heaven the general would move us farther back. He has made a +hideous mistake in fighting on such ground as this."</p> +<p>"It would be difficult to withdraw, now," Will said. "It would +shake the confidence of the men. I think, myself, that we ought to +advance, and drive the enemy before us, till we take up some really +defensible position; but I doubt if the Afghans would wait for +that. In all our history, a British charge against an Indian enemy +has always been successful, no matter how great the odds."</p> +<p>"It is a bad lookout," the captain said, as a shell burst close +by him, killing and wounding five or six men. "It is quite evident +that if we stay where we are we must, in time, be annihilated. Our +fellows will stand, no doubt; they are English soldiers, and well +officered. But how can one expect the two Indian regiments--with +only three or four white officers, each--to remain steady, under +such a fire as this, and with these desperate charges of Ghazis +upon them?"</p> +<p>Very steadily the 66th held their ground, in spite of a flanking +fire of artillery and musketry. Every time the enemy gathered at +the edge of the ravine, for a rush, the heavy fire of the company +on the flank--which was wheeled back at a right angle to the line, +so as to face them--drove them back to shelter again. The regiment +had suffered very heavily. Still, the officers felt that they could +endure, till nightfall.</p> +<p>Of victory, there was now no idea; for to conquer, men must act +and, here, they were only called upon to suffer. Presently a wild +tumult was heard to the left; and then the men of the scattered +native regiments burst, in a tumultuous mass, into the ranks of the +66th.</p> +<p>"Steady, men, steady!" shouted the officers.</p> +<p>But it was of no avail. All was in hopeless confusion. The +artillery fired, until the Ghazis were within a few yards of them; +then they hastily limbered up, and fell back. But the Ghazis were +too close at hand, and two of the guns were lost.</p> +<p>Even now, had the cavalry charged upon the Afghans, time would +have been given to the broken infantry to form again into a solid +mass, and to draw off from the field in good order. But the cavalry +remained inactive. Both these regiments had a record of good +service in the field; but their conduct, on this occasion, was +little short of disgraceful.</p> +<p>Among the infantry all order was lost and, mixed up in a +confused mass, hemmed in on all sides by the enemy, they fell +back--each man fighting for himself--upon the village behind. Here, +in the walled enclosures, the 66th and the Grenadiers rallied, and +fought nobly. Each house was used as a fortress, and only carried +after a desperate struggle. Here Colonel Galbraith, and nine other +officers of the 66th were killed; and the greater portion of the +regiment shared their fate.</p> +<p>Some bodies of the troops--entirely cut off from the rest, in +their retreat--stood their ground in the open, and fought +desperately to the end; surrounding themselves, ere they died, with +a ring of slaughtered enemies. So desperate was the defense in some +cases that--outnumbering them fifty to one--the enemy never dared +to come to close quarters with the gallant band; which kept up a +rain of fire on them, till the last man had fallen. So long and +stoutly was the village defended, that the great majority of the +broken fugitives had time to pass out behind.</p> +<p>General Burrows--who had done his best to stem the rout--drew +off the shattered remains; and fell back with them, in fair +order.</p> +<p>Will Gale's company was in the right flank of the regiment and, +therefore, farthest from the point where the line was broken by the +rush of the native troops. Seeing what was taking place, the +captain formed his men into company square; and fell back to the +village, in fair order. The company then threw itself into a house, +with a walled garden, to the right of the village; and its steady +fire, in no slight degree, helped to keep back the Afghans, and +cover the retreat. This they did, until General Burrows himself +rode up, and ordered them to fall in.</p> +<p>"Your company has done good service, sir," he said to Captain +Fletcher; "and it is for you, now, to cover the retreat."</p> +<p>Slowly and in good order the company fell back and, joining the +troops who still retained their formation, retired slowly; facing +about, and pouring volley after volley into the Afghans, as they +came out through the village. For two miles, the enemy pressed +closely upon them; but their loss had already been immense, and all +desired to join in the plundering of the British camp. Therefore +the pursuit slackened and, three miles from the village, the rear +guard were ordered to the main body, at quick march.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch20" id="Ch20">Chapter 20</a>: Candahar.</h2> +<p>"Thank God that is over," Captain Fletcher said, as he lifted +his cap and wiped the perspiration from his forehead; "but the +regiment is almost annihilated."</p> +<p>"I fear the worst is yet to come," Will said. "We are fifty +miles from Candahar; and when we came out we had to carry water +with us, for there was none to be found, on the way. We have a +fearful march before us.</p> +<p>"What on earth has become of the cavalry? They have done nothing +to cover the retreat."</p> +<p>"They have ridden on ahead," the captain said, bitterly, +"without having drawn a sword in this day's fight; and will ride +into Candahar tomorrow morning, without losing a man, save the few +who were knocked over by the artillery."</p> +<p>Presently an officer rode up.</p> +<p>"Ah! Gale," he exclaimed, "thank God you are safe. I rode back +to see."</p> +<p>And Colonel Ripon shook hands warmly with the young officer.</p> +<p>"I am glad to see that you are safe, sir," Will answered. "This +has been a terrible day."</p> +<p>"It has, indeed," the colonel said, mournfully, "terrible! There +has been nothing like it, since the retreat from Cabul in 1848. And +how many of these poor fellows will reach Candahar, God only knows! +The water bottles wore emptied, hours ago. The men are already +exhausted with the long day's work, and parched with thirst; and we +have fifty miles' tramp before us. Have you any wounded men here +with you?"</p> +<p>"Several, sir, some of them badly hurt."</p> +<p>"Put one of the worst on my horse," Colonel Ripon said, +dismounting; "and push on briskly, lads. There are some carts +ahead. We will turn out the stores, and put the wounded in.</p> +<p>"You had better let the men throw away their knapsacks, and all +useless encumbrances," he said to Captain Fletcher. "You will have +to march--and perhaps fight--all night; and must husband your +strength."</p> +<p>Steadily, the rear guard followed the broken column. It +consisted of men of the 60th and Grenadiers, mingled together; and +well did they carry out their arduous duties. A portion were thrown +out on each flat, while the rest kept to the road. This was strewn +with arms and accouterments of all kinds. The men's hearts were +wrung to the core, by the sight of the number of wounded who had +dropped by the roadside; and who implored them, as they passed, not +to leave them to be murdered by the enemy. Many of them were lifted +and placed in carts--everything else being turned out, to make way +for them--but many had to be left behind; for it would be +impossible to carry them, on such a march.</p> +<p>Slowly the long night passed. All along the line ahead, a +scattered fire of musketry could be heard; as the villagers shot +down the fugitives who, in hopes of finding water, straggled from +the road. Sometimes sharp volleys rang out, as the troops stood at +bay, and drove back the natives, when they pressed upon them. +Several times the rear guard were hotly engaged as the +Afghans--furious at seeing their prey slipping from their +fingers--mustered and fell upon them; but each time they were +repulsed, and the column held on its way.</p> +<p>Will was in command of a mixed band, of some forty men, which +moved to the right of the road. Colonel Ripon kept by his side, but +few words were spoken, through the long night. The men were half +mad with thirst and, had there been water near, nothing could have +restrained them from rushing to it; but they knew that none could +be obtained, until they reached Candahar. Many, in utter despair at +the distance before them, threw themselves down on the ground to +die. But the others kept on--stumbling and staggering as they +marched, stupid and half blind--rallying only when the order came +to turn, and repulse the enemy.</p> +<p>Two or three times in the night the rear guard halted, for a few +minutes; and the men threw themselves down on the sand, where they +picked the scattered herbage within their reach, and chewed it to +quench their burning thirst.</p> +<p>Daylight was a welcome relief. They knew indeed that, with the +rising of the sun, their torments would grow still greater; but the +change from the long dreary darkness cheered them; and they could +now see, from the nature of the country, that they were within +fifteen miles of Candahar. They marched on for two more hours, and +then the officer in command of the little body saw that they could +do no more.</p> +<p>He therefore led them to a village on rising ground, a short +distance from the road, and halted them there. The exhausted men +threw themselves down in the shade of the houses. They had the long +day yet to pass, and their thirst seemed unendurable; still, the +halt was welcome, for there was not a man but felt that his +strength was at an end, and that it would have been an +impossibility to reach the city.</p> +<p>Captain Fletcher picked out a few of the least exhausted men, +and placed them in the outskirts of the village to call the rest to +arms in case the Afghans--numbers of whom were hovering +round--should venture upon an attack. For the first hour after +reaching the village, not a man moved from the spot where he had +thrown himself down. The officers had searched the houses, and +found some jars of water. These they carried round, and doled out a +few mouthfuls to each man. Small though the amount was, the relief +afforded was immense and, as soon as their first exhaustion had +subsided, the men scattered through the gardens; plucking the vine +leaves and chewing them and, fortunately, discovering a few gourds, +which were cut up into small fragments, and divided.</p> +<p>The day wore on; and at one o'clock there was a shout of joy, +for a body of cavalry were seen approaching, at a rapid trot, from +the town. Soon they rode up, and proved to be a regiment which had +been despatched, from the town, for the relief of the stragglers. +At daybreak the cavalry, riding in many miles ahead of the +infantry, brought the news to the city of the defeat; and something +very like a panic at first ensued. It was some time before anything +was done to succor the exhausted fugitives, who were pressing +forward to the city. But at last a force was sent out with wagons, +and bullocks with water-skins; and thus hundreds of lives, which +would otherwise have been sacrificed, were saved. The cavalry had +come out with full water bottles, and relief was soon afforded to +the worn-out rear guard, who at once fell into rank, and resumed +their march towards Candahar; the cavalry, who had brought a few +light carts with them, pursuing their journey for some distance +further, to succor and collect those who had fallen on the +road.</p> +<p>The sun was just setting as the rear guard of General Burrows' +brigade reached Candahar; after having marched, since the previous +morning, sixty miles without food, and with only a few mouthfuls of +water; and having fought for nearly twenty-four hours of that +time.</p> +<p>Every preparation was made, in the city, for the expected +attack. The defenses were strengthened; the lower portion of the +populace--who would be likely to declare against them--were turned +out of the town; and provisions were collected from the country +round. Fortunately, ample time was afforded them for these +preparations. Ayoub's army had been, to a great extent, demoralized +by the tremendous losses which it had sustained, in the defeat of +this handful of British troops; and some days elapsed before it +moved forward from Maiwand. Then, by easy marches, it approached +Candahar; and took up its position in the plain, to the north of +the city.</p> +<p>Just as the rear guard of General Burrows' force were starting +from their halting place, for their last march into the city, Will +Gale was delighted at seeing Yossouf approaching. He had not seen +him since the regiment marched out from Khusk-I-Nakhud. The young +Afghan had remained, with the other followers, in the village +behind Maiwand during the battle when, while the resistance of the +British was still continuing, the Afghans had worked round by the +ravines and entered the village.</p> +<p>Yossouf had been obliged to join in the retreat, which was at +once commenced by the baggage train. Full of anxiety for the fate +of his master, he had hurried forward at his best speed to +Candahar; reaching the city only an hour or two after the arrival +of the cavalry. In spite of the distance he had already performed, +he did not delay for an instant; but set out again with some +provisions, and a bottle of wine, and one of water hidden away in +his dress. He had resolved to push forward, at all hazards, until +he had either joined his master--whether on his retreat, or as a +prisoner in Ayoub's army--or had discovered his body on the field +of battle, and given him burial.</p> +<p>Passing through the throng of fugitives, and questioning any of +the men of the 66th he met, he made his way forward. He had learned +that Will's company had withdrawn, in a body, from the battlefield +to the village but, further than this, none of the fugitives could +tell him; and his delight was exuberant, when he saw Will marching +along with his company. The little supply which he had brought was +at once served out, among the men who most needed it; and Will--who +had been in a state of great uneasiness concerning the safety of +his faithful follower--was greatly cheered by finding him alive, +and unhurt.</p> +<p>The news of the defeat of Maiwand produced an immense sensation, +in India; and measures were at once taken for the relief of +Candahar. A strong division was ordered to march from Cabul, +through Ghuzni; while General Phayre, who commanded the force at +Quettah, was also ordered to advance to the assistance of the +garrison.</p> +<p>General Phayre, however--although comparatively close to +Candahar--was unable to advance, for some time. The same miserable +economy which had dispersed the transport train, after the +signature of the Treaty of Gundamuk; and had so delayed the advance +of General Roberts towards Cabul, after the massacre of the +mission, again paralyzed the action of the British troops--the +whole of the transport train, collected at so much cost and +difficulty, having been dismissed to their homes, as soon as the +negotiations with Abdul-Rahman held out a prospect of peace. Many +weeks elapsed before a sufficient number of baggage animals could +be collected to enable General Phayre to advance, with his +relieving column.</p> +<p>In Candahar, things passed quietly. The enemy, from time to +time, fired shot and shell into the city from distant positions +but, believing that no relief could reach the garrison before the +supplies of food were exhausted, and that it must therefore yield +to hunger, Ayoub's army contented themselves by watching the city +from a distance; and by keeping a cordon of troops round its walls, +to prevent the country people from bringing in provisions.</p> +<p>Detached bodies, indeed, often crept up near the walls; and kept +up a musketry fire at any troops showing themselves, there. But no +attempts were made to batter down the walls, or to make anything +like a resolute assault. Ayoub's army had, indeed, greatly lost +heart. If 1500 British soldiers, attacked under circumstances of +the greatest disadvantage, had killed 6000 or 7000 of their +assailants; what might not be the slaughter which a greatly +superior force would inflict, when sheltered behind stone +walls?</p> +<p>From one village, situate half a mile from the eastern gate of +the city, so constant and harassing a fire was maintained, by the +enemy, that General Primrose resolved to make a sortie, to capture +it. The affair was, however, badly planned, and resulted in +failure. The Afghans--sheltered in the strongly-built houses--kept +up so severe a fire upon the assailants that these were obliged to +fall back, with a considerable loss. After that, no further sorties +were attempted; and the city remained in quiet, until the relieving +columns were close at hand.</p> +<p>The force selected to march from Cabul to the relief of +Candahar, under the command of General Roberts, consisted of the +92nd Highlanders, 23rd Pioneers, 24th and 25th Punjaub Infantry; +the 2nd, 4th, and 5th Ghoorkas; the 72nd Highlanders, 2nd battalion +of the 60th, the Norfolk Rangers; the 2rd, 3rd, and 15th Sikhs. +There were three batteries of artillery, and four cavalry +regiments: the 9th Lancers, the 3rd Bengal Cavalry, the 3rd Punjaub +Cavalry, and the Central India Horse. This gave a total of about +10,000 fighting men. There were, in addition, 8000 followers to +feed, 7000 horses, and some 8000 transport and artillery mules, and +ponies.</p> +<p>The Ameer did his best to assist the force; which was, indeed, +going to fight his battle, as well as their own. The question was +whether so large a force would be able to subsist on the road and, +in order to assist them to do so, he sent orders to all the tribes +along the line of march to aid the column, in every way. In +consequence, no difficulties were met with; and scarce a shot was +fired on the way down.</p> +<p>In seven days after starting Ghuzni was reached, and in fifteen +Khelat-I-Ghilzai--where Colonel Tanner, with a small garrison, had +been besieged by the local tribes since the advance of Ayoub. +Khelat-I-Ghilzai stood near the lower end of the valley down which +the column was advancing, and was but three days' march from +Candahar. From the day of their leaving Cabul, to their arrival at +Khelat-I-Ghilzai, the troops had marched a distance of fifteen +miles a day--not an extraordinary distance for a single regiment to +perform, but a wonderful feat for a force containing some 18,000 +persons and 9000 baggage animals, marching through mountains and +valleys.</p> +<p>As the relieving force approached Candahar, Ayoub drew off his +troops from around the city; and took up a strong position on some +hills, a few miles to the north. On the 27th of August Roberts' +cavalry were near enough to establish heliographic communication +with the town and, on the 31st, the column entered Candahar.</p> +<p>During the siege, the duties of the garrison had been heavy. A +strong force was always held ready to get under arms, instantly, in +case of an attack by the enemy. The number of sentries on the +walls, magazines, and lower important points was large. The town +had to be kept in order, and the inhabitants strictly watched. +House-to-house requisitions were made for provisions; and the +greatest economy was used in the distribution of these, as the +garrison had no means of knowing how long a time might elapse +before any could arrive.</p> +<p>The death of ten officers of the 66th--all of senior standing to +himself--had placed Will Gale at the top of the list of lieutenants +and, as several officers were disabled by wounds, he was now +performing captain's duty, and was in charge of a company. There +were, indeed, but three companies now in the 66th Regiment; so +great having been the loss, that the whole of the survivors now +made up but this number.</p> +<p>Among the other duties of the troops was that of protecting the +many houses which had been left vacant, by the hasty retirement of +many of the native merchants and traders, at the approach of +Ayoub's force. Colonel Primrose--anxious to lessen the number of +mouths to be fed--encouraged the exodus; promising to take charge +of all property left behind. This duty proved a troublesome one, as +the lower class--which still remained in the city--were constantly +endeavoring to break into, and loot, the houses thus left vacant by +their proprietors. In order to protect these as much as possible, +many of the officers were directed to move from their quarters in +the barracks, and take up their residence in them; an order which +was gladly obeyed, as the exchange, from hot confined quarters to +the roomy dwellings of the merchants, was a very pleasant one.</p> +<p>Will Gale was one of those who so moved and, with Yossouf and +two native followers, had been quartered in the house of a wealthy +silk merchant. One night, he was aroused from sleep by Yossouf.</p> +<p>"Sahib!" the latter whispered, "I hear people moving below. I +think there are thieves in the house."</p> +<p>Will rose noiselessly, slipped on his trousers and shoes +and--taking up a revolver in one hand, and a sword in +another--stole downstairs; followed by Yossouf, with his long +Afghan knife in his hand. The door of the warehouse was open; and +within it Will saw, by the faint light of a lamp which one of them +carried, four Afghan ruffians engaged in making up silks into large +bundles, in readiness to carry off. His approach was unnoticed; and +on reaching the door he leveled his pistol, and shouted to the +Afghans to surrender, as his prisoners.</p> +<p>In reply, they dropped the lamp, and made a sudden rush at him. +He fired his pistol hastily in the darkness but, in an instant, the +Afghans were upon him. The first man he cut down, but he was +knocked over by the rush of the others. Two fell upon him; but +Yossouf bounded upon them like a tiger, and buried his knife to the +hilt in their backs, in quick succession. The last of the +party--without staying to see what was the fate of his friends--at +once took to his heels and, rushing to the door leading to the +street, made his escape.</p> +<p>Yossouf raised Will to his feet,</p> +<p>"Are you hurt?" he asked, anxiously.</p> +<p>"Nothing to speak of," Will replied. "I am a bit shaken, and +bruised by the fall. Those fellows, in the darkness, were upon me +before I could see them.</p> +<p>"Thanks to you, I have escaped without hurt, Yossouf; and had it +not been for your aid, they would assuredly have made an end of me. +My pistol had fallen from my hand as they knocked me down and, on +the ground, I could not have defended myself with my sword, for an +instant. Once more, Yossouf, I owe my life to you."</p> +<p>So many attempts, similar to that made upon the house occupied +by Will Gale, took place that sentries were posted, at ten o'clock +at night, at the entrances to the various streets in which the +houses left deserted by the native traders were situated; and +orders were given that no natives should be out of their houses, +after that hour, unless provided with a pass signed by the +commandant of the city.</p> +<p>Several messengers were from time to time sent out, to endeavor +to get through the enemy's, lines and to carry to General Phayre +the news of what was going on in the city. A few of these succeeded +in getting through, but none returned; so that, until the signal +lights were seen flashing from the distant hills, in the direction +of Khelat-I-Ghilzai, the garrison were unaware of the steps which +were being taken for their rescue. Even had unforeseen obstacles +prevented the advent of either of the relieving columns, it is +probable that the garrison of Candahar would finally have freed +itself. Colonel Primrose had, at his disposal, a force more than +double that which had fought at Maiwand; and had the British +advanced into the plain, and offered battle to Ayoub on a fair +fighting ground they should, without difficulty, have defeated his +army; whose long delays and hesitation showed how immensely their +morale had been affected by the previous battle.</p> +<p>Thus it was that Sale--after sustaining a long siege in +Jellalabad--finally sallied out, and completely defeated the +besieging army, before the arrival of the force marching to his +relief. The Candahar force was not commanded by a Sale but, had it +been given a chance to retrieve Maiwand, there can be little doubt +of what the issue would have been. Over and over again, the subject +was discussed at the messes of the various regiments; and immense +indignation was felt at the force being kept cooped up in Candahar, +when the history of India recorded scores of examples of victories +won, by British troops, against greater odds than those now opposed +to them.</p> +<p>It must be said, however, that the native portion of the army, +in Candahar, was of very inferior fighting quality to that which +operated in Eastern Afghanistan. Those regiments were, for the most +part, either Ghoorkas, Sikhs, or Punjaubees--than whom no braver +men exist. The Ghoorkas are small, active men; mountaineers by +birth, and to whom war is a passion. The Sikhs and Punjaubees, upon +the contrary, are tall, stately men; proud of the historical +fighting powers of their race. They had fought with extreme bravery +against the English but, once conquered, they became true and +faithful subjects of the English crown; and it was their fidelity +and bravery which saved England, in the dark days of the +mutiny.</p> +<p>The Bombay troops, upon the other hand, were drawn from races +which had long ceased to be warlike. They possessed none of the +dash and fire of the hardier troops; their organization was--and +still is--defective; and the system of officering them was +radically bad. The contrast between the two was strongly shown, in +the conduct of the Sikh and Ghoorka regiments with General Stewart, +when attacked by the sudden rush of the Ghazis, at Ahmed Khil; and +that of the Bombay Grenadiers and Jacob's Foot, under precisely +similar circumstances at Maiwand.</p> +<p>There is no doubt, however, that the main reason why General +Primrose did not sally out and give battle on the plain of Candahar +was that, in case of defeat, the populace of the city would +assuredly have closed their gates against the army; and that +nothing would have remained but a disastrous retreat across the +Kojak Pass--a retreat of which very few would ever have survived to +tell.</p> +<p>Their enforced idleness, in Candahar, made the time pass slowly +and heavily; and it was with the greatest joy that the garrison +hailed the entry of the columns of General Roberts.</p> +<p>Upon his arrival the general lost no time in reconnoitering the +position of the enemy. It was well chosen for defense His army was +encamped behind the range of hills known as the Baba-Wali Hills. A +road ran direct over these hills; and here a strong force was +stationed, supported by artillery in position. The last hill of the +range, on the southwest, was known as the Pir-Paimal Hill; and by +turning this the camp of Ayoub's army would be taken in flank, and +the defenses in front rendered useless. The reconnaissance which +was made by the cavalry; supported by the 15th Sikhs, advanced +close to the central hill. The enemy unmasked five guns and opened +upon them, and the Afghans poured down to the attack. There was, +however, no intention on the part of the British commander of +bringing on a battle; and the troops accordingly fell back, in good +order, to the main body.</p> +<p>A mile and a half from the city stood a low ridge of +rock--called the Picket Hill--in the line by which the column would +have to move, to turn the Pir-Paimal Hill; and this was at once +seized. A number of Ghazis stationed here fought, as usual, +desperately; but the 4th Ghoorkas repulsed their charge, and +cleared the ridge of the enemy. The general determined to attack +the enemy's position with his whole force, on the following +day.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch21" id="Ch21">Chapter 21</a>: The Battle Of +Candahar.</h2> +<p>The plan of action upon which General Roberts determined was +simple. The 1st and 2nd brigade were to advance abreast, the 3rd to +follow in support. As the 66th were to take no part in the fight, +Will Gale obtained leave to ride out with General Weatherby, with +the 3rd division.</p> +<p>The enemy were well aware of the weak point of the position +which they occupied; and they had mustered thickly in the plain, in +which were several villages; with canals cutting up the ground in +all directions, and abounding with hedges, ditches, and +enclosures--altogether, a very strongly defensible position.</p> +<p>It was at 10 o'clock, on the 1st of September, that the British +force advanced. The first division, on the right, advanced against +the large walled village of Gundi, which was strongly held by the +enemy. Against this General Macpherson sent the 92nd and the 2nd +Ghoorkas and, stubbornly as the enemy fought, the place was carried +by the bayonet.</p> +<p>On the line taken by the 2nd division--under General +Baker--three villages had successively to be carried: Abasabad, +Kaghanary, and Gundigan. The 72nd Highlanders and the 2nd Sikhs +advanced to the attack of these. The resistance of the Afghans was +stubborn in the extreme, but they were driven out. The fighting +line of the two divisions kept abreast and, for two miles, had to +fight every inch of their way; from wall to wall, from garden to +garden and, here and there, from house to house and from lane to +lane.</p> +<a id="PicH" name="PicH"></a> +<center><img src="images/h.jpg" alt= +"Illustration: Gundi carried by the Bayonet." /></center> +<p>Once or twice the attack was checked, for a few minutes, by the +desperate resistance of the Afghans--at the crossing places of +canals and in walled enclosures--and again and again, the Ghazis +rushed down upon the troops. The 3rd Sikhs and the 5th Ghoorkas +joined the fighting line and, step by step, the ground was won; +until the base of the hill was turned, and the attacking force saw, +in front of them, the great camp of Ayoub's troops. Up to this +point, the enemy had fought with the greatest bravery; but a sudden +panic seized them, now they saw that their line of retreat was +threatened by our cavalry--for an Afghan always loses heart, under +such circumstances. As if by magic, the defense ceased; and the +enemy, horse and foot--abandoning their guns, and throwing away +their arms--fled up the Argandab valley. Everything was +abandoned.</p> +<p>There was nothing more for the infantry to do but to sack +Ayoub's camp, and to park the captive guns, thirty in number. The +amount of stores and miscellaneous articles in the camp was +enormous: arms, ammunition, commissariat, and ordnance stores; +helmets, bullock huts crammed with native wearing apparel, writing +materials, Korans, English tinned meats, fruit, and money. Here, in +fact, was all the baggage which the army had brought from Herat; +together with all the spoil which they had captured at Maiwand.</p> +<p>The cavalry took up the pursuit. Unfortunately they had met with +great difficulties, in advancing through the broken country in rear +of the infantry. Had they been close at hand, when the latter +fought their way into Ayoub's camp, very few of the fugitives would +have escaped. As it was, they did good service in following up the +rout; and driving the enemy, a dispersed and broken crowd, into the +hills.</p> +<p>To the fury of the men they found, in Ayoub's camp, the body of +Lieutenant Maclaine; who had been taken prisoner at Maiwand, and +who was barbarously murdered, a few minutes before the arrival of +the English troops. The battle cost the lives of three officers: +Lieutenant Colonel Brownlow, commanding the 72nd Highlanders; +Captain Frome, of the same regiment; and Captain Straton, 2nd +battalion of the 22nd. Eleven officers were wounded, 46 men were +killed, and 202 wounded.</p> +<p>The enemy left 1200 dead on the field. Ayoub's regular regiments +scarcely fired a shot, and the British advance had been opposed +entirely by the irregulars and Ghazis; the regular regiments having +been drawn up behind the Pir-Paimal Pass, by which they expected +our main attack to be made--a delusion which was kept up by our +heavy fire, from early morning, upon the Afghan guns on the summit +of the pass. When our troops appeared round the corner of the spur +upon their flank they lost heart at once; and for the most part, +throwing away their arms, joined the body of fugitives.</p> +<p>"It would have been hard work, sir," Will Gale said to Colonel +Ripon, as they rode forward in rear of the fighting brigade, "to +have taken this position with the Candahar force, alone."</p> +<p>"It could not have been done," Colonel Ripon replied, "but no +one would have dreamed of attempting it. The Afghans say that the +force which Roberts brought down, from Cabul, was so large that +they stood on the defensive; but they would have ventured to attack +us, had we sallied out and offered battle on the level plain, round +the city. Then, I have no doubt we could have beaten them.</p> +<p>"However, all is well that ends well. Roberts has come up in +time, and has completely defeated the enemy; still, it would have +been more satisfactory had we retrieved Maiwand, by thrashing him +single-handed.</p> +<p>"Well, I suppose this is the end of the Afghan war. We have +beaten Ayoub: I hope, so effectually that Abdul-Rahman will have no +difficulty in dealing with him, in future and, if he really means +the professions of friendship which he has made us, we may hope for +peace, for some time. Probably the next time we have to fight, in +this country, it will be against the Russians and Afghans, +united.</p> +<p>"There are men in England who persist in shutting their eyes to +the certain consequences of the Russian advance towards the +northern frontier of Afghanistan; but the time will come when +England will have to rue, bitterly, the infatuation and folly of +her rulers. When that day arrives, she will have to make such an +effort, to hold her own, as she has never had to do since the days +when she stood, alone, in arms against Europe."</p> +<p>Upon the following day, Will paid a visit to his friends in the +Rangers.</p> +<p>"So you got through Maiwand safely!" the colonel said. "Upon my +word, I begin to think that you have a charmed life.</p> +<p>"I hear one of your captains died, last night. That gives you +your step, does it not?"</p> +<p>"Yes, sir."</p> +<p>"You are the luckiest young dog I ever heard of. You got your +commission, within a year of enlisting; and now, by an +extraordinary fatality, your regiment is almost annihilated; and +you mount up, by death steps, to a captain's rank, nine months +after the date of your gazette. In any other regiment in the +service, you would have been lucky if you had got three or four +steps, by this time."</p> +<p>"I am fortunate, indeed, sir," Will said. "I can scarcely +believe it, myself."</p> +<p>"Ah! whom do I see here?" the colonel exclaimed, as a mounted +officer rode through the camp. "My old friend, Ripon!</p> +<p>"Ah Ripon, how are you?"</p> +<p>The colonel reined in his horse; and the two officers, who had +not met for some years, entered into a warm conversation; while +Will strolled away to talk to some of the younger officers, who +congratulated him most heartily on the luck which had, in a few +months, taken him over their heads.</p> +<p>In the afternoon Will received a note from Colonel Ripon, asking +him to dine with him, as Colonel Shepherd was going to do so. Will +replied that he would gladly dine, but must be excused for a time, +afterwards; as he was on duty, and would have to go the rounds, in +the evening.</p> +<p>There were three or four other officers at dinner, as Colonel +Ripon had many friends in the relieving column. When dinner was +over, Will made his excuses and left; promising to look in again, +in a couple of hours, when he had finished his rounds. Soon +afterwards, the other young officers left. Colonel Shepherd, only, +remained.</p> +<p>"That is a singularly fine young fellow--young Gale, I mean," +Colonel Shepherd said; "and a singularly fortunate one. I feel +quite proud of him. It was upon my advice that he enlisted; but if +any one had told me, at the time, that he would be a captain in two +years, I should have said that it was absolutely impossible."</p> +<p>"Yes," Colonel Ripon replied, "his luck has been marvelous; but +if ever a fellow deserved it, he did. I have a very warm liking--I +may say an affection--for him. He saved my life, when I was +attacked by some Ghazis here, and must have been killed, had it not +been for his promptness, and coolness. He was wounded, too; and we +were nursed together, here. Since then I have seen a great deal of +him and, the more I see him, the more I like him.</p> +<p>"Do you know anything of him, previous to the time of his +enlisting? You told me he joined your regiment, on the day when it +arrived at Calcutta. I know nothing of his history, before that. +The subject never happened to occur, in conversation; and it was +one upon which I naturally should have felt a delicacy in asking +any questions--though I have sometimes wondered, in my own mind, +how he came to be penniless in Calcutta; as I suppose he must have +been, to have enlisted. Did you happen to hear anything about +it?"</p> +<p>"Yes, indeed," Colonel Shepherd answered. "Curiously enough, he +was by no means penniless; as he had just received 100 pounds +reward, for the services he had rendered in preventing a ship from +being captured, by the Malays. I happened to meet its captain on +shore, the day I landed; and heard from him the story of the +affair--which was as follows, as nearly as I can recollect."</p> +<p>Colonel Shepherd then related, to his friend, the story of the +manner in which the brig--when chased by Malays--was saved, by +being brought into the reef, by Will.</p> +<p>"Naturally," he went on, "I was greatly interested in the story +and--expressing a wish to see the young fellow--he was brought off +that evening, after mess, to the Euphrates; and told us how he had +been wrecked on the island in a Dutch ship, from which only he, and +a companion, were saved. I was so struck with his conduct--and, I +may say, by his appearance and manner--that I took him aside into +my own cabin, and learned from him the full particulars of his +story. I don't think anyone else knows it for, when he expressed +his willingness to take my advice, and enlist, I told him that he +had better say nothing about his past. His manner was so good that +I thought he would pass well, as some gentleman's son who had got +into a scrape and, as I hoped that the time might come when he might +step upwards, it was perhaps better that it should not be known what +was his origin."</p> +<p>"But what was his origin, Shepherd? I confess you surprise me, +for I have always had an idea that he was a man of good family; +although in some strange way his education had been neglected for, +in fact, he told me one day that he was absolutely ignorant of +Latin."</p> +<p>"Well, Ripon, as you are a friend of the young fellow, and I +know it will go no further, I will tell you the facts of the case. +He was brought up in a workhouse, was apprenticed to a Yarmouth +smack man and--the boat being run down in a gale by a Dutch +troopship, to which he managed to cling, as the smack sank--he was +carried in her to Java. On her voyage thence, to China, he was +wrecked on the island I spoke of."</p> +<p>"You astound me," Colonel Ripon said, "absolutely astound me. I +could have sworn that he was a gentleman by birth. Not, mind you, +that I like or esteem him one iota the less, for what you tell me. +Indeed, on the contrary; for there is all the more merit in his +having made his way, alone. Still, you astonish me.</p> +<p>"They tell me," he said, with a smile, "that he is wonderfully +like me but, strangely enough, he reminds me rather of my wife. You +remember her, Shepherd? For you were stationed at Meerut, at the +time I married her there."</p> +<p>Colonel Shepherd nodded and, for a few minutes, the two friends +sat silent; thinking over the memories which the words had evoked.</p> +<p>"Strange, is it not," Colonel Ripon went on, arousing himself, +"that the child of some pauper parents should have a resemblance, +however distant, to me and my wife?"</p> +<p>"Curiously enough," Colonel Shepherd said, "the boy was not born +of pauper parents. He was left at the door of the workhouse, at +Ely, by a tramp; whose body was found, next morning, in one of the +ditches. It was a stormy night; and she had, no doubt, lost her way +after leaving the child. That was why they called him William Gale.</p> +<p>"Why, what is the matter, Ripon? Good heavens, are you ill?"</p> +<p>Colonel Shepherd's surprise was natural. The old officer sat +rigid in his chair, with his eyes open and staring at his friend; +and yet, apparently, without seeing him. The color in his face had +faded away and, even through the deep bronze of the Indian sun, its +pallor was visible.</p> +<p>Colonel Shepherd rose in great alarm, and was about to call for +assistance when his friend, with a slight motion of his hand, +motioned to him to abstain.</p> +<p>"How old is he?" came presently, in a strange tone, from his lips.</p> +<p>"How old is who?" Colonel Shepherd asked, in surprise. "Oh, you +mean Gale! He is not nineteen yet, though he looks four or five +years older. He was under seventeen, when he enlisted; and I rather +strained a point to get him in, by hinting that, when he was asked +his age, he had better say under nineteen. So he was entered as +eighteen, but I know he was more than a year younger than that.</p> +<p>"But what has that to do with it, my dear old friend? What is +the matter with you?"</p> +<p>"I believe, Shepherd," Colonel Ripon said solemnly, "that he is +my son."</p> +<p>"Your son!" his comrade exclaimed, astonished.</p> +<p>"Yes, I believe he is my son."</p> +<p>"But how on earth can that be?" his friend asked. "Are you sure +that you know what you are saying? Is your head quite clear, old +friend?"</p> +<p>"My head is clear enough," the colonel replied, "although I felt +stunned, at first. Did you never hear of my having lost my +child?"</p> +<p>"No, indeed," Colonel Shepherd replied, more and more +surprised--for he had at first supposed that some sudden access of +fever, or delirium, had seized his friend. "You will remember that, +a week or two after you were married, my regiment was moved up to +the north; and we remained three years longer in India. When I got +back to England, I heard that you had lost your wife, a short time +before, and had returned. I remember our ships crossed on the way. +When we met again, the conversation never turned on the past."</p> +<p>"I will tell you the story," the colonel said, "and you will see +that, at any rate, the boy may be my son and, that being so, the +double likeness proves to me, incontestably, that he is.</p> +<p>"I had, as you know, been ill before I left India. I had not +been home for fifteen years, and got two years' leave. As you may +know, I had a good fortune, irrespective of the service; and I took +a place called Holmwood Park, near Dawlish and, as I had thought of +retiring, at the end of my leave, I was put on the commission of +the peace. My boy was born a few months after I got home.</p> +<p>"Soon after I took the place, some gipsy fellows broke into the +poultry yard, and stole some valuable chickens--which were great +pets of my wife. I chased them and, finally, brought home the guilt +of the theft to one of the men, in whose tent a lot of their +feathers were found. He had been previously convicted, and was +sentenced to a term of penal servitude.</p> +<p>"Before the trial his wife--also a gipsy--called upon me, and +begged me not to appear against her husband, This, of course, was +out of the question, as he had already been sent to trial. When she +found that her entreaties were useless she, in the most vindictive +tone, told me that I should repent it; and she certainly spoke as +if she meant it.</p> +<p>"I heard nothing more of the matter, until the boy was sixteen +months old. Then he disappeared. He was stolen from the garden. A +clue was left, evidently that I might know from whom the blow came. +The gipsy had been convicted partly on the evidence of the +feathers; but principally from the fact that the boot, which he had +on, had half the iron on the heel broken off, and this tallied +exactly with some marks in my fowl house. An hour after the child +was gone we found, in the center of the drive, in the park, a boot, +conspicuously placed there to catch the eye; and this boot I +recognized, by the broken iron, as that which had transported the +gipsy.</p> +<p>"That the woman had stolen the child, I had not the least doubt; +but neither of her, nor it, could I ever gain the slightest clue. I +advertised in every paper in the kingdom, I offered a reward of +1000 pounds, and I believe the police searched every gipsy +encampment in England, but without success.</p> +<p>"My wife had never been strong and, from that day, she gradually +sank. As long as there was hope she kept up, for a time. I hoped +all would go well; but three months afterwards she faded rapidly +and, ere six months had passed from the loss of the child, I buried +her, and came straight out to India. I went home once, for two or +three months, upon business connected with my property there, some +seven years since. That was when we last met, you know, at the +club. With that exception, I have remained here ever since."</p> +<p>"The trouble will be, I fear," Colonel Shepherd said, "for you +to identify him. That vindictive gipsy woman, who stole your child, +is not likely to have left any marks on its clothing by which it +might be identified at any future time, and her revenge on you +frustrated."</p> +<p>"Thank God!" the colonel said, earnestly, "if it be my son, he +bears a mark by which I shall know him. That was one of his poor +mother's greatest comforts. The child was born with an ugly blood +mark on its neck. It used to bother my wife a good deal, and she +consulted several surgeons whether it could not be removed; but +they all said no, not without completely cutting out the flesh--and +this, of course, was not to be thought of. After the child was lost +I remember, as well as if it had been spoken today, my wife +saying:</p> +<p>"'How strange are God's ways! I was foolish enough to fret over +that mark on the darling's neck; and now, the thought of it is my +greatest comfort and, if it shall be God's will that years shall +pass away, before we find him, there is a sign by which we shall +always know him. No other child can be palmed off upon us as our +own. When we find Tom we shall know him, however changed he may +be.'</p> +<p>"Listen, Shepherd! That is his step on the stairs. May God grant +that he prove to be my son!"</p> +<p>"Be calm, old friend," Colonel Shepherd said. "I will speak to +him."</p> +<p>The door opened, and Will entered.</p> +<p>"I am glad you have not gone, colonel--I was afraid you might +have left, for I have been longer than I expected. I just heard the +news that the 66th are in orders this evening to march, the day +after tomorrow, for Kurrachee; to sail for England, where we are to +be reorganized, again."</p> +<p>"Gale, I am going to ask you a rather curious thing. Will you do +it, without asking why?" Colonel Shepherd said, quietly.</p> +<p>"Certainly, colonel, if it is in my power," Will said, somewhat +surprised.</p> +<p>"Will you take off your patrol jacket, open your shirt, and turn +it well down at the neck?"</p> +<p>For a moment, Will looked astounded at this request. He saw, by +the tone in which it was made, that it was seriously uttered and, +without hesitation, he began to unhook his patrol jacket. As he did +so, his eye fell upon Colonel Ripon's face; and the intense anxiety, +and emotion, that it expressed caused him to pause, for a moment.</p> +<p>Something extraordinary hung on what he had been asked to do. +All sorts of strange thoughts flashed through his brain. Hundreds +of times in his life he had said to himself that, if ever he +discovered his parents, it would be by means of this mark upon his +neck, which he was now asked to expose. The many remarks which had +been made, of his likeness to Colonel Ripon, flashed across his +mind; and it was with an emotion scarcely inferior to that of the +old officer that he opened his shirt, and turned down the +collar.</p> +<p>The sight was conclusive. Colonel Ripon held out his arms, with +a cry of:</p> +<p>"My son, my son!"</p> +<p>Bewildered and delighted, Will felt himself pressed to the heart +of the man whom he liked, and esteemed, beyond all others.</p> +<p>With a word of the heartiest congratulation, Colonel Shepherd +left the father and son together; to exchange confidences, and tell +to each other their respective stories, and to realize the great +happiness which had befallen them both. Their delight was without a +single cloud--save that which passed for a moment through Colonel +Ripon's mind, as he thought how his wife would have rejoiced, had +she lived to see that day.</p> +<p>His joy was, in some respects, even greater than that of his +son. The latter had always pictured to himself that, if he ever +discovered his father, he should find him all that was good; but +the colonel had, for many years, not only given up all hope of ever +finding his son, but almost every desire to do so. He had thought +that, if still alive, he must be a gipsy vagabond--a poacher, a +liar, a thief--like those among whom he would have been brought up. +From such a discovery, no happiness could be looked for; only +annoyance, humiliation, and trouble. To find his son, then, all +that he could wish for--a gentleman, a most promising young +officer, the man, indeed, to whom he had been so specially +attracted--was a joy altogether unhoped and unlooked for.</p> +<p>Morning had broken before the newly united father and son had +done their long and happy talk, and they separated only to take a +bath, to prepare them for the day's work.</p> +<p>The astonishment of everyone was unbounded when Colonel Ripon +announced, on the following morning, that in Captain Gale of the +66th--who, it was known, had risen from the ranks--he had +discovered a son that had been stolen from him, as a child. No one +entertained a doubt, for an instant, that any mistake had arisen; +for the likeness between the two men, as they strode down the +street together, on their way to General Roberts' quarters, was so +marked that--now that men knew the relationship--none doubted for a +moment that they were, indeed, father and son.</p> +<p>The warmest congratulations poured in upon them, from all sides; +and from none more heartily than from the general, who was more +than ever pleased that he had been the means of Will's obtaining +his commission from the ranks.</p> +<p>The same day Colonel Ripon sent off, by a mounted messenger +carrying despatches, a telegram to be sent from the nearest station +of the flying line--which the engineers advancing with General +Phayre's force had already carried as far as the Kojak Pass--to the +government of India; asking leave to go home, at once, on the most +urgent and pressing family business.</p> +<p>Yossouf's grief, when he heard that his master was going to +leave for England, was very great. At first, he begged that he +might accompany him; but Tom pointed out that--much as he should +like to have him with him--his position in England would be an +uncomfortable one. He would meet with no one with whom he could +converse; and would, after a time, long for his own country again. +Yossouf yielded to his reasoning; and the picture which Will drew +of his own loneliness when in Cabul, separated from all his own +people, aided greatly in enforcing his arguments on his mind. He +said however that, at any rate, he would not return to Afghanistan, +at present.</p> +<p>"It will be long," he said, "before things settle down there; +and it will be useless for me to put my money into a herd which +might be driven off by plunderers, the next week.</p> +<p>"Besides, at present the feeling against the English will be +strong. So many have lost men of their family, in the fighting. If +I returned, I should be a marked man. It is known that I threw in +my lot with the English, and it will be cast in my teeth, even if +no worse came of it.</p> +<p>"No, I will enlist in the Guides. I shall be at home with them, +for most of them belong to the Afghan tribes. I am young yet, not +fully a man, and I have my life before me. Some day, perhaps, if +things are quiet and prosperous at home, I will go back and end my +days there."</p> +<p>So it was arranged. One of the officers of the Guides had +accompanied General Roberts, as interpreter; and Will handed over +Yossouf to him, telling him how well the lad had served him. The +officer promised to enroll him in the corps, as soon as he rejoined +it; and also that he would not fail to report his conduct to the +colonel, and to obtain his promotion to the rank of a native +officer, as soon as possible. From Will Yossouf would accept +nothing except his revolver, as a keepsake; but Colonel Ripon +insisted upon his taking, from him, a present which would make him +a rich man, when he chose to return to his native country.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch22" id="Ch22">Chapter 22</a>: At Home At Last.</h2> +<p>The next day Colonel Ripon started with the 66th and, at the end +of the first day's march, met a messenger who, among other +despatches, carried a telegram granting him, at once, the leave he +asked for--and which, indeed, had been due, had he asked for it +many years before. His intention was to accompany the 66th to +Kurrachee, and to sail with it to England. This intention was +carried out, and the remnant of the regiment safely reached +England.</p> +<p>One of Colonel Ripon's first steps was to accompany Will--or, as +he ought now to be called, Tom--to the Horse Guards; and to procure +an insertion in the Gazette stating that Captain William Gale, of +the 66th, would henceforth be known by his true and proper name of +Thomas Ripon.</p> +<p>The colonel purchased a fine estate in Somersetshire and, +retiring from the service, settled down there. There was a +considerable discussion, between father and son, as to whether the +latter should remain in the army. Colonel Ripon was unwilling that +his son should relinquish a profession of which he was fond; and in +which, from his early promotion, he had every chance of obtaining +high rank and honor--but Tom, who saw how great a pleasure his +society was to his father, and how lonely the latter's life would +be without him, was resolute in his determination to quit the +service. He had already, as he said, passed through a far greater +share of adventure than usually falls to one man's lot; and the +colonel's property was so large that there was not the slightest +occasion for him to continue in the service.</p> +<p>Not long after his return to England, Will paid a visit to Ely +workhouse. He was accompanied by the colonel, and the two men +walked together up to the gate of the workhouse. He rang at the +bell, and a woman opened the door. She curtsied, at seeing two +tall, soldier-like gentlemen before her.</p> +<p>"Your name is Mrs. Dickson, I think?" the younger said.</p> +<p>The woman gave a violent start, and gazed earnestly at him.</p> +<p>"It is Will Gale!" she exclaimed, drawing back a step. "They +said you were dead, years ago."</p> +<p>"No, I am very much alive, Mrs. Dickson; and glad, most glad, to +see an old friend again."</p> +<p>"Good Lord!" the woman exclaimed, "it is the boy himself, sure +enough;" and, for a moment, she seemed as if she would have rushed +into his arms; and then she drew back, abashed at his +appearance.</p> +<p>Tom, however, held out his arms; and the woman fell sobbing into +them.</p> +<p>"Why, you did not think so badly of me," he said, "as to think +that I should forget the woman who was a mother to me.</p> +<p>"Father," he said,</p> +<p>"--For I have found my real father, Mrs. Dickson, as you always +said I should, some day--</p> +<p>"It is to this good woman that I owe what I am. But for her, I +might now be a laboring man; but it is to her kindness, to her good +advice, to her lessons, that I owe everything. It was she who +taught me that I should so behave that, if my parents ever found +me, they should have no cause to be ashamed of me. She was, indeed, +as a mother to me; and this lodge was my home, rather than the work +house, inside.</p> +<p>"Ah! And here is Sam!"</p> +<p>Sam Dickson, coming out at this moment, stood in open-mouthed +astonishment, at seeing his wife standing with her hand in that of +a gentleman.</p> +<p>"Oh, Sam! Who do you think this is?"</p> +<p>Sam made no reply, but stared at Tom, with all his eyes.</p> +<p>"If it warn't that he be drowned and dead, long ago," he said, +at last, "I should say it was Will Gale, growed up and got to be a +gentleman. I shouldn't ha' knowed him, at first; but when he +smiles, I don't think as how I can be far wrong."</p> +<p>"You are right, Sam. I am the boy you and your wife were so kind +to, from the time you picked him up, just where we are standing; +and whom you last handed over to go aboard a smack, at Yarmouth. +She was--as you have heard--run down in the North Sea; but I was +saved, in the ship which ran over her, and was taken on it to the +East. There--after being wrecked again, and going through lots of +adventures--I went to India; enlisted there, and fought through the +Afghan war.</p> +<p>"I am a captain, now; and my name is no longer Will Gale, but +Tom Ripon, for I have found my real father--this gentleman, Colonel +Ripon."</p> +<p>"Who feels," Colonel Ripon went on, "how much he and his son owe +to your kindness, and that of your good wife, here; and who, as you +will find, is not ungrateful. I have just bought an estate, down in +Somersetshire; and I mean to install you and your wife in a pretty +lodge, at the gates, with enough to live upon, comfortably, to the +end of your lives."</p> +<p>Mrs. Dickson cried with joy, as Colonel Ripon entered into +details of what he intended to do for them; and Sam--although, as +was his way, much less demonstrative in his gladness--was yet +greatly delighted. There was a good garden to the lodge. They were +to have the keep of a cow, and thirty shillings per week, as long +as they lived. Before the colonel left, Sam Dickson's resignation +of his post was handed in to the master.</p> +<p>The colonel told them that at the end of the month, when Sam's +notice would expire, they were to sell off what furniture they had, +as it would cost more, to convey it so long a distance, than it was +worth; and he would take care that they should find everything +comfortable and ready for occupation, at the lodge, upon their +arrival.</p> +<p>Tom called upon the master and matron and schoolmaster, and +thanked all for the kindness that they had shown him, when a boy; +and Colonel Ripon left a check with the master, to be expended in +tobacco, tea, and sugar for the aged inmates of the house.</p> +<p>No words can express the delight of Sam Dickson and his wife +when, a month later, they arrived at their new home. Tom had spared +no trouble in seeing that it was comfortably and cosily furnished. +The garden had been thoroughly dug up, and planted; and Mrs. +Dickson could scarcely believe that she was the mistress of so +pleasant a home. Tom was forgetful of none of his old friends; and +he wrote to an address which Hans--his companion among the +Malays--had given him when they separated, and forwarded to him a +handsome watch, as a souvenir of his comrade.</p> +<p>There is no more to be told. Captain Ripon--still a very young +man--is living with his father, the colonel. He is one of the most +popular men in his county; and there is some talk of his standing +for one of its boroughs, at the next election; and it is rumored +that he is likely, ere long, to bring home a lady who will be the +future mistress of Burnham Park.</p> +<p>He is quite content that he has left the army--though he +fidgeted a little, while the Egyptian war was going on, and could +not help feeling a little regret that he did not take part in the +storming of Tel-el-Kebir.</p> + +<p> </p> +<p> </p> +<hr class="full" /> +<p>***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK FOR NAME AND FAME***</p> +<p>******* This file should be named 21979-h.txt or 21979-h.zip *******</p> +<p>This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:<br /> +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/1/9/7/21979">http://www.gutenberg.org/2/1/9/7/21979</a></p> +<p>Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed.</p> + +<p>Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution.</p> + + + +<pre> +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/license">http://www.gutenberg.org/license)</a>. + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS,' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Each eBook is in a subdirectory of the same number as the eBook's +eBook number, often in several formats including plain vanilla ASCII, +compressed (zipped), HTML and others. + +Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks replace the old file and take over +the old filename and etext number. The replaced older file is renamed. +VERSIONS based on separate sources are treated as new eBooks receiving +new filenames and etext numbers. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org">http://www.gutenberg.org</a> + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + +EBooks posted prior to November 2003, with eBook numbers BELOW #10000, +are filed in directories based on their release date. If you want to +download any of these eBooks directly, rather than using the regular +search system you may utilize the following addresses and just +download by the etext year. + +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/etext06/">http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/etext06/</a> + + (Or /etext 05, 04, 03, 02, 01, 00, 99, + 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90) + +EBooks posted since November 2003, with etext numbers OVER #10000, are +filed in a different way. The year of a release date is no longer part +of the directory path. The path is based on the etext number (which is +identical to the filename). The path to the file is made up of single +digits corresponding to all but the last digit in the filename. For +example an eBook of filename 10234 would be found at: + +http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/1/0/2/3/10234 + +or filename 24689 would be found at: +http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/4/6/8/24689 + +An alternative method of locating eBooks: +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/GUTINDEX.ALL">http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/GUTINDEX.ALL</a> + +*** END: FULL LICENSE *** +</pre> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/21979-h/images/a.jpg b/21979-h/images/a.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..b74535a --- /dev/null +++ b/21979-h/images/a.jpg diff --git a/21979-h/images/b.jpg b/21979-h/images/b.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..05e7a92 --- /dev/null +++ b/21979-h/images/b.jpg diff --git a/21979-h/images/c.jpg b/21979-h/images/c.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..018c016 --- /dev/null +++ b/21979-h/images/c.jpg diff --git a/21979-h/images/d.jpg b/21979-h/images/d.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..19ab6c9 --- /dev/null +++ b/21979-h/images/d.jpg diff --git a/21979-h/images/e.jpg b/21979-h/images/e.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..4429684 --- /dev/null +++ b/21979-h/images/e.jpg diff --git a/21979-h/images/f.jpg b/21979-h/images/f.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..28f2ce5 --- /dev/null +++ b/21979-h/images/f.jpg diff --git a/21979-h/images/g.jpg b/21979-h/images/g.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..937f344 --- /dev/null +++ b/21979-h/images/g.jpg diff --git a/21979-h/images/h.jpg b/21979-h/images/h.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..8d39f4d --- /dev/null +++ b/21979-h/images/h.jpg |
